# Swing2App What is the Swing2App service? *** {% embed url="" %} Swing2App is a free app creation service, where users can create their own no-code apps. No costs for development or trials; production is free. * You can easily and conveniently create apps with the app creation tool provided by Swing2App. * You can customize the menu and use various functions for free! * Conveniently handle app operation and management from any place and at any time. * Push, pop-up, phone, and SNS linkage enable effective marketing and promotion. With Swing2App's app creation tool, design your app to perfection by implementing a variety of functions. ## ## **The Best Solution For Mobile App Creation** ### Get started now with our hassle-free app creation service that requires no coding skills, making it accessible to everyone. You have round-the-clock, year-round access to create and review your app. ## Services optimized for mobile platforms Versatility in platform support allows it to operate seamlessly on all platforms. * Android app creation support * Support for Apple iPhone app creation * Mobile Web Creation Support * iPad and tablet available ## Powerful app operation tools Once your app is live, utilize a variety of essential app production tools, including push notifications and efficient member management. * Offers HTML creation tools * Provide industry-specific template pages * Image-based page creator * Lots of bulletin board features and tools * Unlimited free push notifications * Provides powerful app management tools ## App Creation Tools It offers a range of tools for the initial stages of app development and distribution, enabling real-time app monitoring during the creation process. * Real-time app creation function * Real-time virtual machine preview * Offers iPhone preview app * Providing APK download function * Create an app in less than 5 minutes ## User Support Accessible to all, we provide essential customer support for production and a dedicated agency service to assist with app registration. * Online Live chat customer service * Online email help service * Providing customization services * Google, and Apple Store registration upload service agency is available ## Swing2App Production Guide Video {% embed url="" %} ## Most Frequently Asked Questions FAQ {% embed url="" %} ## Tutorial Guide Choose the swing2app service provided in Help to East Sea quickly. {% embed url="" %} {% embed url="" %} {% embed url="" %} {% embed url="" %} ## Free features offered by Swing2App Swing2App offers all the essential app creation and operation functions at no cost.
# Swing2App Update \[Swing2App] Update for 2th Week of August \[Push Duplicate released]
**\[Update Information]** **Push Notification Duplicate feature released**
## ![](https://ncdn2.swing2app.co.kr/public/swing_notice_editor_attach/10271686/20233303.png) **Push Notification Duplicate feature released**
After sending a push notification, a duplicate function has been added that allows you to send the same push notification again. To effortlessly resend a push notification with identical content to a previous transmission, you can conveniently achieve this by utilizing the \[Duplicate] button.\\ ### ![](https://ncdn2.swing2app.co.kr/public/swing_notice_editor_attach/10707653/20235803.png)**How to Use** You can check it by moving to App Manager page Go to [Push & Member option – Click on the Push History option.](https://www.swing2app.com/view/push_list)
1\) Go to the Push History option. 2\) If you look at the management area on the far right of the list, you can see the \[Duplicate] button. If you press the duplicate button, you will be taken to the 'Send Push' screen. The previously created content (message title, content, image, link, etc.) is copied and linked in the same way. ### ![](/files/dRDUIg8AbgBevD9NYgLB)**Notice** {% hint style="warning" %} 1\)We have this additional function in the App Manager dashboard, no app update is required. You can access this feature immediately. 2\) Go to push history page and check the push notification list you want to copy and click on the Duplicate button. 3\)When copying, not only the content but also the recipient list gets duplicated. 4\) Reservation setting for the duplicated push notification is also available. {% endhint %}
# FAQ(Frequently Asked Questions) Frequently Asked Questions # Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
What is the difference between the paid version and the free version? **The first difference between a paid version and a free version is being able to launch (commercialized) in the Store and not being able to do it.** -Free is only available as an Android phone installation file, and paid can be commercialized and released on Play Store, App Store, etc. -The paid version can be distributed to stores such as the Play Store, the App Store, etc. This means you can release apps that you have created in the Store. **Secondly, there is a difference in the storage capacity.** The Free version comes with a basic 100MB capacity, while the paid version offers 2GB to 50 GB. (Depending on the product, the amount of the paid version app varies) **The third difference is, that number of app productions is different.** Paid users can create up to 10 apps per account, and free users can create up to 3 apps per account. In addition, there are differences in the number of bulletin board productions, the number of group chat rooms, and the limit of the number of users. Most features are available in the free version, so try it out for free and switch to paid when ready. \*\*☞ \*\***How to use the Swing2App service?**
How long do I need to wait for my app to be released in each store? **\[App Store]** The app Store review period is a minimum of 7 days. If there are no issues with the review, the app will be released within 7 days. In some cases, the app release can take even more than 7 days, because the app gets often rejected during the review phase. Therefore, please consider these points while applying for app store upload, and make sure to check the review feedback for the reasons for the rejection of the app. **\[PlayStore]** Play Store review period takes a minimum of 7 days. If there are no issues with the review, the app will be released on the store immediately after the above review period, but the app upload on the Play Store may also be delayed in the release date if the review is declined. Therefore, please consider these points while applying for the app upload.
What is a Store Upload Agent? A paid version of the app (an app with paid app subscription) will be available for commercialization. Users can launch their paid apps in the stores such as the Play Store and the App Store. If users face difficulty while uploading their app directly to the store, they can apply for the store upload request form. By doing that, on your behalf, the Swing2App team will upload your app to the store. **In other words, putting an app created by a user on the Store instead is called an upload agency.** Therefore, **if you request an upload agency, you can apply by purchasing \[App Store Upload Ticket $20], \[Play Store Upload Ticket $10] on the Swing Payment – Swing Pass, Ticket Purchase page.** After purchasing, you will need to apply for an upload to complete the application. Go to the Version Control →App Creation History menu\*\*,\*\* and **select the \[Request to upload to Play Store] or \[Request for App Store Upload] button in the Market Registration box.** \*The Play Store allows individual uploads, so if you can upload them yourself, you don't need to buy an upload ticket. \*The App Store cannot be uploaded directly by the user and can only be released by the upload agency.
When will the number of days of use of paid subscriptions be counted? Paid subscriptions are counted for days from the date the pass is paid. For example, if you paid on March 4th, the period of use starts on the 4th. **If you need to put your app on the stove, please purchase a paid pass and upload ticket after the app is finished creating.**
How do I get AAB files that I can register on the Play Store? AAB files are not available in the free version of the app, but only in the paid version of the app where you have purchased a subscription to the paid app. (Free version app users can only provide APK file) Please update the app once more after purchasing the paid app subscription provided by the Swing To App. \*Select \[Update App button] in App Creation When the authoring is complete, a button will be created on the app production history page → On the Manager page-> Click on the version control → Click on the production history
If I purchase my subscription again long after the expiration of the subscription period, will the app be able to use it normally? Yes, the expiration of the subscription period does not delete the app, so you can purchase it later. The app will switch to the free version. \*Users who download the app from the App Store or Play Store when switching to the free version will not be able to use the app. So if you buy your pass again later, the app will be automatically restored and you can use it normally. Apps from users who downloaded apps from the Store will also be restored to normal. However, after the launch of the app such as the app store, play store, etc., we will check whether it is being used well. At this time, if the app is discontinued, it will be removed from the store because it is not a normal app, so when the period of use ends, it is recommended that you repurchase the subscription and extend the use as soon as possible. When an app is deleted from the Store, it can sometimes be difficult to restore the app again, and all existing users will be lost.
How do I unsubscribe from the Swing2app Home homepage? To cancel your membership, you can select your profile in the upper right corner of the Swing2app homepage app manager page → click on Edit information → select [Withdrawal from membership](https://www.swing2app.com/view/user_secession). The ID you withdrew cannot be recovered, and you cannot rejoin with the same ID in the future. When you unsubscribe, all apps and content you created will be deleted, so please choose carefully.
How do I set up App Manager? Even if you're the creator of the app, **you will need to change the rating as an administrator before you can use the app as an administrator.** **\[How to set up the app manager]** 1. Please register in the app first. 2\. On the swing homepage, go to the → app manager page →Push & Member → Click on the View all members option. 3\. On the View all members page, select the member you want to change to an administrator, and then select the → 'Administrator' from the 'User' of the current group information → and select the \[Change Group] button. When you have finished making the change, you are done changing the administrator level. \~!!
Can I delete an app I've created? Can I delete an app I've created? Yes, you can delete the apps you created yourself. To uninstall an app, **go to the \[Manager page]-> Click on \[My menu]-> Click on the \[Manage app] option-> here you can check all of your created apps and delete them-> Click on the \[Remove app] button.** You can select the button to delete the app. **\[Precautions]** \* You can delete it when you have more than 2 apps. \*Deleted apps will not be restored, so please think carefully about it. \*Please note that paid users do not want the app to be uninstalled until the end of the paid period.
How do I download and check my app? \*There are 2 ways to download and check the created app on your phone. \*Android phones can be checked by installing the app on the phone, and it is available as a preview on the iPhone. **1) Check on the swing2app preview (app preview)** Please download the \[Swing2App] official app from the App Store and Play Store. After launching the app → Select the top of the category \[App Preview] menu → Please log in with your account subscribed to swing2app in the admin login window. In the app preview, you can see a list of apps created by swing2app. **-iPhone: Check by pressing the Preview button** **-Android: Preview or check app download** \*Please note that the iPhone is only previewed, not downloaded. (Apps created with push and web view cannot be checked on iPhone. **2) Install Android phone APK file \*Only available on Android phones** When you make a request to create an app, an APK file will be sent to the user by e-mail. You can download the APK file to your phone and install the app. You can also download APK files from swing2app-> go to app manager page → version control →app production history
Can't install the free version of the app on my iPhone? Yes, iPhones are not allowed to install and download the free version of the app. The free version of the app created by Swing2App can only be downloaded and installed on Android phones. **The iPhone is only required to use apps downloaded from the official App Store due to the policy.** **Instead, iPhone users can check out the app in a preview.** If you use \[App Preview] in the official Swing2App app, you can check the apps created on the iPhone by 'Preview'. **\[How to use the swing2app app preview]** 1\)Please download the official \[Swing2App] app from the App Store. 2\)After launching the app → Select the top of the category \[App Preview] menu → Please log in with your account subscribed to swing2app in the admin login window. 3\)In the app preview, you can see the list of apps created by the swing2app app. **\*Prototype**- Apps built with Push, WebView cannot be viewed with the swing app preview.
How do I modify and update my app after it is created? The Swing2App has no app modification and update restrictions and is freely available by modifying its content. Since there is no separate task page for modifying (updating) the content of the app, please go to the \[App Creation Page] and proceed with the same when you make the modification. You can overwrite existing apps and keep updating. After saving, press the **\[Update App]** button to update it back to the new version and recreate it.
What happens if I exceed the built-in capacity while using an app? **If you exceed your capacity, your app will be suspended after 3 days of capacity overage.** **\*If the capacity is exceeded, we will notify you by e-mail or text. (Text messages are sent only when the number is registered)** Suspension of an app due to an overcapacity is the same as the expiration of the subscription period. The app won't be deleted, but when you launch it, you'll get a message that says "Your subscription has expired" and the app will automatically freeze. Users who have previously downloaded the app from the market will also be restricted from using the app when the message appears. **\*For paid users, please note that if the capacity is exceeded, the app will be suspended even if the paid app period remains.** Therefore, before the capacity is exceeded, please purchase and apply the amount of capacity you are lacking by purchasing a separate capacity add-on product. **☞** [**\[Go to Swing Payment Page\]**](https://www.swing2app.com/view/shop_list) You can also free up capacity by deleting unnecessary posts from the App Operations page → Service Management → Resource Management page. **☞**[ **\[Go to see how to use resource management\]**](/manual/appmanage/service/capacity-management)
What happens when the usage period expires while using a paid app? **If you do not pay for the subscription again after the expiration of the paid app usage period, the use of the app will be suspended.** Apps released to the Store won't be deleted or lost, **but when you launch the app early, you'll get a "Your subscription has expired" message, and the app won't run.** **Users who have previously downloaded the app from Store will also be restricted from using the app when the message appears.** If you pay for your subscription again, you will not receive the message, and you will be able to use the app again normally. **\[Expired Use Message Window]** If you want to use the app for free again, please delete the app that was previously installed on your phone and re-create the app in a new version after the end of the period. After the end of the paid trial period, the version is a free version, so you can use it as a free app. However, since it is a conversion to a free app, it is not possible to distribute it in the Store.
Are all the features offered by the Swing2App free of charge? **Yes, you can use them all for free.** Swing2App is free to create and operate apps. Therefore, users can use all the functions for free without any restrictions.
I want to upload the app directly to the Play Store. How can I register? After the app is finished creating, you can register and upload the AAB file after purchasing the paid app subscription. How to register (launch) a Play Store app is provided in the manual. (We will not provide you with any consultation related to the registration of the Play Store app) Please proceed by looking at the manual. **☞** [**\[How to launch the Play Store app\]**](/store/playstore/update-playstore)
Is the free app sharing feature only available on Android phones? The ability to share (app sharing, bulletin boards, post sharing, etc.) for free version apps is only available on Android phones. It can only be shared with Android Android ↔ phones. Since the iPhone does not install the free version of the app, you will not be able to use the sharing function. Available after launch on the App Store.
# App Creation FAQ
Design Theme – Can a prototype only select one UI style? Yes. Design Themes Offered by Swing2App – Prototypes can only be used in one style of choice. This prevents you from using a combination of styles. Sometimes there's a UI style that combines slides + header. If you use this mix of styles, this is an app that has been developed separately through customization. Various styles can be applied through customization.
How many characters can I register for an app name? When building an app, there is no specific limit to the number of characters in the name. However, if the number of characters that appear when you install the app on your phone is too long, the name will be truncated and displayed. **App/app titles vary slightly depending on the phone model, but can be between 9 and 11 characters long.** If the app name exceeds 10 characters, please make the app name less than 10 characters when you create the app, as the app name will be truncated and visible when you install the app on your phone.
I want to put full image on the app home screen, but is there any optimized size guide? Images that go into the app don't have any specific recommended size. **Because the standard sizes of mobile phones are all different, it is not possible to know the same image size for all models.** In the case of images, it is a form of scaling the vertical to fit the horizontal length of the phone screen. **Please adjust the recommended size to 1080px wide and 1980-2200px vertical based on mobile screen resolution.** **★To fit the horizontal size, the vertical length is adjusted according to the screen of the phone.** **So depending on what prototype you applied to the portrait and the type of phone you have, it may be a little longer or shorter in length.** Because it is fixed horizontally and vertically changes depending on the mobile environment, not all phones can show the same screen. \* Please note that since the size varies by phone, the latest models may look a little shorter in length, except in the case of tablets.
I can't delete the app. Uninstalling an app is only possible if you have at least 2 apps created in your account. If there is only 1 app, it will not be uninstalled. To 'Uninstall' you can uninstall an app by going to the My Menu – [\[Manage Apps\]](https://www.swing2app.com/view/app_stat) page. \*Please note that paid users should not want the app to be uninstalled until the end of the paid period.
The icon image is cropped and not properly visible. When creating an icon image, you need to put a background color and a center image in the background. Make sure that the center image is not too large. **\*Important\*** Background color is not transparent but must be colored. When installed on your phone, the app icon will be rounded to make it visible. \- Reference images Therefore, if you work with the center image too large, it will be rounded and all the corners will be cut off. Please design an icon image accordingly. The icon creation guide is also available in the manual, so please check out the detailed manual. [**\[Go to the app icon image creation guide\]**](/manual/maual/appbasic/appicon)
What is the standby screen image that registers for basic information? The standby screen is the screen that is displayed during the loading time before the app is launched. For each type of mobile phone, the waiting screen is displayed in different Internet environments and the time it takes to see it varies. It should look as short as 1 to 3 seconds. Due to the mobile app policy, the standby screen is a mandatory item, so when you create a Swing2App app, you must also register an image to be displayed on the standby screen. Guidelines on how to create a standby screen can be found in detail in the manual. **☞** [**See how to create a standby screen image**](/manual/maual/appbasic/apploading)
I worked on the standby screen image to the recommended size, but the image was cropped on my phone and I can see it. **The recommended size for standby screen images is the official recommended size for all models because the phone screen is different for each mobile phone model. (2282\*2282)** However, since the liquid crystals are square, tablet screens, etc. are all different sizes, when you create an image, you need to make sure that the main image does not fill up the wallpaper. Therefore, when working with standby screens, you should check and produce the standby screen guideline manual provided by the swing. Reference Image) [![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/20dcb89afcf17106ac72ea410440d487.png?type=w966)](http://blog.naver.com/PostView.nhn?blogId=swing2app\&logNo=221214959655\&parentCategoryNo=\&categoryNo=49\&viewDate=\&isShowPopularPosts=false\&from=postView) In the attached image, blue becomes the wallpaper. (Image that can be cropped) You just need to work on making sure that all the important image cuts are in the gray space. (Image shown on the actual screen) Usually, users work with the image to a large blue area, so the image is cropped and visible depending on the phone type. Therefore, please make a standby screen by checking the guidelines - how to make it. **☞** [**See how to create a standby screen image**](/manual/maual/appbasic/apploading)
Are there any restrictions on app updates? No, there are no restrictions. You can update your app unlimited times. After you create the app, modify and update it, you are free to use it.
Where do I make modifications (updates) after app creation? The Swing2App does not have an app modification (update) task page. When making corrections, please do the same by going to the app maker page. You can overwrite existing apps and keep updating. After saving, press the \[App Update] button to re-create the new version.
# App Operations & Features FAQ
Are push messages unlimited? Is there a limit to the number of people? Yes, push shipments are unlimited. Push has **no limit to the number of dispatches and is available to an unlimited number of people.** In addition, all the features offered by the Swing2App are free, so push sending is free, and you can send pushes freely.
What capacity is available to the app? The free version and the paid version also have different capacity depending on the product used. **\*Free version: 100MB capacity** **\*Paid version** 1\)Basic type use ticket: 2GB capacity 2\)Expandable subscription: 10GB capacity 3\)Premium Use: 50GB of capacity Please check the capacity provided by version and by product.
What happens if my app is overcapacity? If the amount of capacity provided to the app is exceeded, the app will be suspended. \*Stop after 3 days of overcapacity Even if you use a paid app, regardless of the remaining period of use, it will be suspended if the capacity is exceeded. Suspension of an app due to an overcapacity is the same as the expiration of the subscription period. (See image) **The app won't be deleted, but when you launch it, you'll get a "Your subscription has expired" message and the app won't run.** Users who download the app from the Store will also be restricted from using the app when the message appears. Therefore, if the capacity is exceeded, you can free up capacity by purchasing and applying a separate capacity add-on for as much capacity as you are insufficient, or by deleting the larger posts from the resource management page. If the capacity is exceeded, we will notify you by e-mail or text.
Can I free up space by deleting posts without adding app capacity? Yes you can. On the App Manager Page - Service option - Manage storage page. You can check the post capacity on that page. **\*Posts you don't need (images such as photos) can be checked and deleted.** **As soon as you delete it, you'll see a new capacity aggregation, and you can free up capacity by deleting the post.** (See image) [![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/11c1834143a103ebefc9c172493e945a.png)](http://blog.naver.com/PostView.nhn?blogId=swing2app\&logNo=221208812417\&parentCategoryNo=\&categoryNo=49\&viewDate=\&isShowPopularPosts=false\&from=postView) \* For more information on how to use resource management, please check the corresponding manual. **☞ \[App Capacity Management - Go to the Resource Management How-to Manual]**
Where and how do I check the app capacity? You can check the app capacity by going to the [\[Service-Manage Storage\]](https://www.swing2app.com/view/storage_manager) page. You can see what's available in the app, what it's currently using, and what's remaining available.
How do I set up a deputy administrator? On the Swing2App app Manager page, go to [the Push & Members - View all members menu.](https://www.swing2app.com/view/member_list) You can select the user you want to set as a deputy administrator and then change the permissions to administrator in the permission group settings **There's no separate name of a deputy administrator, but the creator of the app gives the app user administrator privileges to manage and run the app together.** We'll attach a link to the detailed method, so it's easy to understand if you look at it. \*\*☞ \*\***Go to see how to set up a deputy administrator**
I want to add features that Swing2App doesn't offer, what can I do? We are customizing for those who want a service that goes beyond a Swing2App solution. Customization means app development, providing customization in 1:1 customization. You can do this by asking the Swing2App team. If you would like to develop an app or have the features you need, please send your proposal or storyboard swing2app email. After confirmation, the development team will guide you through the availability of development, quotations, etc.
I can't play YouTube on the webpage. This is a problem caused by YouTube not allowing you to embed apps or built-in sites. If you change the YouTube link url to the following format, it will work smoothly: **Example)** → If you change the link format a little bit as above, you can watch the video from within the webpage without problems.
Can I apply AdMob to my app? You can set up and operate the AdMob plugin directly in your own apps. Admob can be set directly by purchasing the \[Google Admob Applied Plugin] product from the Swing2App Plugin purchase page. For more information on how to set up an AdMob, please refer to the manual. **☞ \[Go to Google Admob Setup How-to Help]**
You want your app to be used only by the people you want. (Private app) Yes, you can make a private app. Only users who have installed the app can be approved and designated to use the app by the administrator. First, in \[Service Management - Policy Management], set the app subscription policy - app privacy to 'Private'. If you set it to private, users who install the app will need to sign up first. (If you do not register, you will not be able to use the app) Even if the registration is complete, the administrator must approve the member before he or she can use the app. +Administrators can change their status to 'Approve' by selecting only the desired members from the list of registered members on the \[Push & Member-Inquiry] page. +Authorized users will use your app normally, and if they don't get approved, they won't be able to use it. \*\*☞ \*\***See how to create a private app**
Can I change the content of the messages provided by the app? Yes you can. The content text used in the app can be modified and used by the administrator himself, and it can be changed to a foreign language. Go to App Manager page→Services→Manage Text, and you'll see all the phrases and messages displayed and used in your app. -If you modify the entire text of the app, please press the \[Download] button to accept it as an Excel file, modify it and register the file again. -If you modify only a few phrases, you can search for and find the contents by pressing the \*control + F button. After editing the content, please go to the App Maker page and press the \[Update App] button to update to the new version. **\[Go to the App text Modification Manual Manual]**
Can I change the language offered by the app to another foreign language? Yes you can. If you want to create an app that is available in English, please use it on the Swing2App global site. Swing2App Global Site: Global sites are created with the app default language all set to English, so they are automatically set to English without any further changes. \*Since it is not linked to the Korean site, you will need to register a new member to create an app when using the global site. If you want to change to another foreign language, such as Chinese or Japanese, or if you only want to change a few to English, you can do so in String Management. Go to App Manager page→Services→Manage Text, and you'll see all the phrases and messages displayed and used in your app. -If you modify the entire text of the app, please press the \[Download] button to accept it as an Excel file, modify it and register the file again. -If you modify only a few phrases, you can search for and find the contents by pressing the \*control + F button. After editing the content, please go to App Creation and press the \[Update App] button to update to the new version. **\[Go to the App text Modification Manual Manual]**
Can I modify the App Terms of Use and Privacy Policy? Yes you can. The App Terms of Use can be modified in the App Manager page - Services - Subscription settings - App Subscription Policies page - Terms of Service. For each question, we put the content in the Swing2App basic settings, so the content is all entered. Please check the contents and modify the App Terms of Use to suit the app you created. After modifying the contents on that page, click the **\[Set Policy]** button to save it.
Can't I change the text style, such as text size, color, etc.? Write a post - If you choose to write with the **HTML editor**, you can change the style of the text. When writing in general, writing directly from the app doesn't apply the style. \*\*Swing2App homepage dashboard - **only available for writing with** **HTML editor.** After you create a bulletin board, go to the board where you want to write in the Manage Posts menu. If you choose to Write as an HTML Editor, you can add a variety of text styles. \*\*☞ \*\***See how to use HTML Editor writing**
I don't see the thumbnail image in the post. (Why does it look like an app icon image?) When specifying a thumbnail image in a post, be sure to select Attach Photo to attach the image file. If you put an image inside the content (body), the image is not designated as a thumbnail because it is recognized as text. So when you assign a thumbnail image to your post! Please be sure to register as an attached image. (See image) \*\* This feature is not available in the app, only on the Swing2App homepage - pc version web, mobile version web.
The post thumbnail image duplicates the body, but can't I subtract it? The thumbnail image is designated as the representative image of the first image of the post. At this time, the image designated as the thumbnail will also appear as the representative image of the post, and it will also appear as a duplicate in the text. It's simple to make it look like a thumbnail without duplication. \*\*When entering a post, please check \[Use the first image thumbnail]. With this feature, thumbnailed images don't appear duplicates in the body and can only be used as representative images.
When attaching a bulletin board video, the screen is cut off. Usually, when a video is attached to a bulletin board, the video size is automatically adjusted to match the width size of the mobile phone. Occasionally, a video may be cut off, or the aspect ratio may not fit properly. In this case, you can modify the size yourself. **1. First, when copying the video link, please copy the ‘source code’.** **2. And when you attach a video on the bulletin board please put in the embedded code.** **3. At this point, you can modify the horizontal and vertical size listed on the link. If you set the width to 340px and the height to 240px, it fits into the phone screen(the size of the cell phone grows nowadays, and it fits well with 380X 220).**
Can I download images attached to the bulletin board? You can download and save image attached to the Bulletin Board. Please attach the image to the bulletin board and select the image from the bulletin board post details. Then there’s the down button in the top right corner. You can also select the button to download photos posted on the bulletin board to your mobile phone.
Can I copy a board to another board? The bulletin board can be copied. The copy board function is set up for each bulletin board, making it easy to copy a board. \*Swing2App Manager page - from the \[Post Management] menu - Go to the board you want to copy. By pressing the \[Copy Board] button at the top of the bulletin board, you can select the target board to be copied. When you copy, all posts on the board are copied to that board. \*\*☞ \*\***See how to copy a bulletin board**
How do I copy a post? You can copy and move the written post to another board. You can select individual posts, or you can select multiple posts at once and copy them to a specific bulletin board. **1)App mANAGER Page – In Manage Posts, select the board from which you want to copy the text** **2) Select the 'Listed' view of posts** 3\) You can check the **\[Copy Post]** button in the post list. After selecting the post you want to copy, you can **click the Copy Post button** **to copy the post to the board of your choice.** **☞ \[Go to see how to copy the post]**
I want to delete multiple posts, full deletion. With the Batch Delete Posts feature, you can delete multiple posts at once or delete an entire post. After you go to the board where you want to delete the post from the post management \- Please select 'View List'. (second icon) \- Multiple selections of posts you want to delete (if you select the entire article, the entire post will be selected at once) \- Select the \[Delete Posts in Bulk] button to delete the selected posts done at once. ☞ **\[Go to see how to use batch deletion of posts]**
Can I download posts? Yes you can. App Manager page - By using \[Post Down] provided by Post Management, you can download and archive posts written on the bulletin board as Excel files. **→ the app manager page→ the posts option→ Written posts-> you can check the \[Post Download] button in the list of posts created** However, when the post is down, the image other than the text is not downloaded.
Can I completely move a post to another board? (Copy X) You can use the \[Move the Posts] feature to move posts to other bulletin boards. Copy a post is the ability to copy a post to another bulletin board so that the article is retained on an existing board. Moving a post is the same as the cut function. When you move a post to a different board, the post on the existing board is deleted. **How to use Move Posts** 1\) App Manager page – Select the board you created in Post Management and move it. (Select the board you want to move the post) 2\) Select \[List] 3\) Select the post you want to move from the list of created posts. 4\)Select the \[Move Post] button.
# App installation and download FAQ
How do I download an app I've created? **Swing2App Official App** - You can use the app preview to see which apps you've created. 1\) Please download the official 'Swing2App' app from the App Store and Play Store. \*If the app is already installed, please update to the latest version. ▶ [App store launch link\*\*(URL)\*\*](https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/%EC%8A%A4%EC%9C%99%ED%88%AC%EC%95%B1-swing2app/id1089434204?l=ko\&ls=1\&mt=8) ▶ [Play store launch link\*\*(URL)\*\*](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.hustay.swing.n24b9904fe8b52497d87aaa75f795b5f96) 2\) After launching the app, select the \[App Preview] menu at the top of the → category and log in with your Swing2App website subscription account (ID, password). **\*Note: To log in, you must enter the account you signed up for in the Swing2App homepage** [http://www.swing2app.com](https://www.swing2app.com/) **It's not an account signed up for in the official Swing2App app\~!** 3\) Once you're done signing in, the app preview page will open, where you can see a list of apps you've created. \*iPhones can be confirmed by pressing the preview button. (WebView, apps created by push are not available on the iPhone) \*On Android phones, you can preview the app and download the app. For more information on how to install the app, please check the manual link below. ▶ [See how to install the app](/appguide/appoperation/appinstall)
Can't test an app I've created on an iPhone? The app can also be tested on iPhone. Here are 2 ways to do it. **1)When using the free version app - Use the Swing2App App app preview** Download and install the official \[Swing2App] app from the App Store. Launch the app, select the \[App Preview] menu at the top, and log in with your Swing2App account - you can preview the app you created as a preview on your iPhone. \*You can check all the apps you create for free. \*Only Prototype - Apps created with Push or WebView are not available for preview (only apps created by regular prototypes - slides, tops, footers, etc.) **2) When using the paid version of the app - register the test version with the user's Apple ID 'test-flight'** You can test using the test-flight provided by the App Store. Please purchase a paid app pass, an App Store upload ticket, and apply for an App Store upload. Email after completion of upload application: Please email the App Store test-flight request to the Please collect and send us all the Apple accounts (email addresses) of users who want to use the iPhone app. The audit takes 3 to 5 days, and once it's complete, you can install the app on your iPhone to test it. The test-flight is only available for 90 days, and if you do extend, you will need to purchase an App Store upload ticket and reapply for the upload. \* This applies to the paid version and requires you to purchase an App Store upload ticket and apply for an upload. (Swing Paid Use Pass must be paid.)
When installing the Android phone application, it says that it is from an unknown source. Currently, Google defaults to warning about apps installed from sources other than the Google Play Store. Therefore, if you received your app through an external channel other than the official Play Store, you may receive this message. On your Android phone, you can install the downloaded application by checking **"Settings> Security > Unknown Sources".** Of course, if your app has been uploaded to the Play Store, you won't be able to see these messages, so uploading to the Market will solve it simply. In addition, you can select and proceed with the protection security message as 'Ignore and install'. **☞** [**\[How to install APK file Android phone\]**](/appguide/appoperation/appinstall)
If I update my app after it's built, how will users of existing versions get the update? An update message window appears when the app runs, so users can get the update to the latest version. Currently, when making updates in Swing2App App Production, administrators can choose 'Recommended', 'Required', and 'Do not show updates' themselves. Depending on the option chosen, the contents of the message window will vary, and if 'Required' is selected, the user must update before they can use the app normally. If your app is registered on the App Store or Play Store after switching to the paid version, you will need to update the newly updated version of the app again on that Store. Only when it is updated will users be able to use the changed content.
The apk file received as a free version tries to register on the market (Google, Naver, etc.), so the message ‘Certificate for Debugging’ appears, and it cannot be registered. The debug message is the one you get when you try to market a free version of the app. The free version of the app is not available on the Store. \*Swing2App - The free version of the app is for personal use only (not available on the Store) A paid version of the app is available for release in the Store. (PlayStore, App Store, OneStore, etc. are available) Therefore, if you want to register for the Play Store, please make a paid payment and then receive the aab file to register.
I try to install an app, but I get a message that the signature is conflicting, and it won't install. If you install the paid version after installing the free version, you will receive the following message: Uninstall and install the existing free app and it will install without problems. \*The free version app and the paid version app are not compatible, so please uninstall and reinstall it.
How do I switch to a free app after the end of the paid app period? If you no longer use it as a paid app and want to use it as a free app, please proceed using the method below. 1\) Check for paid apps that have expired 2\)Delete apps installed on Android phone (delete paid apps that have been downloaded previously) 3\)Select the \[Update App] button on the app creation page (when you create a new app, it will switch to the free version) 4\)Swing2App Official App – From App Preview – App Download Progress 5\)Launch the free version of the app again and it will run normally. 6\) In addition, apps that have been uploaded to the Play Store etc. can be downloaded directly by users. (The App Store will be dropped off upon request) [\[Go to the manual on how to switch to a free app after the end of the paid app period\]](/appguide/appoperation/freeversionapp-change)
Please tell us how to share app on your Android phone. App Sharing is a feature that lets you share apps you create for free with each other on your Android phone so that you can pass on your apps to other users. If you apply the settings or the app sharing menu when creating the app, you can use the function to send a link to share the app with another app. You can use it by taking the link and installing the app. **\* App sharing is only possible on Android phones, the free version of the app cannot be shared on iPhone\~!** **iPhones can only download apps released on the App Store.** [**\[Go to see how to install the app to share\]**](/appguide/appoperation/share-app)
Where can I get a link to install the app? Swing2App homepage - When you receive an APK file from your app's creation history, you can copy the link address from the download to install the app. On Android phones, you can download the app directly from the app installation link. **\*The app cannot be installed on iPhone, it is only available on Android phones.** **\*Important\* Progress on PC, Web Browser: Please use Chrome!!** You can copy and install the link address you received by copying it to various paths. [\[Go to the app installation link address to see the app download manual\]](/appguide/appoperation/applink-install)
Please tell me how to download the APK file directly. Swing2App Official App - In addition to using the app preview function, you can download it directly as an APK file on your Android phone. **How to download and install the app as an APK file is only available on your Android phone. \*iPhone not available** **1)Swing2App homepage - Use to receive APK files from app production history** After the app is finished creating, access the Swing2App homepage on your mobile, and select the \[Get APK File] button on the app creation history page. If you choose Get APK file, the file download will start and you can install the app directly on your mobile. **2)Download the app from email** When the app is published, the completed APK file is sent to the user's email. **Blue banner** – You can select \[Download App] to install the app. There are many ways to download the app. For more detailed instructions, please refer to the manual below. [\[Go to the manual on how to install the app on your phone\]](/appguide/appoperation/appinstall)
After switching to a paid app, I get a 'Blocked by Play Protect' message when I download the app. When you try to install a paid app that has been switched to it, you may get a 'Blocked by Play Protect' message, as shown in the image above. Before you launch (register) on the Play Store, if you download from an external channel other than the official Play Store, Google Protect will display the message. In this case, you can select \[Ignore and install] and you can install normally. When you release an app to the Play Store, you won't see that message.
After switching to a paid app, I download the app and get the message "The app is not installed." The message is also a case in which Google blocked the installation of the app on its own. If you don't launch the Play Store, Google will recognize it as an unknown path and arbitrarily block the installation, which will result in a case where you can't install it properly. **Paid apps made with Swing2App that are not available on the Play Store have been identified as unauthenticated paths on Android phones and have been blocked from installation.** Disable Protect security settings in the PlayStore app for easy trouble. **\* In the Play Store app → 'Play Protect', we recommend →that you deselect "Scan your device for security threats" and "Supplement the ability to detect harmful apps".**
Where can I find out how many apps I have downloaded? The free version of the app allows you to check the storage capacity by checking the application information. Long press the app icon installed on your Android phone and a banner window will pop up, and you can check it in the application information window when you select the icon with the shape of an exclamation point. The free version of the app is only available for download on Android phones, so the iPhone is not applicable. Apps released on the Play Store and the App Store as paid versions of the app are listed in the launch notes for the app size. Please check the storage capacity listed on the App Store for your iPhone.
Where can I find the version of the app I downloaded? If you have applied the 'Settings' menu to your app from a regular prototype app or a push app, you can check the version in Settings. Apps that do not apply the setting menu, webview apps, can be checked through the application information, which is a function inside the phone. \*Long press the app icon installed on your Android phone to check the app information. The iPhone can only download the app through the App Store, so please check the version downloaded from the App Store.
# Registration and Login FAQ
Can I change the ID (email) subscribed to on the Swing2App homepage? Some enterprise customers may request a change in their Swing2App subscribed ID as their app representatives change. Since the username change is linked to the personal information account, the user cannot change it directly. If you make a request to the Swing2App app, we will send you a consent form to change your account, and we will be able to make the changes once we have received the necessary documents. The password is the same as the previous one, and you can reset it to the desired password in Change your personal information after logging in.
How do I unsubscribe from the Swing2App homepage? To unsubscribe , **you can select your profile in the upper right corner of the Swing homepage app manager page → edit information → select Cancel Membership.** The ID you withdrew cannot be recovered, and you cannot rejoin with the same ID in the future. When you unsubscribe, all apps and content you created will be deleted, so please choose carefully.
Can I re-register after unsubscribing from the Swing2App homepage? The ID you withdrew cannot be recovered, and you cannot rejoin with the same ID in the future.
Swing2app homepage account - I lost my password. If you lost the password for your Swing2App Site account! **You can find your temporary password by email through \[Forgot Password], log in, and change your information Edit \[New Password].** 1\) Select to access the homepage → find password 2\)Enter your email address, and get a temporary password issued by that email 3\)You can change your password again on the \[Edit My Information] page - Login Information. [https://www.swing2app.co.kr/view/myinfo\_login\_info](https://www.swing2app.com/view/myinfo_login_info)
Can I find my password or change my password when I sign up with the simple login on the homepage? Swing2App Homepage - Easy Login is connected to the account used by Naver and Google to log in. Therefore, the password must be verified with the account you connected to. (If it's a Google account, please go to Google Gmail and check the account you're using) In the Swing2App you can't find your password because you're only logged in with an account connected, and you can't change your password.
Please tell me how to log in as a Associate Administrator on the Swin2App homepage. When logging in as a deputy administrator on the Swing2App homepage, please log in by selecting \[Associate Administrator] from the login screen. 1\)App ID: Enter the ID that the administrator set when creating the app. → App ID refers to the ID that the administrator entered when creating the app in the App Creation - Step 1 Basic Information. 2\) Associate Administrator ID: Enter the ID that the deputy administrator registered within the app. 3\)Password: Enter the password set by the deputy administrator when registering for the app. After you have finished typing, press the Login button and you will be taken to the admin page. **\*Note:** The app must be built before you can log in as a deputy administrator. If you are not in the state where you created the app, the app ID will not be recognized, so please use the Associate administrator login after you have created the app. For information on how to set up a deputy administrator to manage the app, please refer to this post^^ **☞** [**\[Go to the post on how to set up a**\*\* Associate Administrator\*\***\]**](/manual/appmanage/pushmember/associate-administrator)
Tell me how to sign in as a Associate administrator in the app. Unlike the homepage, the app doesn't have a login page dedicated to the Associate administrator. From the login screen, you can log in with the username and password of the user designated as the deputy administrator. Since the rating has already been changed from User to Administrator, you can see that the rating has been changed to 'Administrator' by logging in using the normal method. For instructions on how to set up the app assistant administrator, please refer to the post ☞ [\[Go to the post on how to set up a Associate administrator\]](/manual/appmanage/pushmember/associate-administrator)
Do I need to sign up for an app I’ve created before I can use it? The administrator who created the app can also sign up for the app and then use it as app admin. \*The web and apps are not interlocked.\ Once you’ve installed the app, be sure to sign up for the app you’ve created and use the app.\ In the previous version of 1.0, the administrator who created the app can log in without having to sign up.
How do I unsubscribe from the app? You can unsubscribe from the app from the \[Settings] menu. If you see the \[Settings] menu while logged in from the app, there is a \[Cancel Membership] menu. You can unsubscribe from the app by selecting the appropriate menu. Withdrawal of membership is only available if you are logged in from the app. If you do not become a member, there is no concept of withdrawal of membership.
How do I find my password in the app? In order to find your password in the app, your username must be specified as \*\*'Email'\*\*. So you can send a temporary password to your subscribed email. Launch the app and at the bottom of the login screen, there is a 'Forgot Password' button. If you select the button, you will receive your temporary password in the email where you have subscribed. Therefore, if you have set your ID as a regular ID, you will not be able to use the password finder, so please check it and set it to 'ID form->email'. ☞ [\[Go to the detailed manual of finding app password\]](/appguide/appoperation/find-apppassword)
How do I change my app profile picture? **1.Register your profile image when you register** When you sign up, you can register the image you want by selecting the top profile image \[Register] button. **2.Edit your membership information: Change your profile image after signing up** If you want to change your profile image while logged in after signing up, Please click on the Settings - Edit Member Information menu. In the Edit Membership window, you can change your profile image by selecting the \[Register] button at the top. The name (nickname) can also be modified on that page. [\[Go to the app profile picture registration and change instructions manual\]](/appguide/appoperation/changing-appprofilepicture)
Can I withdraw from the app and re-sign up with the same ID? Yes, you can. However, in order to re-register with the same ID, the administrator must delete all the relevant member (withdrawn member) information from the web dashboard - member inquiry. [Push & Member →View all members→ Select the user who has](https://www.swing2app.com/view/member_list) 1\) Withdrawn from the member inquiry list. In the Membership Information window, from the "Cancel and delete account" menu, 2\) Select the Delete Member button. 3\) Select the "Delete the ID and all information" confirmation button. \*Even if the user has unsubscribed, the information will remain in the app data, so they will not be able to sign up with the same ID. Therefore, if you need to re-register with the same ID, you must delete the member ID and all information from the app through the deletion of the member. [\[Go to the manual on how to re-sign up with the same ID after unsubscribing from the app\]](/appguide/appoperation/sameid-rejoin)
# App Preview FAQ
What is Swing Preview (App Preview)? Swing Preview is an \[App Preview] service that allows you to check the apps created by Swing2App in real-time. After downloading the official Swing2App app – from the App Preview menu – please log in to the account you signed up for on the Swing homepage. On the app preview page, you can see a list of all the apps created by Swing2App. You can preview, download and check it directly on your phone from within the app. \*App preview is also available, especially on iPhones that have not been supported so far. (No download\~!) ★For a detailed description of the swing preview, please check the relevant manual. **☞** [**See how to use the swing preview**](/appguide/swingpreview)
How can I use the swing preview? 1\) Please download the official 'Swing2App' app from the App Store and Play Store. \*If the app is already installed, please update to the latest version 2\) After launching the app, select the \[App Preview] menu at the top of the → category and log in with your swing website subscription account (ID, password). 3\) Once you're done signing in, the app preview page will open, where you can see a list of apps you've created. \- iPhone can be confirmed by pressing the preview button. -On Android phones, you can preview the app, download the app.
Can app assistant administrators also use app preview? Your vice administrator can also log in from the app preview to see the app. When logging in, enter the **sub administrator ID, password, and app ID, and select the \[Associate Administrator Login] button to log in.** Here! For your username and password, please enter the ID and password associated with the app. **App ID can be found on the Swing2App Maker(V2) page → Step 1 App Basic Information, app ID.** Then do the same as logging in to the Assistant Administrator on the Swing2App website! You can log in by entering the secondary administrator ID, password, and app ID. **Please refer to the manual below on how to set up the app assistant manager and how to log in.** **\* See images)** How to set up the app assistant administrator and how to log in, please refer to the manual below! ▶ [\[Check out the Swing Preview Detailed Method Manual\]](/appguide/swingpreview)
How do I use the QR code provided in the preview? On the app preview page, you can check the ‘Preview by QR Code’ menu. You don’t have to log in as an administrator for this menu. **You can preview the app on your phone by scanning the QR code provided for each app.** **★ How to use QR code** Open Swing2App – App Preview – Select the \[Preview by QR Code] button → Bring your phone to the QR code image and your app will run as a preview on your phone.
Cannot send push notifications when viewed as a Preview? Yes, push notifications are not sent when viewing an app as a preview rather than as an app download. In addition, to push, sharing is not available. (No app sharing, bulletin boards, posts, or image sharing) ★iPhone users can only use the preview \* Please note that this feature is not available. ★Android users can select the app download and can use all the features of Swing2app in the downloaded app.
What's the difference between previewing and downloading apps? Swing2App Official App – When you log in to your swing account in \[App Preview], a list of apps you have created will open. At the bottom of the app name, you can check the \[Preview] and \[Download App] buttons. **\* Preview: You can check the app in preview format on your phone without downloading the app.** **\* App download: Download and install the app directly to your phone.**
Prototype: Can I see apps created with Push or WebView in Swing Preview? Did? You can check it with \[App Download] on an Android phone, b**ut not on iPhone.** -Android phone prototype – Apps created with Push and Web View can only be used to view swing2app previews \[app downloads]. Preview is not supported and can only be checked by downloading the app on your phone. -On iPhone, apps created with push and web view are not listed and cannot be checked on the phone.
Can I use Swing2App preview on my iPhone? Yes, downloading the app is not supported for iPhones, and you can check the app through \[Preview]. On the app preview page, you can log in with the same swing account: administrator ID and password to see the list of apps you've created. **\*Prototype: Apps created with Push or WebView are not available as swing previews.** Apps created with Push or WebView are not supported on the iPhone because they can only be downloaded from the app. **\[iPhone – Swing Preview App Launchscreen]**
Can I download the app by receiving the APK file without using the app preview? Yes, Android phone existing app installation method – You can download and install the APK file. You can download and use the APK file that is completed when the app is produced without using Swing2App Preview. Please note that you can use the existing app installation method and swing2app preview together. **\*APK file download is only available for Android phones**
How do users who have subscribed to the Swing2App homepage with Easy Login sign in use the app preview? If you used to log in with a simple login when you signed up for the Swing2App, please select the Naver, Google, and Facebook icons to log in. **\*The iPhone does not come with a simple login function.** For users with Easy Login, please use your Android phone or use the preview function as a deputy administrator login or QR code when using the iPhone.
I'm signed in to app preview, but I don't have a list of apps that have been created. Only apps that have been created will appear in the preview list. So if your app isn't on the list, it's likely that your app hasn't been built yet. If you haven't created the app yet, please press the \[Create App] button to create it. If you have clicked \[Create App], please check the status indicating that the creation is complete in version control and re-connect. (Production time 5-10 minutes)
# Swing Shop FAQ
What is a swing shop? Swing Shop is a shopping mall app creation service that allows anyone to easily and conveniently create their own shopping mall app!! Is. You can easily apply for a shopping mall, and you can use the mall service for free without the cost of development, construction, etc. ◆You can use the swing shop for free without any production cost. ◆Easy operation management such as product registration and management is possible. ◆By establishing a payment system, I can implement the same function as a real shopping mall. ◆If you have a swing app that you have already created, you can use the swing shop function by linking it to the existing app. ◆ The swing shop can also be modified and updated by the user from time to time and provides all the necessary tools for operation. ◆ Functions provided by Swing2App – Marketing uses such as pushes, pop-ups, etc. are all available.
How do I apply for a swing shop? You can apply for the swing shopping mall **Swing Homepage Manager – My Menu – Swing Store menu.** **Enter the store name and email address of the person in charge and select the Activate button.** **As soon as the application is completed, the \[Swing Shop] menu is created on the app operation page.** When the app is finished and the app is commercialized, you can purchase a paid app subscription and change it to 'Use'. Swing shop applications do not have a separate examination or approval, so you can use the swing shop menu right away as soon as you apply. ▶ [Learn more about how to apply for the swing shop](/manual/swingshop/swingshop-apply)
How do I register my product after applying for the Swing Shop? When a swing shop is applied, a swing shop menu is created on the app manager page. From the swing shop menu, you can go into Product Management and register the product after registering the category. The method depends on which product you want to register, so please look at the product registration manual provided by the Swing to App and work on it. 1) [Register a physical product](/manual/swingshop/registration) 2) [Register the reservation product - Date reservation product](/manual/swingshop/reservationproduct) 3) [Register the reservation product - Date & time reservation product](/manual/swingshop/timereservation-product) 4) [Register Digital Product-PDF File](/manual/swingshop/digital-pdf) 5) [Register Digital Product-permission change](/manual/swingshop/authorized-sales) 6) [Register digital products-video files](/manual/swingshop/videofiles-registration) 7) [Digital Product-Coupon Registration](/manual/swingshop/coupon-registration)
Where can I apply for the Swing Mall? Swing shopping mall can be applied on the app manager page > **My Menu – Swing Store menu.** The shopping mall service-payment module is applied by selecting **Activate/Deactivate option.** [**\[Go to apply for shopping mall service\]**](https://www.swing2app.com/view/swing_shop_apply)
Can I apply the swing shopping mall to an existing app? Yes, it is applicable. The swing shopping mall can be used by applying from my menu. You can select an existing app and apply a shopping mall to that app to use it. So instead of having to create a new app, you can apply the shopping mall function to your existing app and use it.
How do I put the size in the shopping mall when registering the product image? There is no recommended size when registering the product. The product image is automatically corrected to the image size to fit the horizontal size of the mobile phone.
Is there a swing shop fee? The swing shop feature is free to use, and there is no charge to use the mall.
Can digital products not be deposited without a passbook? If you sell digital products - PDFs, coupons, video files, permissions, etc. in the app, you must apply the in-app payment module and you will not be able to make a passless deposit. In addition, regular card payments are not allowed by the store, so if you sell digital products, you will need to develop an in-app payment module provided by Apple and Google and apply it to your app. Cashless deposits, unlike card payments, do not know when the user made the deposit and when it was paid. You have to make a payment and put the product in right away (there is a period of use, etc.), but it is difficult for the manager to manage everything. And this method is a payment system that is not allowed in stores either. In the case of digital products, we do not approve them without a separate electronic payment because we are trading invisible products. Even in the swing shop, if you make a passless deposit, you will not be able to apply. It's hard to do in-app, and if you only have to make a passless deposit into the product!! Instead of using the swing shop, you can write down the deposit account number on the bulletin board or announcement and use it as a way to receive separate deposits from users. However, please note that the app of the content (how you get paid by listing your account number on the bulletin board) is not available on the App Store!
Can digital products only apply to the in-app payment module? Yes yes. In accordance with the App Store and Play Store payment policies, if the app sells digital goods (intangible services such as coupons, permissions, files, etc.) except physical products, the general electronic payment system (card payment, passless deposit) including the Pay App is not applicable. (Even if you can sign up for the Pay App, the Store won't allow it.) Therefore, if you plan to launch an app that applies digital products, you should not apply an electronic payment system such as a pay app, but rather develop and apply the in-app payment module provided by Apple and Google separately to your app. -Please use the inquiry board ([http://www.swing2app.co.kr/view/service\_qa](https://www.swing2app.com/view/service_qa)) for in-app consultation, and live chat during business hours. \- In-app requires development work, and development costs vary depending on the volume inside the app. Cost guidance is available after the consultation.
Can I apply for a PAYPAL (payment module) in the free version of the app? Swing Shop access is also available in the free version of the app. However, **when you apply for a PAYPAL(applying the actual payment module), you can only apply for the paid version of the app.** In other words, when you check the payment service as 'unused', you can use all the free versions\*\*, and when you check 'Use', you can only apply for the paid version of the app.\*\* When you use the payment service (PAYPAL application), it is commercialized, so it can only be applied to the paid version of the app.
What is PAYPAL? PAYPAL is an electronic payment service agency that supports on/offline payment services. Since it provides payment services such as online card payment, passless deposit, and mobile phone payment, there is a shopping mall function within the app, so when you need to make a payment, you must connect an electronic payment system (module) such as a PAYPAL. Swing2App has partnered with PAYPAL to support payments by linking PAYPAL payment methods to apps created by Swing2App. So if you're creating a shopping mall app, you'll need to sign up for a pay-per-store store. When you apply your subscribed ID to the app, the app will be able to make the actual payment.
Please let us know the industry that you cannot sign up for PAYPAL. Please check the industries that are not eligible for registration. **\[Industries not eligible for registration]** **1) When you make a payment in the form of cash, credit, and not in cash trading the product** **2) Gambling, Illicit Trade** **3) If at the time of checkout, the buyer and seller are not directly connected, but there is an intermediary dealer (remove the fee from the middle and provide the seller with the remaining amount)** **4) If it is difficult to confirm the industry (product cannot be verified, the actual transaction path cannot be confirmed, sponsorship, funding, fundraising, etc.)** **5) When selling content, if the content is a financial instrument such as securities, stocks, derivatives, etc.** **6) Sell adult products, liquor, etc.** **7) Mobile gift certificate sale, point charging product is not available** **8) Business agency expenses (visa application agency, product purchase agency, etc.)**
What are the shopping mall payment methods? Regular card payment, bank transfer, and micropayment (mobile phone payment) are standard.
# Billing FAQs
Refund Policy Unused passes and tickets purchased from Swing2App can be refunded. Please note, however, that no refunds will be given after the vouchers and prizes have been used. **1) The refund can be fully refunded on the day of purchase of the paid subscription, but no refund will be made if the number of days of use is deducted by even one day.** **2) When purchasing discounted products, no installment refund will be made for the remainder of the period after the date of use has commenced even for a single day.** **3) If the payment was made by credit card or electronic payment, if the refund is made after 30 days of the payment date, the refund will be processed in the amount excluding the 10% card fee.** **4)Unused tickets are 100% refundable.** Even if your app isn't released to the Store, agency fees won't be refunded for apps that have used a ticket to register for the Store. **5) For free passes and tickets received free of charge, such as coupons, even if you have not used them, there will be no refund.** \*To apply for a refund, please refer to the 'How do I get a refund' section below.
How do I get a refund? [Online Stores - When you enter \[Payment Status\]](https://www.swing2app.com/view/payment_list), the \[Request for Refund] button will pop up for the product you have paid. You can get a refund by selecting the Request a Refund button. \*At this time, you can only apply for a refund for unused tickets and tickets. The Request a Refund button does not appear for used tickets! Even if the refund application is completed in the swing, the cancellation authorization may take 1 to 4 days, depending on the card company. If you face any other problems, please contact the Swing2App Customer Center. **Email**:
Where do I pay for the paid products? For payment, you can see the app manager page – at the top of the dashboard, there is a \[Payment] menu. Go to the Swing Pass, Ticket Purchase page/Swing Plugin purchase page, select the product you want, and pay for it. Payment methods include \[Credit Card Payment, Mobile Phone Payment, Passless Deposit, Kakao Pay, Swing-to-App Electronic Payment (Pay App)]. You can choose a convenient method and make a payment. Mobile phone payment is not more than $50, so please use other methods such as card payment, pay app, Kakao Pay, Passless deposit, etc. Mobile phone micropayments are not available to SKT carriers, so please understand the benefits. (LG, KT only)\\ Once the payment confirmation is complete, we will add the product as your username. **Passbook-free deposits may take some time outside business hours, weekends and holidays because the person in charge will add the voucher after the deposit has been confirmed.** [Online Stores -](https://www.swing2app.com/view/payment_list)You can check your purchases and products in \[Payment Status].
I paid for a fee. When will the number of days of use be counted? Paid subscriptions are counted for days from the date of payment of the subscription. For example, if you paid on March 4th, the period starts on the 4th of March. So if you need to put an app on your stove, make sure you've finished building the app and then buy a paid subscription and upload ticket.
How are the days of use handled during the App Store and Play Store review period? The App Store and Play Store review period takes about a week. During the examination period, the number of days of use of the pass will be deducted as it is. **Even if the app has not been released to the Store, the number of days of use will be counted because the app must operate normally during the review period.** Therefore, we will not supplement the review period of the app. Users may want to think about the review period in advance and use it as a way to add more tickets in time for the completion of the review.
How do I use the voucher coupon I received from Swing? When you receive a swing coupon by email, the coupon has a serial number. [Swing homepage Online Stores > Use Coupon](https://www.swing2app.com/view/payment_coupon_use) Go to the menu, enter the serial number listed on the coupon and use the coupon. The coupon has a redemption period, so be sure to check the expiration date. The applied product can be checked in the [Online Stores - \[Payment Status\]](https://www.swing2app.com/view/payment_list) menu.
Will I get a discount on my long-term paid app subscription? If you look at the prices of your products, we offer 6 months and 12 months at a discount. -19-20% discount on 6-month subscription purchase -26%-30% discount on 12-month subscription purchase You can buy a 1-month pass cheaper than you would for a 1-month pass, and the discount rate varies from product to product, so please check the price and proceed with your purchase.
After I purchase my subscription, where can I find out how long I want to use it? When you purchase an item, the top of the dashboard lists the name of the purchased product and the expiration date of the app. And [Online Stores - \[Payment Status\]](https://www.swing2app.com/view/payment_list) allows you to check the usage period along with the detailed payment status of the purchased product.
Will I be automatically charged when I purchase an extended subscription to a paid app? It's not an automatic payment. Therefore, after confirming the date of use, you must re-purchase on the site before the expiration of the period to extend the period of use. Please check the date of use correctly and make your payment.
What happens to the app if I don't pay for it again before the expiration of the paid app period? When the paid period ends, the app will also be suspended. The app will not be deleted, so if you re-purchase your subscription, the app will automatically be restored and run normally. The number of days you can use the paid app is listed on the dashboard screen at the top of the Swing2App site app manager page. From the date of use, you will receive an e-mail announcing the end of the service period, so you can pay before the end of the use date.
# Paid App Passes & Tickets FAQ
Does the paid app subscription apply to one app only? Four subscriptions and all paid products are applicable per app. For example, if you want to launch 3 apps on the Store, you'll need to purchase each of them for each app.
When do I purchase a paid app subscription? Paid app subscriptions are counted as soon as they are purchased. For example, if you paid on March 4th, the period starts on the 4th of March. Therefore, please pay for and use the final app after it is created.
Is the 1 month of paid app subscription based on 30 days? 1-month subscription is based on 30 days. 6 months is for 180 days of use and 12 months is for 360 days.
If I purchase a paid app pass, will the app be launched directly to the Store? Just because you purchased a subscription doesn't mean it's going to be launched on the store right away. A subscription is a conversion of an app to a paid version, which must be registered with the store where you want it to be released. After purchasing the Play Store upload ticket and the App Store upload ticket, please request the upload and we will proceed with the store launch.
Can I purchase a basic paid app subscription and then change it to an extended subscription in the middle? Yes, it is possible to change it, but it will be changed to another product only after the end of the period of use currently in use. It cannot be changed during the period of use, and will be applied as another subscription product after the end of the period. In addition to the basic subscription, other products can also be changed after the end of the period of use of the use of the use right.
What is a Play Store upload ticket, an App Store upload ticket? **This is an agency fee for registering apps created in Swing2App on the Play Store and App Store.** If it is difficult to launch in person, please purchase the ticket and apply for upload, and we will launch it on our behalf.
Does the upload ticket apply to one app only? Upload tickets cost 1 time and are applicable to one app. If you need to upload multiple apps, you'll need to purchase an upload ticket for each of those apps.
After I buy upload tickets, where do I apply for uploads? \*Go to the App Manager page →Version Management→App Creation History menu and select the \[Request for Play Store Upload], \[Application for App Store Upload] button. Fill in the application form and complete the upload application. Please apply for upload after payment, as we will be able to perform the upload process only after the application has been received.
What is a Mobile Web Registration Ticket? It is a service that allows you to register an app created by Swing2App by making it a mobile website. You can purchase a separate domain, purchase a mobile web registration ticket, request a mobile web registration, and we will upload the application you created on the web as it is.
Is mobile web registration not available on the Basic Pass? Mobile web registration can only be applied for when purchasing an extensible, premium subscription. The basic subscription does not apply to the mobile web registration application, so please refer to the use form.
For how long can I use the mobile web? The period of use of the mobile web is the same as the period of use of the paid app. Since the app is connected to the web as it is, when the paid use period of the app ends, the mobile web will end the same period. \*If the paid app is used for 1 month, the mobile web will be available for 1 month, and the mobile web will be automatically extended when the paid app subscription is repaid.
Do I need to have the domain required for mobile web registration? Yes, you must purchase your domain before you can purchase your mobile web registration ticket. Please purchase a separate domain that can link the app. \*Hosting companies such as Cafe24, Kodo Mall, etc. Since you need a domain to connect to a mobile website, you can buy a domain first, then purchase an extended subscription and a mobile web registration ticket.
If I update the app, do I need to re-purchase a store upload ticket? If you update your app, you'll need to update it on the launch store as well, so you'll need to buy an upload ticket and reapply for upload. In addition to app updates, you will also need to purchase an upload ticket to re-apply for content such as modifying the app description, screenshot images, etc. that have been released to the Store. \*Play Store does not require you to purchase upload tickets if you do it yourself. \*The App Store can only be uploaded and updated and needs to be purchased. \*Updates also have a review time, and they take the same amount of time as app registration review time.
If I update the app, do I need to re-purchase my mobile web registration ticket? Yes, you need to purchase a mobile web registration ticket and apply for upload. We'll also update the mobile web with the changes.
Does an upload ticket cost 1 time? (Store, Mobile Web Registration Ticket) Yes, an upload ticket costs 1 time. (Includes PlayStore, App Store, and Mobile Web Registration Tickets) After the app launches, if you need an update, you'll need to repurchase your upload ticket and re-apply for upload. \*If the Play Store can be updated directly, you can do it yourself without having to purchase an upload ticket.
What is a storage add-on? It's a la carte product that you can only add to your app storage if you need it. It is a monthly product that is applied on a 1-month basis. You can choose from 2GB to \~100GB of required capacities to purchase.
Will the storage capacity be available for 1 month? Yes, your purchased capacity will be available for 1 month. If you need another dose after 1 month, you will need to re-purchase and use the required capacity.
If I purchase multiple additional storage items, will the combined capacity be applied? Capacity add-ons do not add up to capacity. For example) If you purchase three 2GB storage products, it will be divided into 1 month of time by adding 2GB of capacity for 1 month and then adding another 2GB in the following month. The combined capacity does not add up to 6 GB, which applies in 1-month increments. So if you need a larger capacity, please purchase an additional 5GB or 10GB capacity.
What happens if my app is overcapacity? If the amount provided to the app is exceeded, the app will be suspended regardless of the number of days remaining in the app, so please always check the app capacity. \*If the capacity is exceeded, we will notify you by e-mail. \*You can free up capacity by purchasing additional capacity products, or you can manage capacity by deleting large posts from the resource management page.
Will the purchase of additional storage items be reflected directly in the app? Yes, it will automatically be reflected in the app and will add as much capacity as you have purchased. As it is a product with a period of use, please pay according to the time you need.
What is an SMS ticket? A product that allows you to send SMS text messages to users of your app. It is $20 for 1,000 shipments.
How do I buy more than 1,000 SMS texts? You can check the purchased quantity at checkout to purchase more shipments. Example) For two purchases, 2,000 purchases will be made and the cost will be calculated as $40.
How are SMS texts deducted, and where do I check the remaining quantity? Each SMS authentication is deducted each time you send, and text messages are also deducted based on the number of messages you send. The SMS shipment quantity can be checked → the remaining quantity on the payment → payment product usage page on the swing app operation page.
Can I send an SMS item directly when I purchase it? Where can I send it? \[Send SMS Message] When you purchase a product, it will be automatically reflected on the admin page, and you can send a text to the app member immediately. Text messages can be sent → Push & Push Sending → Members → sending SMS to the app operator.
# Paid usage and uploading FAQ
I purchased a pass and a ticket to upload to the store. Do I have to do anything more after making the payment? After making the payment , \*\*you will need to apply for upload to the Play Store and App Store in the App \*\***Manager - Version Control – \[App Creation History] menu.** An upload request must come in before the representative can register your app with Sto. Therefore, after purchasing the pass and the upload ticket, please complete the upload application form and complete the upload application.
When I apply for a PlayStore upload, will the app be released immediately? We'll act on behalf of Swing2App and upload the app to the Play Store. You will be reviewed by Google Apps. **Google app review takes an average of about a week (7 days).** **So uploading doesn't mean your app will be released right away.** **If there are no issues after the review, it will be released to the Store after the review period (within 7 days).**
Please tell us about the Play Store and App Store review period. Both the Play Store and the App Store take an average of 7 days. Because the audit is going in, it may take faster or later depending on the audit. If there are no issues with the review, the release will be released immediately after the above review period, but if the PlayStore review is rejected, the release date may be further delayed. Please allow some time to apply.
What is the difference between the paid version and the free version? **The biggest difference between the paid and free versions is being able to upload to the market and what you don't have.** Free is only available as an Android phone installation file, and paid money can be commercialized and released in stores such as the Play Store, App Store, etc. **The second is the difference in capacity.** The free version offers 100MB basic and the paid version offers from 2GB to 50GB depending on the product type. **The third is the difference in the number of bulletin board productions and the number of group chat rooms opened.** The free version allows you to create 30 bulletin boards and 1 group chat room. The paid version can be produced from 100 bulletin boards to unlimited (depending on product type) and from 5 to unlimited group chat rooms (depending on product type). **Finally, the number of app creations is different.** Paid users can create up to 10 apps per account, while free users can create up to 3 apps per account. However, the free version also has most of the features available, so try it out for free and switch to paid if you need it ^^ Please check the Swing2App Service Policy for details. **☞ \[Swing Pricing]**
How many days are in the 1-month subscription? When you purchase a 1-month paid app subscription, the total number of days of use is 30 days. Since the total number of days varies from month to month (some months with 28 days, and there are also 30 and 31 days), the 1-month period is 30 days. Therefore, 180 days of use will be entered when you pay for 6 months, and 360 days will be entered when you pay for 12 months. In particular, some people ask if it is not 365 days because you paid for 1 year, but it applies to the number of days calculated as 1 month and 30 days!! Please keep that in mind.
How do I check which version of the app has been listed in the Store? For those who have uploaded through Swing2App, you can access each platform (App Store, Play Store) to see the version of the app that has been released. Even if you don't have access to each store, you can also check it on the swing2app Manager page. \* You can check the market version for each platform >On Manager page> the version control > market registration management page. You can also go directly to the market from that page, and you can see a variety of information, including information registered in the store.
Does the App Store allow users to directly place apps on the market? The App Store doesn't allow you to upload directly even if you have an Apple developer account. Users cannot upload directly, and can only upload on a Swing2App basis. Apple, unlike Google, doesn't register app files, but instead requires the developer's app development source, security content related to development, etc., so users can't upload it directly. Please understand that it can only be uploaded by the developer (Swing to App). (App Store upload agency: 1 time $20) **☞ \[Go to see how to apply for App Store upload]**
Can the app be updated from time to time after I register for the Store? Apps created by Swing2App can be modified and updated from time to time. However, there is something that needs to be updated in the version, not a real-time reflection. \- Automatic reflection of fixes is only automatically reflected when you modify and add step 3 page steps and app operation menus. \*Update required (menu that needs to be re-created and uploaded to a new version) -Step 1 Basic information (app name, app icon image, standby screen image) Step 2 Design Theme (Prototype, Color) If you make any of the above modifications, select the Update App button to recreate the app in a new version. The Play Store and App Store also need to be updated to the new version of the app. Since the Play Store can be updated directly by the user, and the App Store can only be done on the agency, you will need to purchase an App Store upload ticket and apply for an App Store upload. (If you find it difficult to do the Play Store yourself, please apply after purchasing the PlayStore upload ticket)
Is the free version of the app not available on the Store? The free version of the app produced by Swing2apps cannot be commercialized. (Available for personal use only) Therefore, if you use it for the purpose of launching it in the store, you will need to purchase a subscription to the paid app provided by the Swing to App. After switching to a paid app, you can launch it in the Store with that app.
When uploading to the store, I get a message that the existing version or package is the same. If you try to upload the same version of the aab file as the one already registered, the message will appear. When uploading a newly updated app, please make sure it is different from the previous version and upload the aab file created by the new version.
I want to edit the information for an app released on the Play Store. Since the app is registered with the user's Google developer account, the Play Store can directly modify and update the information afterward. For instructions on how to edit and update your PlayStore information, please refer to the \*\*\*\* manual below. **☞****Go to the PlayStore app update** If you find it difficult to do it yourself, please apply to upload to the Swing2App and we will update it. \*Play Store upload ticket $10 purchase and application
I want to edit the information for an app released on the App Store. The App Store requires an app update review to correct the information. Since the App Store does not allow users to make their own modifications, modifying only the release information will also require you to purchase an App Store upload ticket and re-apply for the upload. \*App Store Upload Ticket $20 purchase and application
# Unlimited Usage and Package FAQ
What is Push Unlimited Paid App? It is a subscription that can only be purchased for apps created exclusively for push, and it is a product that has no time limit. You don't have to pay a monthly fee to get unlimited access to the app for an unlimited period of time.
What is a paid webview unlimited app? It is a subscription that can only be purchased for apps created exclusively for webview, and it is a product that has no time limit. You don't have to pay a monthly fee to get unlimited access to the app for an unlimited period of time
Do I need to purchase a separate store upload ticket when I purchase a webview and push unlimited subscription? Unlimited paid app products for webviews and push-only do not include upload tickets (Play Store, App Store). You will need to purchase and apply for a Store upload ticket that you want to launch and update on the Play Store, App Store, etc. We recommend that you purchase unlimited packages that come with upload tickets. [**\[Go to the package purchase page\]**](https://www.swing2app.com/view/payment_list_by_recommend_voucher)
Is there any cost to use the app in the future when I purchase a webview or push unlimited subscription? Since it is an unlimited product, so you can use it for a lifetime when you purchase a subscription. There are no additional usage fees to be paid. However, if the app is updated, the app must be updated by the store, so you may need to purchase additional products such as App Store upload tickets and Play Store upload tickets.
Can I use unlimited Android or iPhone products and change them to Integrated (Android + iPhone)? Yes you can. For example, if you add an iPhone while using \[Push Only Unlimited Android $250]→ you can purchase the \[Push Only Unlimited iPhone $350] product. If you purchase additional products, they can be used together in an integrated format. In addition, the App Store upload ticket ( $20) must be purchased separately. (App Store upload launch agency cost) However, if you purchase each product separately, it will be more expensive than the integrated type, so if you are going to run Android + iPhone, it will be more expensive to purchase and use the integrated type from the beginning.
When I purchase a webview, push unlimited subscription, will the app switch to unlimited right away? The development team will set aside unlimited servers, so even if your payment is complete, you won't be able to switch right away. The development team will handle it separately within 1-2 hours, and you can use it as an app with an unlimited usage period after you send the notification e-mail.
Do apps that are available in the Store need to be updated after purchasing a webview, push unlimited subscription? App updates are essential because you need to set aside unlimited servers. Therefore, you will need to update the Play Store and the App Store again with an updated version of the app. A new version of the app must be uploaded to the Store for existing users to receive and use the update, and new users can also use it as an app with push restrictions.
Can I change to unlimited products while using the basic subscription? Yes you can. If you are using the basic subscription, you can change it to unlimited products at the end of the use and purchase it. However, since partial refunds are not possible for the remaining period of use, it is recommended that you purchase the product after the end of the service period. (If you don't mind a partial refund, you can buy it right away while you're using it.)
Can I use unlimited integration and change to only one platform for iPhone or Android? It is not possible. Users can make apps invisible by deleting or unpublishing apps from individually released stores. For example, if you only use the Play Store Android phone, and you stop using the App Store, you can proceed by unloading the app that has been released to the App Store. We cannot take any action, such as discontinuing the use of the app on the user's phone, and we will not refund it by deducting the cost of the unlimited paid app product price that you do not use.
Please tell us the steps to proceed after purchasing the webview and push unlimited passes. 1\) After the app is finished creating, please purchase unlimited use for push-only and store upload tickets. Alternatively, we recommend that you purchase a package that includes all your upload tickets. 2\) When you purchase an unlimited subscription, the development team will set aside unlimited servers and re-create the app in a new version. (It takes 1-2 hours, and the setting time may be delayed when applying outside of business hours.) This means that unlimited access will not be used immediately, even if payment is completed. 3\) When the operation is completed, a completion notification e-mail will be sent to the user. From the time you receive the completion email, you will be able to use the app with an unlimited trial period. 4\) We will send you a list of the store launch method and upload application method through the notification e-mail, so please check the contents and apply for upload. You can receive an upload request to release your app to the Play Store, App Store, etc.
After purchasing the Admob Power Package product, how do I set up the Admob ad? If you select the \[Buy] button on the Admob Power Package product page, you can see the detailed product description and how to set the Admob plug-in ad. After purchasing the product, you can set up Admob ads directly in the app, and you can also check the manual below to learn more about how to set up ads. **\[How to set up Admob plugin ads]**
Will the upload ticket provided in the package only be given for 1 time? This is a four-time offer, and if you need an update after the initial registration (launch) of the app, you will need to purchase a store-specific upload ticket and re-apply for the upload. -App Store upload ticket: $20 -PlayStore Upload Ticket: $10 \*Play Store does not require you to purchase upload tickets if you do it yourself.
Why Does other Package offer have a different pass than the Basic Pass? The services offered are a little different from the four basic products. You can only have up to 500MB of app capacity, 4 chat rooms, and up to 50 bulletin boards. Due to the different services provided, please make sure to check the product details before purchasing.
When can I purchase a package? Packaged goods can only be purchased from apps built from regular prototypes. -If you use a small amount of capacity and need a lot of time to use the app: Recommended product of $330 in a budget package -When using large capacity: Large storage package for a $550 product is recommended -When operating a profitable app with Admob applied: We recommend the AdMob Power Package for $580. For an introduction and detailed information on each product, please refer to the pricing policy below. **\[Go see the swing package product]**
Is the Push, WebView app not available for purchase of packaged goods? Yes, apps created with Push, WebView are not available for purchase. Packaged goods can only be purchased in apps created with generic prototypes - Top, Footer, Slide, Drop-Down List & Box.
Can I change my subscription to another paid app while using the package? After the end of the subscription period of the package paid app in use, it can be purchased and applied with another subscription. During the use of the packaged product, it is not possible to change to another subscription, so please use it after the end of the service period.
In addition to the Google Admob plugin product, do I need to purchase paid app access and store upload tickets separately? Yes, this product is a plug-in product that only allows you to set up an admob. Paid app access and upload agency fees are not included. \*Admob Power Package product is recommended, which includes all passes, admob and store upload tickets. In order to launch the Play Store and App Store, you will need to apply for an upload. \- Play Store upload ticket, app store upload ticket purchase and application -The Play Store does not require the purchase of tickets if you can register and update directly, and the App Store can only be done on your behalf.
# Push sending FAQs
Can push-notification be sent from all apps created by Swing2App? Among the Swing2App prototypes, the webview app created as "webview only" cannot use the push notification function. All apps other than webview apps - General prototype apps and push-only apps can use push-notification.
Is there a limit to send push notifications to members? You can send Push-notifications an unlimited number of times and to an unlimited number of members.
Is the push notification feature available for free? Yes, the push notification feature is available for free. You can also send it from the free version of the app.
Can I send push notification to all users who have installed the app? Yes, push notifications will be sent to all users who have installed the app. In a regular prototype app – even to non-registered users (guests) as long as the app is installed, it will be sent. But for the push app, the push notification will be sent in one go to all users who have installed the app.
Can I select members when sending pushes? For the General prototype apps, push notifications can be sent by selecting members. You can select any user, or group to send the push. However, the push-only app cannot select members, and can only send notifications to all members.
Can I send a push notification on any date or time zone? With help of Push Reservation settings, you can send push notifications based on the date and time zone of a specific region. You can set push notifications' shipping date, shipping day, shipping time, repeat cycle, etc.
When sending a push, is it possible to apply it to go to a web link or a specific page in the app? Yes, you can. You can select the \[Link Wizard] button from the Send Push menu to choose which page or menu to go to. \*Push-only apps cannot use the link wizard. The app can be applied by directly entering the web link address (URL) in the link registration field. 
[Push-only app] Can I not select a member when sending a push? When sending a push from the push app, you cannot select a member, only send the entire service. The push-only app is an app created by applying the website (homepage) link to the app as it is, so there are no members signing up for the app. Therefore, since the app cannot recognize the member, the member cannot be selected, and only the entire shipment is possible. And all are marked as 'guests'.
Can I link Swing2App push through [Push-only App] member linkage? (Push API integration) Yes you can. It can only be provided to paid app users, and if requested, we will send you a push API integration guide. You can set it up and use it yourself. When the member is linked, the registered member in the app operation-member inquiry is linked. In addition, push sending can be sent only to the members who want to send it. If you can't set it yourself, you can ask us to do the work. Development costs are incurred when the work is commissioned. If you need this feature, please contact us by email. We're here to help you with the instructions. \*E-mail Address: \*It cannot be provided in the free app, and is only available to paid app users. 
[Push-only app] push history – Why does "number of sending members" always appear in the shipping history only 1 or 2 people? The push-only app is an app created by applying the website (homepage) link to the app as it is, so there are no members signing up in the app. Therefore, since the app cannot recognize members, only the customer is identified in the member view, and there is no number of app members itself. Since the push sending history is also not recognized, the number of sending members is automatically set to one. If you appear to be 2 people, if you have registered a test device, you will be added and shown as 2 people. Therefore, for push app users, the number of sending members is meaningless.
[Push-only app] When sending push, is the "Link Wizard" function not available? Yes, the push app is an app composed of websites, and there is no menu linked to the app, so you cannot use the link wizard. You can send by entering only the web link address (URL) in the \[Link registration] field. This feature is only available for regular prototyped apps.
[Push-only app] When sending a push, is the "Show push message after checking notification" function not available? This feature is also only available in apps built as regular prototypes. It cannot be used in apps created with push-only apps.
What is the difference between the "number of sending members" and "number of sending devices" in the push history? -Number of members sent: The number of members whose push was sent **\*The number of members who have signed up for membership, and guests are not counted.** **\*Push app has no members, so it cannot be counted as 1 or 2 -Number of sending devices**: The actual number of messages sent to mobile phone devices \*You can check how many users the push was actually sent to. Therefore, you can check how many people the push was sent to by the number of sending devices.
The actual number of app members is much higher, but the number of push-sending devices is very insufficient. (If there are fewer shipping devices than the number of members) In this case, it's because **app users have not been able to receive push notifications.** If you disable receiving push notifications, the pushes sent to your phone will be counted less than the number of members. If you install the app but turn off push notifications, the actual tally sent will be small. And there may be cases where you deleted the app, and there may be cases where the push is not sent because the app has not been used for a long time.
There are far more push-sending devices than the actual number of app members. (When there are more sending devices than members) In this case, it is **because there are more customers who have not signed up than members who have signed up for the app.** In other words, in the Swing to App, customers who have not registered as members are not counted as members, and customers are counted as one person unconditionally. If 1,000 people use the actual app / 500 people sign up, the number of members sent to 501 is counted. (Guests are counted as 1 member) Therefore, if there are more pushes sent to mobile phones than the number of members, it is because there are more customers using the app than registered users. **In particular, those who have created the app with the push version are displayed as 1 or 2 members. The number of sending devices can be checked by the push count sent to the actual mobile phone.**
Are pushes only sent from apps? Yes, the push is only sent when the app is installed on your phone. \*Virtual machine, app will not be sent in preview state. Therefore, install or download the created app on your phone and proceed with the push send. Send a push while the app is closed. (Available on Android phones, iPhone can only be checked if released on the App Store)
Can I try a push test? I want to make the push come only for me (admin), what can I do? **1.How to test a general prototype app push** Please sign up in the app first. You can change the level of a member to an administrator, or you don't have to change it. (Regardless of push sending) Send push – Select the recipient in the default settings. Select and add the username you want to test to send pushes only to specific selected members. You can also upgrade this feature a bit further and later select specific groups to send pushes. **2.How to test push-only app push** The push-only app can be sent out from the test device registration management. Please refer to the manual below. \[Manage push devices – check test push delivery]\\
Push history: Sent completed, app push There is also a push in the push notification window, but the notification does not come. Push must be sent while the app is closed so that you can check it as a notification. If you send a push while the app is running, it will be displayed in the form of a pop-up window. Also, make sure that the actual app is installed on your phone. (Preview, Virtual Machine X) Therefore, **in order to receive push notifications through normal root, please send them while the app is closed.**
I entered the contents in Send push, but the push cannot be sent. Make sure you don't use emojis in the subject line and message fields. If you put a mobile emoticon used on your phone, the message is not recognized and the push cannot be sent. Only symbols (special characters) used on a PC can be entered. Therefore, please be careful with the use of emoticons.
If I don't use the app for a long time, won't the user receive push notifications? Yes, if you do not use the app for a long time, the app activation status may change → to inactive, and push notifications may not be sent. The reference time is different for each platform and device. The period varies from at least 7 days of inactivity to \~ a month. Simply launch the app again and future push notifications will be sent normally.
If a user has turned off push notifications, can't the app administrator (developer) get notifications again? Yes, this part is not something that developers can enforce. Whether to use a feature or not is up to the app user, so developers cannot force it to be used.
# PlayStore FAQ
If I apply for a PlayStore upload to the Swing2App app, will the app be released immediately? We'll act on behalf of Swing2App and upload the app to the Play Store. It's not going to be released right away, it's going to be reviewed by Google apps. **Google app screening takes an average of about a week.** **So uploading doesn't mean your app will be released right away.** **If there are no issues after the review, it will be released to the Store after the review period (within 7 days).**
How long does it take to review a Play Store app? The average review period for a **Play Store takes a week. (within 7 days)** If there are no issues with the review, the release will be released immediately after the above review period, but if the PlayStore review is rejected, the release date may be further delayed. Please allow some time to apply.
When uploading a Play Store app, do I have to create a Google developer account? Google (Play Store) is not registered as a proxy and you must create your own Google developer account. \_Google Policy Matters When uploading to the Play Store, please fill in the application form – Google Developer Account ID and Password and we will register the app with your user account. \*\*☞ \*\***Find out how to register for a Google Developer Account**
How do I create a Play Store Google Developer Account? \*How to register for a PlayStore developer account 1\. Create a Google account (Gmail). (If you already have Gmail, you don't need to sign up.) 2. to access the developer console site 3\. Developer Registration Lifetime Pass is a $25 payment. 4\. Enter your developer profile and you're done. The advantage of creating a developer account is that users can upload their own apps, and they can modify them from time to time and update to a new version of the app without having to buy a market-upload ticket. You can also manage your own apps while checking your own app installations and statistics. **☞ \[How to register a Google developer GO]**
I want to rename the PlayStore developer Google can be used by editing the name of the first developer.\ Access the Google Developer Console site ([https://play.google.com/apps/publish/)](https://play.google.com/apps/publish/)\ **→ Select Settings in the left category → You can edit the developer’s name on the developer profile page and save it.**\ \*Developer name is not reflected immediately after editing.\ It may take up to 7 days with Google’s approval, so if you need to change your name, please save it in advance. Please refer to the manual for details on how to change the developer name. **☞ Go to the \[Google Developer Name Change Manual]**
How do I register keywords when registering for the Play Store? The Google Play Store Market upload registration does not have a keyword entry field unlike Apple's. Instead, Google creates keywords based on your other information, etc., through indexing (keyword extraction) operations. So the market upload registration is very important, right? Here is a link to a simple Android Market upload registration tip\*\*.\*\* **☞ \[PlayStore Search Good TIP]**
Can Play Store user upload their own app without swing2app? Yes, of course. If you have a Google Developer account, the Play Store allows you to upload directly. Instructions for releasing the app on the Play Store are also included in the help manual so you can follow along while viewing the manual. **\[PlayStore Update Manual]** If you’re having difficulty uploading yourself, you can ask for an upload agent on Swing2App. (Play store upload agency cost: $5/each time)
How do I update apps that has been released on the Play Store? If you would like to update your app to the Play Store, please resubmit your upload to Swing2App.\ Please purchase a Play Store upload request ticket ($5 per request) and reapply for upload.\ However, Play Store has all the developer accounts of the user, so you can update them yourself. You don’t have to buy an upload ticket if you do it yourself, and you can update it from time to time. Updating a new version of your app to the Play Store is easy.\ -Login to the Google Developer Console site and register a new version of the app in the APK menu.\ -Then it is automatically updated to the new version after the 3-4 hour review period.\ \ **\*Store registration information can also be edited.**\ Uploaded to the store – When you change the app description, screenshot image, category, etc., the Submit Update button at the top is activated.\ Unlike uploading APK files, if you edit the store settings, the update will be processed only by pressing the corresponding button.\ The same will be reflected after the 3-4 hour review period. **\[Go to the PlayStore App Update Manual]**
During the PlayStore update, I got a message that the existing version or package is the same. If you try to upload the same version of the aab file as the one already registered, the message will appear. When uploading a newly updated app, please make sure it is different from the previous version and upload the aab file created by the new version.
Your PlayStore app has been rejected for review. What should I do? If you've been rejected for review of a Play Store app, you'll need to check your email from Google as to why it was rejected. To your Google developer account, we'll send you an email informing you how to act on what policies your app violates in your email. So if you're being rejected, check your email first to see the notice you received from Google. Please act as stated in the e-mail and re-edit it to request an review. Since the review was rejected, if you modify the content in question and submit it for review, you will be able to release it.
An app that was well listed on the Play Store was suddenly deleted. What should I do? **The Play Store will periodically filter and re-screen apps that are currently in operation.** At this time, the contents of the app are examined in great detail , so even an app that was **initially registered well may be suspended from publishing the app due to a violation of the policy or a violation of the regulations.** Apps that have been suspended from publishing can re-register after fixing the offending item. Usually, when an app is deleted, Google will send you an email about what content the app has violated its policies. So you can identify and act on what is at stake. However, there are times when action is not taken. If the degree of policy violation is severe and Google does not restore it, the app will not be available again. In this case, you can't re-upload an existing app, and you'll need to re-register it as a new app (app name change, package change).
What should I do if my app goes down with the Google Update policy? Google is constantly updating its policies. Users who have launched and are using the app on the Play Store should always check Google's update policy to update the app periodically. If you don't modify your app to comply with our update policy, you can remove it from the Store without notice. Action is difficult because the app is unloaded without any prior warning. Therefore, during use, please carefully check the update and policy notification e-mail sent by Google to be proactive. The Swing2App will always provide you with a plan of action in line with Google's policy changes, so if you have difficulty confirming what this is about, please leave an inquiry to the Swing2App website.
Your PlayStore account has been deleted. What should I do? If you violate the rules multiple times, Google will delete your account without notice. **\*\* Deleted app accounts can be resolved by sending an appeal email to Google.** However, be aware that if you are sure that the policy has been violated, it will not be easy to restore it. If your account is not restored, you can re-create a Google Developer Account and register a new app. By creating a new account altogether, it won't work with existing apps, and you won't be able to manage existing apps. Therefore, you should be careful to follow Google's policies and regulations to ensure that your account is not deleted as well as deleting the app.
# App Store FAQ
App Store – How do I create an Apple developer account? Kindly check the below-mentioned link to know how to create an Apple developer account. \*\*☞ \*\***See how to create an Apple developer account**
How much does it cost to register an Apple developer account? The 1-year subscription to the Apple developer account costs 99 USD. An Apple developer account must be renewed every 1 year. If you don't pay before the expiration of the subscription period, the app will be removed from the App Store. (Apps that have been removed can be re-registered after paying the fee)
Can the Swing2App team register my app on the App Store on my behalf? Yes, we can. If it's difficult for users to create their own Apple developer account, or if there is some other issue, users can launch their app to the App Store with a Swing2App account. **\*Google cannot register as an account proxy.** When you apply for an App Store upload, please agree to the proxy registration notices registered in the application and you will register with your Swing2App account. However, regarding proxy registration, you must check and agree to all of the following notes.
App Store Developer Name: It is distributed as ‘Hyu Stay HYU STAY’. Can I change it? If you’ve registered with Apple as a Swing2App account, you can’t specify the distributor name for each app because you’re registered as a Swing2App public account. So, you’ll need to use the Swing2App developer name. **If you would like to specify a distributor, please create an Apple Developer Account.** When uploading the App Store, the Apple Developer Account you created: Enter your ID and password, and we’ll upload it to that account. The developer name is, of course, applied as a user name. **☞ \[Go to see how to create an Apple developer account]**
How long does the App Store take to launch the app? The App Store will be uploaded to Swing2App and checked by the team in charge. After the review period, it usually takes one to two weeks to launch. Usually, if there is no problem, it will be released within 2 weeks. However, Apple may take more than the above time because the review is often rejected.
After the launch of the app, is it possible to transfer my app to my developer account from the Swing2App account on the App Store? Yes, you can. After launching with a Swing2App Developer account, if you've registered for your Apple Developer account, you can move your app to that account. However, moving the app to that account also requires you to re-register the app, so you will need to purchase an upload ticket and apply for the store upload request form \_(App Store upload ticket costs 20 USD) In the Upload Application request form, you can fill in the existing released app transfer request, and fill in the account:ID and password you created.
Is it not officially released on the App Store and can only be used by internal employees and employees? The App Store does not approve the official launch of in-house apps for internal use within the company and used only by employees. This means that you can only launch apps that are available to all users on the App Store. Therefore, if you create an app that is only available to employees within your company, it will not be available on the App Store, which can be difficult for iPhone users to use. The only way to do this is to release your app to users who have been added using test-flight, rather than making it officially available to the App Store. **\[How to use the App Store test-flight]** The method of use is the same as using a paid app. You'll need to purchase a swing paid app pass, an app store upload ticket. After purchasing the upload ticket, please apply for the App Store upload from the App Production History page → the App Operation → Version Management \*App Operation. It's not an actual official release, but the test-launched app will also be available after being vetted by Apple on the App Store. Therefore, you will need to fill in all the fields on the upload application to apply. After the application is completed, please email : the App Store test-flight request email. Please collect and send us all the Apple accounts (email addresses) of users who want to use the iPhone app. Once inside your iPhone, you can check your Apple-ID by entering the Settings menu. \*Your Apple Account must be sent to the final. \*If you make any additions in the future, you will need to purchase and apply for a re-upload ticket, so we recommend that you collect and forward the email accounts of all iPhone users. The launch of the app store test-flight app takes about 3-5 days to review. It's sooner than an official rollout of the app, and it's almost always approved without rejection. Once the review and approval is complete, an invit email will be sent to the iPhone users' accounts above. Users can check the invitation email and download the app to their iPhone. **\[Precautions]** 1\)The launch of the test-flight app has a 90-day service period. Apple's policy only allows you to use it for 90 days, and if you need more access to the iPhone app, you'll need to request an App Store upload again. We will then update the app version again to get back to work. 2\) Paid app access is also available only if it is purchased. Even if it's not an official release, the concept of launching it on the App Store is the same, so if it's not a paid app, it won't be available and you'll be suspended. Therefore, you should continue to maintain the paid version of the app. 3\) Apple user accounts (email addresses) must be collected when you first apply for an App Store upload. Each subsequent invitation to a user account, you will incur a cost because you will have to re-submit the upload request for each invitation.
I have released an app on the App Store with my account. How do I change the Developer’s name? You might want to change your developer’s name while you’re using the App Store with your account.\ **For Apple, you can’t change the developer’s name along the way like Google.**\ You can only continue using the developer’s name you registered when you first created your developer account.\ You will not be able to change your developer’s name along the way for no particular reason. **Instead, Apple can change the account from individual to organization.**\ If you initially signed up as an individual and then changed to an organization, you can edit your developer’s name.
Rejection case- Why are there so many rejection when reviewing the App Store? Unlike Google, Apple has a lot of app reviews. Judging is refused for a variety of reasons. The most notable cases of rejection of the screening: 1. Violation of metadata policy: If there is no content within the app, or sexually related content, images, and offensive content. 2. Design minimum feature violation: When the app is the same as the website (if you create an app like a website, you can’t be recognized as an app) 3. Web link error: You can’t find the address because you entered the web link URL that is linked to the app incorrectly, or it’s the wrong web link address. 4. Use Apple’s Unique Images: When using images such as icons created by Apple 5. Unauthorized use of copyrighted images: Similar to the above, when you are using copyrighted images, such as brand logos and icons from other companies. 6. Image quality: When working with app icons, standby screen images, etc., the image quality is poor or low-quality image. 7. Request for personal information for membership: When requesting personal information such as the user’s phone number in the sign-up window 8. Private app: You must submit a demo account together to check the contents of the app. The Play Store is reviewed by a similar policy as Apple, so please check the Play Store as well.\ There are many more cases of Apple rejection, so please refer to the relevant post for more details. \*\*☞ \*\***See Apple App Store App Release Refusal Case**
The app that was released and used in the App Store has been dropped. Why is that? Apple developers, unlike Google, have a one-year term. \* Google is used for a lifetime.\ So, Apple needs to renew the subscription period by paying the developer account fee every year.\ If a well-released app goes down, it is likely that the contract has expired.\ \ Please go to the Apple iTunes site and log in with your Developer account to check the period. [https://itunesconnect.apple.com](https://itunesconnect.apple.com/)\ if the contract has expired, you will be prompted to renew your membership on the main page. Please renew your membership at the Apple Developer website. \ **\*Apple Developer Fees; $129 per year.**
Can’t the user upload apps directly to the App Store? Even if you have an Apple developer account, users can't upload their app directly to the App store. Users can only upload their app on the App store on behalf of Swing2App. Unlike Google, Apple doesn’t allow users to directly upload apps because they need the developer’s development source and security-related content, and so on. Please note that you can only upload from the developer (swing2app). **(App store upload fee: $20 per request)**
How do I update an app that has been released on the App Store? As mentioned earlier, the App Store cannot be uploaded directly by the user, so if there is an update, you will need to reapply for the upload to Swing2App. **Please reapply for the upload after purchasing the App Store upload request ticket ($20).** Uploading costs are required for each update, so if there are any changes, it is recommended to work at once.
# AdMob FAQ
What is Google AdMob? AdMob is an advertising platform provided by Google that allows you to place ads in your app. You can monetize your ads by applying an ad platform to your app.
What is the 'AdMob Plugin' offered by the Swing2App? **The Google AdMob plug-in is a custom product that allows you to place Google AdMob ads in your app.** If you purchase an AdMob plug-in product, you can set AdMob ads on an app produced by Swing2App. Users can insert their own ad ID and set up and use the advertisement exposure pattern freely. Please check the details of how to use the AdMob advertisement setting. \*\*☞ \*\***Learn how to set up Admob Plugin ads**
What is the cost of the Admob plugin product? Is it an Android phone or iPhone integration setting? **There are 2 products related to the Admob plugin.** 1\) Plug-in with Google Add-Mob ($220): Single-product product with AdMob plug-in only Since it’s an ad-mob product, you need to purchase a paid app coupon and store upload tickets separately. 2\) Add-Mob Power Package ($580): Plug-in with AdMob + basic swing pass (2 years/24 months) + 1 upload ticket (App store upload ticket, Play Store upload ticket) are provided together. There is no need to purchase other products if you purchase only one package product because it includes both a pass and a store upload as well as an add-mob. **Therefore, you can select the product of the style you want and use it after purchasing it.** To purchase the product, please select the link below and you will be taken to the swing2app payment page. **☞ \[Google Admob Application Plugin Product Page]** **☞ \[Admob Package Products Page]** Applicable to two modes of AdMob for Android and iPhone, and integrated settings. You can just set the platform you want. However, even if you only have one platform, the cost is the same.
Fow how long can I use Admob plugin once I purchase it? If you buy the AdMob plug-in product just once, you can continue to use it by applying the app advertisement. There is no additional cost associated with setting up AdMobs.
How does ads appear in the apps? It will Display as default banner ads + front pop-up ads. **\*Front advertisement allows the app operator to set the exposure pattern freely.** **1)Exposure to advertisements when launching the app for the first time**\ ->Full advertisements are exposed when the app is first launched. **2) When switching to the app for the first time is in progress.**\ ->After launching the app, a pop-up advertisement will appear once the screen is switched by selecting the first menu or page. **3)Exposure of advertisements by number of screen transitions**\ ->You can set the number of ad exposures that appear as the screen transitions.\ When set to ‘Example’5’, full-page advertisements are exposed when the screen is switched 5 times. **4) Expose advertisements every scheduled time**\ ->If you set a scheduled time, the full-page advertisement will be exposed after that time. **Example) If you set it up for 60 seconds, the advertisement will be exposed 60 seconds after the app is launched. (Expose ad every 60 seconds)**
How do AdMob ads generate revenue, and how does the user earn them? Just by running an ad on your app doesn’t mean you’re profitable. **\*You’ll need to touch the actual ad (banner, front) to go to the corresponding ad page to get the ad revenue.** You’ll get 100% of the revenue from your ads.
How can I apply AdMob Plugin to my app? 1\) Completed the production of the app 2\) Payment of plug-in products with AdMob ($220) or AdMob package products ($580) 3\) Subscribe to the official ad mob site → Create advertising unit ID, copy app ID by platform. 4\) Setting up ads in AdMob plug-in settings Manager →Services→ Go to AdMob Plug-in settings Enter Set ad unit ID, Set ad exposure pattern, and save 5\) After setting up the ad, \[App Creation Request]: Update the app with the advertised version 6\) Ad setting is complete. Download the app from your Android phone and test it to see if it’s working well 7\) Register store: Upload stores you wish to launch, such as Play Store, App Store, etc. ​Please check the manual below for details on setting the AdMob plug-in. ▶ **\*\*\*\* \[Go to Admob Plugin Ad Setting Method]**
Why do I need to create an AdMob ad unit ID? An **AdMob** **ad unit ID** is a unique **ID** number assigned to each of your **ad units** when they’re created in **AdMob**. The **ad unit ID** is added to your app’s code and used to identify **ad** requests from the **ad unit**. In order to place ads in your app, you need your app's unique ad unit ID. It has a unique ID that applies to Android phones and iPhones. Depending on the form of the advertisement, there is also an ID. Therefore, the user directly creates an ad unit ID and applies the corresponding ad unit ID to the app so that the advertisement is normally displayed. In order to set up Admob ads in your app, you will need the information below. **(1) Android banner, front ad ID (Android, iPhone)** **(2) iPhone banner, full ad ID is required** **(3) Android App ID, IOS App ID**
How do I create an AdMob ad unit? To learn how to sign up and create an ad unit, check out the manual below. ▶ \*\*\*\* **\[Go to see how to sign up for Admob and create an ad unit]**
After setting up AdMob, can I see ads only on My Android phone? Yes, you’ll need to check the test version on your **Android phone** when you’re done with the ad. The **iPhone** must be released on the App Store before the app will display an ad. (Apps that are not released under Apple’s policy will not be able to see ads) Therefore, the iPhone must be released in the App Store to see the ads. **Users should check the screen where the advertisement is applied to the Android phone.** iPhone and Android integrated setting ads are the same. So, if the ads are visible on Android phones then it will be the same on iPhone.
If I repeated click on ads will I earn a lot of money? **Never artificially click on ads.** If you repeated click on your ads that may artificially inflate a publisher’s earnings, will be counted as **an** **invalid click** by Google. If there is any suspicious behavior on a particular device (mobile phone), Google will drop the ad without notice because of invalid traffic. Invalid traffic includes, but is not limited to: * Clicks or impressions generated by publishers clicking their own live ads * Repeated ad clicks or impressions generated by one or more users * Publishers encouraging clicks on their ads (examples may include: any language encouraging users to click on ads, ad implementations that may cause a high volume of accidental clicks, etc.) * Automated clicking tools or traffic sources, robots, or other deceptive software. If your ad goes down due to invalid traffic, there’s no other way you can get it back, and we can’t help you. You will have to wait for Google to post it back again which may take a month. So, we advise not to click on your ads repeatedly.
I've created all the ad unit IDs, but the ads aren't being posted. There are times when ad mobs don’t send ads directly from Google even when they are done setting up.\ It may take up to a week to check your ad mob account and app.\ If you don’t enter the information below, it may take a long time for the advertisement to appear, so please check it below! 1. **If you are missing your payment information when you sign up for AdMob, your ad will not show.**\ **Please complete your registration by making sure your payment information is not missing.** 2. **You need to review the ad management. In order for your ad to actually post to your app, you’ll need to review your ad list.** Please change an unreviewed ad to a review, and check the list of blocked ads. Please check the instructions and instructions after applying for AdMob in the manual below. ▶[ \*\*\*\* ](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/knowledgebase/admob-operation/)**\[Admob Ad Operation Precautions]**
Can the ads be managed only after signing up for Admob the first time? Of course, you should do it after you sign up, but you should check your ads from time to time. If your ad is initially posted while you’re in operation, it may drop out of your app if you have an unreviewed line item.
The unreviewed ad says there is no ad to review. Is it okay? It means that you don’t have any ads to review yet, or nothing will appear when all of your ads have already been reviewed. If you wait a day or so, your ads will usually be posted to your app. If your ad doesn’t post in your app, please come back to AdMob Block Ads Management and check to see if there are any unreviewed ads.
Is AdMob application not applicable in web-view app and push version app? Only apps built from generic prototypes can run AdMob ads. Apps created by web links, such as webview version and push version, are not applicable to AdMob. (It’s a web-powered app, so it’s not suitable for AdMobs that advertise on the app\~!) Admob is an ad that you place on the app. Web apps that run as websites (webviews, push apps) must use AdSense, not Admob.
Can I modify the exposure pattern of the full-page advertisement? **ex) Make a full-page ad appear every 30 seconds, and make a full-page ad appear after switching to page 4 times.** Yes, it’s possible. Banner ads don’t have an exposure pattern, so you can only modify full-page ads. Front advertisement can be set by the app operator by directly modifying the exposure pattern. Please modify it and operate it on the \[AdMob Plug-in Settings] screen. If you register for the first time or modify it for the first time, you need to save it and re-produce the app. You have to re-produce the app in a new version to reflect the changes. If you edit it later, it will be automatically reflected in the app as soon as you save it. (App shutdown and re-run to reflect changed advertising patterns) ​\*\*\*Front ad exposure settings\*\* **1)Exposure to advertisements when launching the app for the first time**\ ->Full advertisements are exposed when the app is first launched. **2) When switching to the app for the first time is in progress.**\ ->After launching the app, a pop-up advertisement will appear once the screen is switched by selecting the first menu or page. **3)Exposure of advertisements by number of screen transitions**\ ->You can set the number of ad exposures that appear as the screen transitions.\ When set to ‘Example’5’, full-page advertisements are exposed when the screen is switched 5 times. **4) Expose advertisements every scheduled time**\ ->If you set a scheduled time, the full-page advertisement will be exposed after that time.\ Example) If you set it up for 60 seconds, the advertisement will be exposed 60 seconds after the app is launched. (Expose ad every 60 seconds)
If I want to update my App that has been applied to AdMob but will AdMob ads remain the same? If you update your app, your AdMob ads are exactly what you’ve set up, so don’t worry. You don’t need to repurchase Admob plug-ins for every app update. If you update and re-release the app, the set-up admob will will still be retained.
How much revenue does AdMob generate? We don't know how much advertising revenue our users have. Since our users are running Admob themselves, we can't see how much revenue they make. AdMob generates revenue only when users click on ads that are embedded in the app. For those who operate, the profit difference varies from a few dollars to a few thousand dollars per month. Please consider just by starting an ad, you don't make a profit, in depends on various factors.
How many people need to install the app to generate revenue? On average, AdMob-operated apps have between 5,000 and more than 10,000 users. However, we don’t know the revenue for the number of app installs. Some apps have more than 10,000 people, so you’ll need to drive a lot of app installs to make money with AdMob.
Do you offer Admob counseling? Admob counseling is not available. We only set up the AdMob platform for apps created by Swing2App. If you have any questions related to the Admob plugin, please leave them in the inquiry and we will assist you with guidance. After that, all aspects of ad operations and revenue must be managed by the user himself. Subsequently, the user should manage all the advertisements and profits. When applying for AdMob, please check the contents and precautions on the Google AdMob official site before applying.
# Affiliate Program FAQ
What is Swing2App Affiliate Program? It is an affiliate program in which you need to promote Swing2App on your blog, homepage, or social media, and receives a portion of the sales amount of the user who accessed your ad for the Swing2App. Anyone can become a marketer for Swing2App, and the revenue of users who access your advertisement becomes your profit for the rest of your life. **\*How to use** \>You can fill out the affiliate program application form by-> the Swing2App Manager-> My menu-> Affiliate Program \*\*☞ \*\***Visit the Affiliate Program**
How to Apply for the Affiliate Program? For the Swing Affiliate Program, please log in to the Swing2App homepage and check the app Manager page. At the top of the page, select the \[My Menu] –> \[Affiliate Program]option, to fill out the affiliate application form. For more information on how to apply for the affiliate program, please refer to the guide. **\[Go to How to Apply for Affiliate Program]**
Where can I find the Affiliate Program administrator page? Once the affiliate application is approved, the Affiliate Management page will be opened. Go to the Swing2App Manager page → My menu → Affiliate Program menu. The affiliate management page will not open until approval, so you can check the affiliate program menu after confirming your approval. [![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/f4663c1a7b60aa52758d63f8b94b3896.png)](http://blog.naver.com/PostView.nhn?blogId=swing2app\&logNo=220920326276\&parentCategoryNo=\&categoryNo=49\&viewDate=\&isShowPopularPosts=false\&from=postView) This is the affiliate program manager page. You can check the affiliate URL through the admin information. Just link the URL to the banner. You can check out the various menus in the top menu bar. You can manage affiliate programs while checking menus such as statistics, settlement management, and advertising management. In the future, the administrator can check the distribution ratio per case, the number of subscribers who entered the partnership, sales, cumulative revenue, monthly settlement history, etc. on the page \~ !!
Who are eligible for the Affilate Program? Users who are counted as affiliate program inflows are only new members who are new to Swing2App. Existing members of Swing2App are not counted as affiliate users because they have already completed their subscriptions. Only new members who have accessed the user’s affiliate URL and registered at that URL will be counted. Therefore, please remember that only new members are eligible for the influx of affiliate programs.
How is user settlements calculated? Payments will only be made for the actual payments made, such as deposits and credit card payments, among those who have accessed through the user’s affiliate URL. Users who are using paid services by using free coupons, etc., are not counted.
How does the Swing2App Affiliate Program review work? When you apply for the Swing2App Affiliate Program, the Swing2App team will review it. Qualifing for the Affiliate Program is not difficult, the screening takes about 1 day. Just make sure you have a suitable homepage to promote Swing2App and make sure the site/platform where you're planning to promote Swing2App is active and attracts people. Also, when you apply, provide your company and service-related introduction properly. We also check whether there are many other users’ connections, and comprehensively select who is good for the Swing2App Affiliate Program.
Only Swing2App subscription ticket price will be paid? Yes, that’s right. Only the ticket sales will be distributed, and since more than 90% of the current swing2app sales will be for the use of tickets, there will be no significant difference in the amount of the dividend. Upload tickets, capacity purchase tickets, and SMS purchases are not eligible.
What is the payment due date and settlement method? It is settled on the first day of every month. Please note that sales will be settled after counting sales for the previous month until the 25th of the previous month.
After first joining the site with an affiliate program, will you be an influx user if you later access it with a separate swing URL? No. After joining as an inflow user for the first time, if you sign up after time or computer changes, you will continue to be an inflow user.
Will I continue to receive Swing2App Affiliate Program revenue? Users who enter into four affiliate programs will get lifetime revenue. As a result, you can continue to receive dividends (commissions) for items that you purchase.
After the affiliate program approval, how can we promote Swing2App? In the affiliate program applicant's email, we will provide a Swing2App promotion banner image. Then you need to place that banner on your site's homepage and enter the URL of the affiliate link. (Once approved, the applicants will receive a unique URL to the swing2App, and the applicant will receive dividends when your site users will use the provided link to visit our site.) In addition to posting banners on your site, you can also share the link with other users. SNS – You can use Facebook, Instagram, and other platforms to promote our service. The more promotion you do, the more people will use the provided link, and accordingly, you'll receive a decided portion of the profit. **For promotional instructions, please check out the post below.** **\[How to promote Swing2App by using the affiliate program]**
# Customization FAQ
What is customization? Customization is a ‘custom-made service’ to create products according to the needs of customers. You can ask Swing2App to customize and develop your app as per your requirement. If you wish to add features other than built-in services provided in Swing2App, or if you need an overall app development, you can ask us to customize your app. We will create a custom app with your desired content and calculate a quote based on your app development. Therefore, if you have a customization request, kindly create a proposal, storyboard, etc. for our better understanding. Customization will generate a quote based on the content of the app development. Our engineers will assist you in the detailed consultation of the development period and the work details. For customized consultations, please first prepare and send the app production proposal, storyboard, etc. to . Simple features or custom features that have already been provided by Swing2App can be guided directly from the Help Center, but please understand that the overall development of the app and the complex content configuration cannot be assisted in consultation without a specific proposal.
How do get a customized consultation and quote? The customization consultation can be discussed by sending the plan, storyboard, etc. for app development by swing2app email. The entire app development and complex development is difficult to consult by phone or katok. \*Please prepare an app creation plan, storyboard, etc. and send it to [help@swing2app.com](https://support.swing2app.com/custormizing/?preview_id=4445\&preview_nonce=82585d04da&_thumbnail_id=-1\&preview=true) with your swing2app email address. (Contact us with your contact information) If you send an email, the custom development engineer will check the contents and will provide you with a list of development options, development period, and development cost estimates
What is the approximate cost of customization? Swing2App custom is not price constrained, so there is no cost. And because it’s a 1:1 development work that reflects the user’s custom content, there are no development estimates. Estimates can range from a few hundred dollars to a few thousand dollars depending on the content of the production, so there is no custom cost. Therefore, please note that we only provide customized quotes through consultation.
Can you customize the app the same as per user request? Yes, we can customize your app as per your requirement. Please tell us the name of the app you want to benchmark and we’ll be happy to guide you. We can check the app and see if the same app development is possible, accordingly our engineer will guide you. For apps with simple design and production methods, engineers can check and guide you with custom costs. **However, for apps that have a lot of internal development sources besides the content and complexity of the app, it may be difficult to calculate the exact development cost.** (The internal development source of a particular app cannot be verified only by looking at the app, and it can only be verified until the actual development is made.) \*And make it clear whether you want the design and the configuration forms to be the same, if only the shapes are similar, or if you want to put only a specific menu on both. You can send your email to [help@swing2app.com](https://support.swing2app.com/custormizing/?preview_id=4445\&preview_nonce=82585d04da&_thumbnail_id=-1\&preview=true) and give us your custom inquiry, but please let us know the exact app development request.
Is there an additional cost if I add the same customized content to another app? If you add it to another app with the same content after customizing it, you will be charged $100 for the license. The reason for the additional cost of applying it to other apps with the same content is that it is not a development fee, but a license fee. License fees are essential policies to prevent indiscriminate use of custom programs. The cost of customizing development is based on one app and will receive an additional license fee when you expand. Therefore, please note that there is an additional cost of $100 for the license copy.
How to handle a customization failure? If there are any errors or failures in the application of customization, it will be dealt with immediately. However, we cannot continue to monitor users’ apps in the swing2app. Therefore, if users who have been customized have problems using the app, they will need to contact our customer service or contact us via email to confirm and process it. We will of course handle the failures and maintenance incurred by customization at no additional cost. \*We can’t handle any errors that occurred outside of us other than failures of errors like (swing2app, and custom content) and the developer will notify you after confirmation.
# App production manual (V3) # Start App Creation With MakerV3 Screen On MakerV3 App Creation Screen -> Choose the app type that you wish to create. Before you start app creation, first choose what style and type of app you want to build. On the App Creation Wizard screen, you'll see 3 different ways to create an app. Choose any one of the provided options accordingly. ### ![](/files/qNnSaTLINXUCjIzmG1SX) App creation wizard screen- options provided are: -Create apps by using a sample template (normal prototype) -Create an app from your existing website (Webview and push-only prototype) -Create an app from scratch (normal prototype) The App Creation Wizard is the screen that only pops up when you create a new app or add a new app. You won't see it during app production. After selecting one of the methods and entering the basic information that goes into the app, the App Creation Maker screen will open. Check the manual to see the app creation method for each option type. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### ![](/files/qNnSaTLINXUCjIzmG1SX) Method 1. Fast app creation ![](/files/ZktL4zMGlqovYFfsHwy4) It's about building an app using a sample template. You can build it as a regular prototype app. **If you choose this option, then the next step will be to choose the type of template you want to use.** **In the next step, register the app name, icon image, and splash screen image, and you're done with the basic design settings!** **You can now start building the app on the App MakerV3 screen.** If you want easy app creation without working on the page-specific design and menu configuration from scratch, then this option is best for you. Here you can easily create an app by choosing a template with all the industry-specific designs. Template pages are easy to modify. You can change images, titles, colors, and linked pages of the template. Choose a template for your app according to your requirement and start building your app. **\*The design UI tool configured in the template itself cannot be modified.** Each sample template has its own prototypes. You can easily modify the menus of the sample template prototype. If you wish to change to a different menu prototype other than provided template prototype, in that case, you need to create all menus from scratch. **\*Unlimited updates available.** Since you can modify and update the app unlimited times, feel free to modify and experiment with templates and prototypes. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### Method 2. Create Web App ![](/files/h4lvlCwPSLmZcsD6nBOC) The second method is the web app creation style. If you have a website and wish to convert it into an app, you should choose this option. To create a web app you just need to input your website link. For web apps, we provide two types of prototypes (Webview only and push-only). So if you wish to create a web app, choose the second option of the app creation wizard screen. **After selecting a web app, you can select the basic information required for the web app - the website address, and whether you want to use push notification.** **In the last step, register the app name, icon image, and splash screen image, and you're done with the basic design settings!** **​** **\*If you wish to have a push notification feature in your app then select the Push-Only prototype and use the Push-Only function. If you keep the push option unchecked, the app created will be a Webview app.** **You can also later modify the Push usage option on the app makerV3 screen.** **\*In addition, the toolbar menus provided in the web app can also be selected and modified on the app makerV3 screen.** ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### Method 3. Create Custom App ![](/files/2E7izAb0fDoqdvbWWWnm) The third way is to build and organize the app from scratch. You can create menus, pages, icons, etc for your app from the scratch. If you don't find any sample template design suitable for you, or if you want to customize the UI and other features of your app by yourself, choose the third method and start creating your app! ​ **If you choose this option, then the next step will be to choose a prototype style and the color of your app.** **In the next step, register the app name, icon image, and standby image, and you're done with the basic design settings!** **You can now start building the app on the App MakerV3 screen.** **​** \*You can modify and update your app unlimited times, so if you want to change anything that you chose initially, you can easily modify it within the existing app. \*You can choose the template feature in this option too. Therefore, you can freely combine and create regular app creation styles + template styles, etc. **​** So, select the app type that you wish to create and modify it accordingly. For a general app creation manual, please visit the link below. [Check out the V3 App Authoring Manual](/manual/v3/guide) # Manual on How to Create an App In MakerV3 Screen MakerV3 App Creation Guide Manual ### STEP1 Basic Information **Step 1 \[Basic Information] is the step of entering the basic information required to create the app. In this step, you need to register the app name, icon image, splash screen image, etc.** When you finish entering the information in the app creation wizard screen, the page below will open. ![](/files/no2prsJ6NFvkw5l5CiYv) **1. App Name:** Enter your app name. **2. App ID:** Apply a unique ID to the app you created. After entering, check for duplicate confirmation!! **(Start from the alphabet and should be 6-20 characters long)** **3. App icon:** Register the app icon image **(1024x1024px)** **4. Standby screen:** Register a splash screen image that will be displayed for 1-2 seconds when the app is launched. **(2282x2282px)** **5. Save:** After you are satisfied with your app creation, click on, the \[Save] button to save the work. ### ### App icon, standby image registration **\*Click on the \[Upload App icon/Splash Screen Image] button, and a pop-up will appear where you can set and modify these images.** **​** **1)Upload icon** ![](/files/ijogOLxTy60zvZktphsK) Icon image size: **1024px\*1024px** (1)Click on the Upload Icon Button (2)Select the Upload Image button in the file attachment window. (3)After registering the image, click on the Apply button.\\ **2)Upload the splash screen image** ![](/files/t0N2B5ceZgNNi0GbfZLW) Splash Screen Image Size: **2282px\*2282px** (1)Click on the app splash screen upload button (2)Click on the Upload Image button in the file attachment window. (3)After registering the image to be used as the splash screen, click on the Apply button. *** Check out the icons image creation guide for a more detailed explanation. Also, for more details, check out the splash screen creation guide. To get the best results, be sure to design and apply the image as per the guide. [**Go to the icon image creation guide**](/manual/maual/appbasic/appicon) [**Go to the splash screen image creation guide**](/manual/maual/appbasic/apploading) ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **STEP2** Prototype **\[STEP2 Prototype]** is the step of determining the overall design and style of the app's UI design and color. ![](/files/s8AynnL8lVIk0GsZAWny) **1. Select a prototype: Select the prototype that determines the design of your app's UI.** \*Swing2App offers a total of 7 prototype designs. **2. Basic styles and options** Select Color Set: Sets the app and color of the UI design. It offers a color combination consisting of 3 sets which are the main background colors, text colors, and theme colors. Once you have selected the desired combination, you can see the UI changing colors in real time through the virtual machine. **3. Advanced styles and options** This feature allows you to set additional color options and design styles that you can add to the prototype UI. This is not a required setting, users can modify it if they want to. **4. Custom settings** **​** {% hint style="warning" %} What if none of the combined colors present in the preset are as per your interest? In that case, please use the detailed settings. {% endhint %} ![](/files/HbVTAOTAdqRwY6XNMbKp) If the desired color is not present, the user can select the color directly in \[Detailed Settings]. In addition to the fixed color combinations, the detailed color setting is an option that allows the user to select and apply their own colors. **\*If you have applied both the prototype and the skin color during the design phase, save it and go to the next step.** ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **STEP3 Page** **\[STEP3 PAGE] is a step to create categories and menus for the app.** The Home option is to set the main home screen of the app. On the left area, you can set the menus of the app. We'll show you how to apply the home screen and menus of the app. ### **1.** How to apply the home screen The Home screen is the main screen that is visible when you launch the app. You can set your home screen easily as per your requirement. Menus provided by the Swing2App for the Home screen – You can apply menus such as weblinks, swing templates, user pages, bulletin boards, images, and more. In this guide, we'll apply industry-specific templates. We'll show you how to modify and apply the menu to the home screen. ![](/files/j5LGHMzZzJlJlqE1FszT) Click on the \ option from the menu category on the left side of the MakerV3 page. 1\) Enter the name of the home screen, which will be shown at the top of the main screen. After typing, click anywhere on the screen or press the Enter button to reflect it directly to the virtual screen. 2\) Page Design: Click on the Page template option and then click on the New button to create a template. \*Since you don't have any template created, you must first go to the Page Template Creator to create a template page. **\[Template Page Editor Tool]** ![](/files/nTEgM5IbgW4GL0YGT8ao) To learn how to create a template page, please check out the production manual below! **☞** [**Find out how to create and operate a template page**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/template-page) ![](/files/DVFDqHhcbTAFaPx5kCSx) **After creating the template, please return to the app maker screen.** 3\)When you click on the Refresh button, the template you created will pop up on the screen. 4\)Hover your cursor over the template, **\** options will pop up If you want to check how the template looks before applying it to the app, select the 'Preview' button, select the 'Apply' option to apply the created template to the app and choose the 'Manage' option if you wish to modify your created template. 5\)Click on the \[Save] button and check the template applied to the home screen on the virtual machine screen. ### **2.** Menu Management **1)Add and delete menus** ![](/files/rQuI8xkhicLvZ0HBc5dU) The default menus listed in the category on the left can all be modified easily. You can delete and add menus that you don't need, and organize them into the menus accordingly. When you hover your mouse over the menu, the trash can-shaped icon and the \[+] shaped icon, pops up. **\*Delete menu: Select the trash can icon** **\*Add menu: Select \[+] icon** Like this, you can easily delete and add menus. **2)Menu Customization** ![](/files/gJdWqnLgWYvu7NIVIks6) (1)First, add a menu (Click on the \[+] button). (2)Enter a menu name. (3)Menu icon: Upload the icon as per your requirement. \*Not required (4)From Page Menu option- Select which feature you wish to apply to your menu. \*In this guide, we have applied the 'Bulletin Board'. feature Click on the UI KIT option-> Select Board-> Select the board style you want to apply and then click on the Apply button. (5)Click on the Save button to save all the changes. You can cross-check on the virtual machine to see if everything is applied properly. **3)Change the Placement of the menu** ![](/files/N9AJtzVyZEaEYZmU0tvg) **​**You can easily change the placement of menus by the easy dragging method. Select the menu and drag it to where you want to move it. Like this, you can change the position of menus, from a sub to a top menu and vice versa. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### STEP4 Creating an App Once you've finished building your app, complete the process by clicking on the \[App creation] button. \*STEP1 Basic settings should be 100% complete to complete app production successfully. Even after you finish the app creation process, you can freely modify your app at any time. So complete app production and preview it on your mobile without worrying about any incomplete menu as you can modify and update your app unlimited times. ![](/files/OTAu2yC8MmAgTU7IJlnY) 1\)Once you're satisfied with your app, click on the Save button 2\)Click on the \[App Creation] button. 3\)Click on the \[Make] button in the Update Options pop-up window. \*User can select Update type and update notification display option. Since this is your first time building an app, we recommend you go with the default setting of update. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **STEP5** Complete App Creation ![](/files/vSdbBRtKX2LWUxRw3NEy) Once you click on the \[App creation] button, you'll get redirected to the App Production History page on the Manager page. The status of each platform will be marked as 'Pending Production Order', and it'll change to Complete after 5-10 minutes. Then you'll receive apk file of your app via registered mail. ![](/files/DiGQg7HyviUH44APs1qy) On this screen, a \[Swing2App Preview] pop-up window will appear. It's a feature that allows you to preview the app through a swing2app preview screen before it is reached its final stage of creation. \*View on the web: Select the \[Watch directly on the web] button to preview apps created on virtual machines on the web. \*Preview on your phone: After downloading the official Swing2App app – App Preview menu – log in with your swing2app account or scan the QR code shown in the pop-up window and you can preview the app on your phone! ![](/files/xRVbMHGQKEeDFyGBfwEi) After 5-10 minutes, the platform-specific status will change to "App Creation Complete!" When the production is complete, the **APK file** (the file that you can download your app from) will be sent to you via Swing2App subscription email. **​**\*APK files can't be opened on your PC, so make sure to check it on your phone. \*APK files can only be installed on Android phones. (iPhones are not supported.) [**See how to install apps created using app preview on your phone**](/appguide/swingpreview) # STEP1 Basic Information Creating an App - STEP1 Basic ### App Creation STEP1– Enter Basic Information The App Maker V3 Production Manual will show you how to enter the STEP1 basic information. Here you need to enter the basic information required to create an app, such as the app name, icon image, splash screen image, and app ID. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### STEP1 Basic Information ![](/files/no2prsJ6NFvkw5l5CiYv) 1\. App Name: Enter your app name. 2\. App ID: Enter a unique ID for your app. After entering your ID, do check if that ID is correct and available for use. \*ID should start with English + 6 characters or more including numbers! 3\. App icon: Register the app icon image. 4\. Splash screen: Register a splash screen image that will be displayed for 1-2 seconds when the app is launched. \*If you have entered all (app name, icon image, splash screen image) in the App Creation Wizard window, you do not need to enter it again in the MakerV3 screen. 5\. Save changes: Whenever you make changes, select the \[Save] button to save the work. ### Upload an icon image ![](/files/ijogOLxTy60zvZktphsK) Icon image size: **1024px\*1024px** 1\)Click on the \[Upload icon image] button 2\) A pop-up window will appear, click on the \[Upload Image] button to register the image. 3\)After registering the image, click on the \[Apply] button. ### Upload a splash screen image ![](/files/t0N2B5ceZgNNi0GbfZLW) Standby Screen Image Size : **2282px\*2282px** 1\)Click on the \[Upload splash screen image] button 2\)A pop-up window will appear, click on the \[Upload Image] button to register the image. 3\)After registering the image, click on the \[Apply] button. Check out the icons and splash screen image creation guide. {% hint style="info" %} We also have a guide in which we have shown a different way to use an app icon and a guide to use as a splash screen. Be sure to design and apply the image as per the guide. [**Go to the icon image creation guide**](/manual/maual/appbasic/appicon) [**Go to the standby screen image creation guide**](/manual/maual/appbasic/apploading) {% endhint %} ### ### Basic information registration complete ![](/files/4IVG4yh64AKXNuRweeb5) STEP1 The basic information: Users should add this information to the app creation wizard screen, and if they wish they can easily modify it on the MakerV3 screen. Except for the app ID, the app name, icons, and splash screen images can be modified even after the app is created. \*STEP1- After modifying the Basic Information step, you must press the \[Update App] button to update to the new version to reflect modified items in your app. ### What is the image editing tool? **The image editing tool is a feature that allows you to easily modify the size of the image.** **In case your register icon and splash screen image do not fit the recommended size, worry not, you can modify the size through the image editing tool.** If the image size you want to upload when creating the app is different from the recommended image size listed in the creation method, you can easily modify the size in this editing tool. ![](/files/Bxt3fu6fhEVX2vgUsFXw) The app icon image recommended size is **1024 x 1024 px.** If the attached image does not match the size, a window will pop up warning that the size does not match as shown in the image above. Click on 'OK' button to enter in the Image Editing Tool window. ![](/files/DwYiN3ZfonTc6C0sulZ4) As you can see in the image, the (blue line) area is designated as the image size to be uploaded in the image editing tool window. You can select the blue line with your mouse to pull or reduce it. You can edit the image to fit the area. If the image is large, simply drag the area with the mouse to apply the desired image. **\* If you upload an image smaller than the size you need to upload, you may need to increase the size of the original image, which may result in poor image resolution.** (This happens when the uploaded image size is smaller than the image size above 1024×1024). Therefore, **we recommend that you use an image that is larger than the specified size!!** When you finished editing the image, click on the \[Uploaded] button\*\*.\*\* ![](/files/BfFhxl3L4grYmv1fTvez) The image size has been modified. check the uploaded image in the file attachment window and select the \[Apply] button. This way you can modify image size in the swing2app image editor tool. {% hint style="danger" %} **Editing Tool Precautions** 1\)We recommend you to upload images as per recommended size guide provided by us. Although the swing2app image editor tool is good for resizing the image but since the icons and splash screens are large images with a resolution that is immediately visible when installing a mobile phone app, it is much better in terms of quality to register the finished image than to artificially modify the size. 2\)The image editing tool **only provides the ability to resize the image.** It does not offer picture editing functions such as Photoshop, Illustration, and Paint. Therefore, please upload a final image after editing it in some proper editing software. 3\)If you upload an image that is smaller than the recommended image size, the image resolution will have a bad impact when you'll resize it. Therefore, we recommend that you use images that are larger than the specified size. {% endhint %} # STEP2 Prototype Creating an App - STEP2 Prototype ### App Creation STEP2– Prototype The App Maker V3 Manual will show you how to edit your app in step 2- prototype. **\[STEP2 Prototype] is the step in which you can decide the overall design and style of the app's UI design and color.** ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### STEP2 Prototype ![](/files/s8AynnL8lVIk0GsZAWny) **1. Select a prototype:** Select the prototype that determines the design of your app's UI. **2. Default style and options:** Select the color of the UI design and app. **3. Advanced styles and options** This feature allows you to set additional color options and design styles that you can add to the prototype UI. \*This is not a required setting. 4\. When you are satisfied with the changes made in step2, click on the **\[Save]** button to save your work. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### Check the prototype style ![](/files/wTM5ab8YKjkKmjIBzi5E) The normal app prototype style is available in 5 different designs.\*The webviews and push-only prototypes are excluded. You can preview each prototype by selecting them, virtual machine on the right (preview screen) will show how the prototype UI style will look on the app. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### Basic styles and options – Color settings ![](/files/kTNtFmX5rBDolHozxpe8) **Select Color Preset: To Set the skin color of the UI design.** Skin Color offers a color combination consisting of 3 sets of main background colors, text colors, and theme colors. Once you have selected the desired combination, you can see the UI changing colors in real-time through the virtual machine. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### Basic styles and options – custom settings What if none of the combined colors present in the preset are not as per your interest? In that case, please use the detailed settings. ![](/files/HbVTAOTAdqRwY6XNMbKp) If the desired color is not present, the user can select the color directly in \[Detailed Settings]. In addition to the fixed color combinations, the detailed color setting is an option that allows the user to select and apply their own colors. **Detailed Settings** – Enter the color code in the HEX field or you can click on the color square box to select the color you want to use. After selecting a color, click the mouse cursor on the empty space to reflect the colors in real-time on the virtual machine. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### Advanced styles and options This feature allows you to set additional color options and design styles that you can add to the prototype UI. **\*This is not a required but an optional setting.** ![](/files/GGr6o5GkKJaFxSuZTiKe) **Advanced Style & Option** – Here you can modify the background and text color of the prototype. You can enter the color code in the HEX field or click on the color square box to select the color you want. The main design style can also be changed from basic to transparent. **Main Design Style – Transparent setting** ![](/files/etigcUvSUOwPiMcuWnqz) If you set the main design style to transparent, the bar area shown at the top will disappear. In other words, it will change to a transparent area. When selecting the transparent option, you can utilize the top bar area 100%. ![](/files/Cy7ndvPaQt0ICdWeDaQw) It is recommended to apply the template pages, image pages, etc with the home screen. **Related Articles** * [STEP1 ](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step1-basic/)Basic Information * Registering a push icon image * Set menu permissions: How to use access rights * How to use disable app menus * How to register a menu icon image * Push App Toolbar - How to Use and Function Introduction # STEP3 Page Creating an App - Page STEP3 The App Making V3 Authoring Manual shows you how to create STEP3 page steps. **\[Page STEP3] is a step to organize the contents of the app in earnest by creating categories and menus in the overall app tool that we have created earlier.** ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### STEP3 Page ![](/files/TrEYYrjHU0TvNcQV62ky) You can see the menus you need to apply in the Screen Settings category on the left. We'll show you how to apply the home screen and how to apply the main menu. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### \*\*1.\*\*How to apply the home screen The Home screen is the main screen that is visible when you launch the app, and you can configure how the main screen will be displayed by the user themselves. Menus provided by the Swing-to-App – You can apply menus such as weblinks, swing pages, user pages, bulletin boards, images, and more. In this guide, we'll apply industry-specific templates. ![](/files/j5LGHMzZzJlJlqE1FszT) Select \ from the category on the left 1\) Enter the name that will be shown at the top of the menu name input screen. After typing, click the cursor once or press the Enter button to reflect it directly to the virtual machine. 2\) Page Design: Select an industry-specific template and then select the New button. \*Since you don't have any pages created, you must first go to the Page Template Creator to create a template page. ​ #### \[Template Page Authoring Tool] ![](/files/nTEgM5IbgW4GL0YGT8ao) To learn how to create a template page, please check out the production manual below! **☞**[ **Find out how to create and operate a template page**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/template-page) ![](/files/DVFDqHhcbTAFaPx5kCSx) **After creating the template, please return to the app creation screen.** 3\) When you select the Refresh button, the template you created will pop up on the screen. 4\)Hover the mouse cursor over the template to **\** menu will pop up. If you want to check before applying the app, select 'Preview', 'Apply' to apply the app, and 'Manage' for modifications. Select the Apply menu. 5\) Select the \[Save] button to check the template applied to the home screen on the virtual machine screen. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **2.** Menu Management **1)Add and delete menus** ![](/files/rQuI8xkhicLvZ0HBc5dU) The menus listed in the category on the left can all be modified to include the menus that you initially set in the Swing To app. Therefore, you can delete and add menus that you don't need, and organize them into the menus you want. When you hover your mouse over the menu, the trash can-shaped icon, the +shaped icon, pops up. **\*Delete menu: Select the trash can icon** **\*Add menu; + Select icon** It's very easy to delete and add menus. **2)Apply menu** ![](/files/gJdWqnLgWYvu7NIVIks6) (1)Add a menu. (2)Enter a menu name. (3)Menu icon: Please enter only if you apply the icon as an option. \*Not required (4)Select which menu you want to apply in the page design. \*In this guide, we have applied the 'Bulletin Board'. Select UI KIT Select Board Select the board style you want to apply and then select the Apply button (5)Select the Save button. The virtual machine allows you to check if the bulletin board is well reflected. **​** **3) Move the menu** ![](/files/N9AJtzVyZEaEYZmU0tvg) Menus can be moved by dragging with the mouse. Select the menu with your mouse, grab it, and drag it to where you want to move. The position you are dragging completes the menu movement. – Can be configured as a sub or top menu. **Related Articles** * [앱 홈화면 제작방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/home/) * [STEP2 디자인](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step2-design/) * [STEP1 기본정보](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step1-basic/) * [푸시 아이콘 이미지 등록하기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/appmanage/pushmember/pushicon/) * [메뉴 권한 설정: 접근 권한 이용방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/permission-setting/) * [앱 메뉴 비활성화 이용방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/menu-hiding/) # How to Create a Home Screen For an App **Varieties in which you can create a home screen for an app** 1\. Apply an image 2\. Apply bulletin board 3\. User Page - Image Page 4\. User Page - Web Template 5\. User Page – HTML Editor Page 6\. App Introduction Page **\*Please do not apply web links (websites) to your home screen. If you wish to connect the website with the home screen then please create it in a webview or a push-only prototype and not in a regular prototype.** **Home screen creation can be created by selecting the HOME button → the HOME screen setting → the STEP3 page → the App Maker Maker.** You can create a screen by choosing from the different features that come with the page design. ![](/files/zUUEAp4AkDUzoOlkWx4C) ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **1**. Home screen - Apply image The first way to apply the Home screen is to upload an image. ​**App launch screen) Image applied to the home screen**
\ ​ **How to apply** ![](/files/QTnLInEvF36D7KWdPBO8) 1\)Go to the STEP3 Page option 2\)Click and select \[HOME] menu 3\)Enter the menu name: Enter the name that will be visible at the top of the home. \*If you don't rename it, it will appear as the app name. 4\) From the page design, go to the \[Upload Image] option and Click on the \[Image Upload] button. 5\)When the Attach File window appears, select the image file you want. 6\)Click on the \[Apply] button 7\)Click on the \[Save] button at the top of the screen and you're done! {% hint style="info" %} \*The images are different in size than the size of the cellphone, so there is no exact recommended size. However, if you want to make the phone screen more or less full, please work with \*Horizontal Size: 1080px and Portrait 1980px to 2200px. -Portrait varies depending on the mobile phone model, so please adjust the size a little bit by looking at the vertical app screen. \- Since it is resized to the mobile screen in line with the horizontal screen, the vertical length can be a little bit longer for each phone, resulting in scrolling. {% endhint %} ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **2.** Apply bulletin board The second way is to apply the bulletin board to your home screen! **App launch screen) Home screen with bulletin board applied**
\*Note: Writing is not provided when applying the bulletin board to the home screen. This means that the home screen only provides a detailed article view of the list of bulletin boards, and you cannot write posts on the bulletin board applied to the home screen. ​ **How to apply** ![](/files/4sbjx1pCOQCW2sBoglbF) 1\)Go to the STEP3 Page Menu 2\)Click and Select \[HOME] menu 3\)Enter the menu name: Enter the name that will appear at the top of the home. \*If you do not change the name, it will be displayed as the name of the board. 4\)In the page design, select UI KIT –> Board. 5\)Select the bulletin board and click on the \[Apply] button. \*Hover your mouse over the bulletin board screen to see the Apply button. 6\)Click on the \[Save] button at the top of the screen and you're done! If you don't have a board to attach on the home screen, create one first and then apply it to your app. Click on the \[Add New Page] option takes you to the Manage Board screen where you can create and edit board pages. **App Manager-Bulletin Board Screen** ![](/files/aj2MIkEOQixh1DdOTETT) ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **3.** User Page – Apply Image Page The third way is to create an image page and apply it to the home screen. ​ **App launch screen) Image page applied home screen**
​ **How to apply** ![](/files/up1hEkSdZ8ZDL0CdlqEh) 1\)Click on the STEP3 Page Menu 2\)Click and Select \[HOME] menu 3\) The menu name does not need to be changed. \*The image page name is the name saved by the Image Page Creator and is displayed at the top of the home screen. 4\)Select the Image Page from the page design. 5\)Select the image page to apply to the home screen and select the \[Apply] button. \*Hover your mouse over the image page screen to see the Apply button. \*If you don't have a page created, please create it by pressing the \[Add new page] button. 6\)Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen and you're done! If you don't have an image page that you have created, create an image page first and then apply it to your app. Selecting the \[New] button takes you to the Image Page Maker screen. You can create an image page in the page creation editor tool, and then apply it in your app. ​ **Image Page Maker Screen** ![](/files/iPvOAmWUnVPOqaeK4uXC) ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **4.** User Page – Apply a web template page The fourth method is to create and apply a user page - a web template page. **App launch screen) Home screen with web template page applied**
**How to apply** ![](/files/MBABOEVFwblcbwPblDxb) 1\)Click on the STEP3 Page Menu 2\)Click and Select \[HOME] menu 3\) Enter the menu name: Enter the name that will be visible at the top of the home. \*If you do not rename the menu, it will be displayed as the name you saved when the template page was created. 4\) Under Page Design, select a Page template option. 5\) Select the template you want to apply to the home screen and click on the \[Apply] button. \*Hover your mouse over the template page screen to see the Apply button. \*If you don't have a template page created, please create it by pressing the \[Add new page] button. 6\) Click on the \[Save] button at the top of the screen and you're done! If you don't have an image page that you created, create a template page first and apply it to your app. Selecting New above takes you to the Template Page Editor Tool. You can create a template page in that Editor tool, and then apply it in your app. **Template Page Editor Screen** ![](/files/ccMz0gYIJ63N1VAtgjZ2) ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **5.** User Page – Apply HTML Editor Page The fifth way is to create and apply a user page - an HTML editor page. **App launch screen) HTML Editor Page applied Home Screen**
**How to apply** ![](/files/5V8saGJvI1gUzYhvE2uq) 1\)Click on the STEP3 Page Menu 2\)Click and Select \[HOME] menu 3\)Enter the menu name: Enter the name that will be visible at the top of the home. \*If you do not rename the menu, it will be displayed as the name you saved when you created the editor page. 4\) In the page design, choose HTML Editor. 5\) Select the editor page that you want to apply to the home screen and select the \[Apply] button. \*Hover your mouse over the editor page screen to see the Apply button. \*If you don't have a page created, please create it by pressing the \[Add new page] button. 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen and you're done! If you don't have an HTML editor page you've created, create one first and apply it to your app. Click on the \[New] button will take you to the HTML Editor Page Editor Tool screen. You can create an editor page in that editor tool, and then apply it in your app. **HTML Editor Page Maker Screen** ![](/files/AX2EfnNj4tJhreDsEcRm) ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **6.** Apply the App Introduction Page The app introduction page is the home screen that is the default setting as the home screen when you first build your app in a swing2app app. Therefore, users can use the app introduction page as it is, and they can change the home screen in various styles according to the above method\~! If you use the home screen in a different style and then apply the home screen back to the app introduction page, please apply it in the following way. **App launch screen) Home screen with app introduction page applied**
**How to apply** ![](/files/4hpDElYOdwXsjRcLeRlp) 1\)Click on the STEP3 Page Menu 2\)Click and Select \[HOME] menu 3\) Enter the menu name: Enter the name that will be visible at the top of the home. \*If you don't rename the menu, \[App Information] will automatically display as the app name. 4\) In the page design, select the \[Basic Functions] – \[Page] menu. 5\) Select 'App Introduction' and then click on the \[Apply] button. \*Hover your mouse over the App introduction screen to see the Apply button. 6\) Click on the \[Save] button at the top of the screen and you're done! > **The introduction, description, address, email address, phone number, website address, etc. listed on the app introduction page can be modified and used in \[Advanced Settings].** ![](/files/ItWgSlOXLeR7GYqLmUEC) You can modify the items on the About App page from the Advanced Settings menu of the app creation page. By selecting App Service Information, you can edit the app description, phone, email, address, app description, website address, etc. as shown on the home screen. **\[How to modify it]** **1)Select the \[Advanced Settings] menu at the top of the app creation page** **2)Settings: App Service Information** **3)You can modify it by clicking on the \[EDIT] button.** **4)After modification, click on the \[Save] button and it will be reflected in the app.** When you create your first app, you need to click on the \[App Creation] button to reflect it. When you make any modification to the app you've created, it is automatically reflected in the app when you save it. **​** **How do I delete content and delete banner buttons?** ![](/files/BFohq4iAVgDLgmzYUrVj) If you want to clear all the banner buttons, click on the \[RESET] button for each item and then click on the \[Save] button to remove the banner from the app. **If I edit the introductory text of the app and save it, won't it be reflected immediately?** App Introduction Title Phrase Modification will be reflected only if you save it on the first 1 modification and then press the \[App Creation] button to update it to the new version. After 1 modification, just save it and it will be automatically reflected in the app from then on. **★Entering the site address is linked with the \[Share] icon button at the bottom and the site link address in the middle.** Therefore, if you enter the site address, the sharing button and the site address will be displayed together. If you delete it, it will be removed along with the share button and the site address. ★**The representative image of the app introduction page is displayed in conjunction with the app icon image.** **\*Separate modification and removal are not possible.** *** {% hint style="danger" %} **Instructions for applying the home screen** **1) Home Screen – Applying a web link is not recommended.** -When you link a website on the home screen, the new screen may not open and might show an error, or the site may not open in the app due to the security settings within the site. \- For webpages that need to be opened in a new window, they can look weird on the app screen. (Screen configuration of pop-up windows, etc.) Therefore, please use only the menus mentioned above on the home screen. \*\*Also!! There's a site that prohibits embedding when applying web links. \*Naver, the following portal sites, and the sites provided by the portal, YouTube, social media sites (Instagram, Facebook), etc. are the representative sites that have been banned from embedding! In particular, the Naver blog or the next café that you run may not be able to connect properly to your home because it is blocked by Naver and the next itself. In general, shopping mall sites may also not be applicable inside the app due to a secure server such as payment. \* Apps applied to websites with such external security should not be released on the Play Store or App Store. \*If the web link is linked to the app menu and checked in 'View in a new window', it can be used without problems. **2) For those who want to build an app by linking through a website – we recommend that you build it as a webview app or a push-only app.** It is a style that is created by linking the web browser to the app as it is in the form of a web app. If you set up a link to the site on the main home screen of the app, events such as going back will not work properly because they behave differently from the website's page history. Especially for shopping mall sites, the same security behavior as the purchase will not work properly when applied to a regular prototype app. So if you want to use your website as your main one, you can create it by applying it as 'WebView' or 'Push-Only' in Design Theme - Prototype. **3) The home screen can be freely modified by using the menus.** You can apply an image page, or a template page, and then freely change to another menu. If you just click on the \[Save] button, it will be automatically reflected in the app as well, so you don't need to update it separately. **4) The home screen has the main screen set to the 'About the App' page.** It's a guideline-setting screen for first-time creators. Therefore, in addition to the app introduction page, we recommend that you change the home screen to another menu and use it. Above, I told you how to create a home screen. There are a lot of different menus that you can make as home screens, so try to modify your home screen in different styles\~! We recommend that you modify it to other menus in addition to the default set of app introduction menus. **\*Users who create in the style of push-only, and webview are created by applying the website link to the app, so they don't have to create a home screen separately. ^^** {% endhint %} *** *** # Registering a menu icon image **How to register a menu icon image** When you create a generic prototype app, you can register an icon in the menu. (When creating a push-only app, there is also an icon menu in the toolbar, and you can register an image from that menu as well.) In addition to the built-in icon image in the app MakerV3 screen, the user can register and use the desired image themselves. Check out the manual to see how to organize the menu and how to register icon images. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### ![](/files/qNnSaTLINXUCjIzmG1SX)App launch screen) icon image Check registered apps
​It's a footer prototype app. If you look at the bottom footer bar, you can see that the icon image is registered in the menu. In the previous MakerV2 version, the icon could only be selected as an image provided by Swing2App. In the MakerV3 update, if you have an icon image you want to add, you can upload the file directly and use it. Below we will show you how to register an icon image in the menu. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### Registering a menu icon image The menu icon image can be applied in step STEP 3 of the page. ![](/files/WNablElkhyzkBD3lM4QK) 1\)Select menu (You can create a menu by selecting the \[+] button) 2\)Enter the menu name 3\)Select the third \[Upload] button from the menu icon. 4\)In the file attachment window, select the image you want to register on the icon. 5\)The menu settings were used exactly as the set values. (If you need the corresponding function, such as menu activation, permission setting, etc., please apply the modification) 6\)In the page design, please apply the page to connect to the menu. In this manual, you created an industry-specific template in advance and applied it. 7\)Select the Save button to finish. \*Save will be automatically reflected in the app as well. You don't have to re-create the app. ​STEP3 Page steps simply need to be saved after you work, and they are automatically reflected in the app, so no updates are required. You can also check it on a virtual machine, but most of all, you have to make sure that the image is displayed in the app!! We recommend that you run the app on your mobile and test it. {% hint style="info" %} **\*Icon images can only be applied to squares of the same width\*height length, and sizes should be at least 20px to 512px or less.** However, since it is an image that is displayed on a mobile phone with a high resolution, it is recommended to register at least 100px so that the size is not too small. If the image resolution is low, the image quality may appear poor in the app. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **\*You can design the image you register for the icon yourself, or you can download and use the image for the icon from the icon site.** However, when using images taken from external sites, please be careful if they are copyrighted. {% endhint %} ​ ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### App launch screen) to check the icon image ![](/files/bKnff8jEGwTl8mSL2s4C) The screen on which the icon image is applied to the menu is applied. I've registered an image for each category. It is well displayed on the screen without breaking the resolution. In addition, I registered an image of a menu icon in an app that prototyped slides. I think it would be nice to put an icon image to fit your prototype. **\*Icon images can only be applied to squares of the same width x height length, and sizes should be at least 20px to 512px or less.** The image size I registered is 512\*512px. {% hint style="danger" %} **Instructions** The icon image registration function is an addition to the MakerV3 version and is not available in the MakerV2 version. If you use this feature, you can switch to the MakerV3 version. Be sure to proceed with the initial update at the time of the transition. {% endhint %} # How to use: Menu Exposure Settings Hiding menus is a new and updated feature in App MakerV3 When you create a menu, you can create it by choosing whether to **Exposure / Hiding** the menu, unlike the previous one, which was always shown in the app. **This means that if you have content that is not yet available to users or available to a particular group of users, you can Hiding the menu.** Hiding menus will not be visible in the app, and if you change to Exposure, the app will automatically show them. It's very simple to use, so please check the manual below to find out how to use it. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **Menu settings: How to use the Hiding function** ​The menu disable function is available in the App Maker V3 - STEP3 page step. After adding the menu on the MakerV3 screen, **check the menu to 'Hiding' in the right menu settings - preferences - and save it.** On the right virtual machine (preview), you can see that the menu is not visible now. ![](/files/vqr0RoztxSsz7Yon5zuU) 'Hiding' is a functionality that generates a menu within the application interface, **yet refrains from active display for app users, maintaining a non-visible presence.** So on the App MakerV3 screen, only the administrator who is creating the app can see it. When the production is complete, and you re-open the app, you can change the menu to 'Exposure' and save. You don't need to re-create the app, just save it, exit the app, and relaunch it to see the menu. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### App launch screen - check to Hiding menu ![](/files/Q4XHDAmT80qOww9RjLwz) You can test the app to see if the menu is actually invisible in the app. After checking the "Swing2App Hotel" menu as "Hiding", you will see that when you launch the app, you will not see the "Swing2App Hotel" menu, only the other active menus will be visible. Since no updates are required, you can always modify this menu setting and incorporate the menus back into your app. {% hint style="warning" %} **\[Instructions]** The menu Hiding function is an addition to the MakerV3 version and is not available in the MakerV2 version. If you use this feature, you can switch to the MakerV3 version. Be sure to proceed with the initial update at the time of the transition. {% endhint %} **​** # Set menu settings: Access permissions **What is an access permission setting?** With the ability to set permissions to access in-app menus, you can set user-specific permissions to view the menu, such as making it accessible only to specific members and registered users. If the menu that can be viewed by permission needs to be different depending on the nature of the app, the administrator can set the access permissions for each menu directly. The Access Permission feature was only available on the bulletin board, but in the MakerV3 update, it was added to apply to all menus. > **Permission setting options** > > 1\)**Full Disclosure**: Accessible to anyone who has installed the app, regardless of whether they are registered user or not. > > \*By default, menus are set to ' Full disclosure' if you do not set permissions. > > 2\)**Permission Group Disclosure**: You can set it to be accessible only to certain members. > > \*You can set it like: Only members of Level 2 can be access, only 1 administrator and 1 deputy manager can access etc. > > 3\) **Private**: Access to all users who have registered in the app, regardless of membership level > > \*Guests who have not registered are not allowed to access. **\[Instructions]** The menu permission function is exclusively available on the Maker V3 version (not available in the Maker V2 version). So, if you wish to use this feature, you can switch to the MakerV3 version easily. Be sure to proceed with the initial update at the time of the transition from MakerV2 to MakerV3. *** > **Menu Permission Settings – How to Use Permission Settings**
The permission setting feature can be applied on the MakerV3 screen – **STEP3 page**. After selecting the menu on the left, you can set access permission options by selecting **\[Permissions settings]** in the menu settings. Through the manual, we will show you how to apply each access permission feature to the menu and how it will appear on the app launch screen. ​ > **1.Set permissions: Full Disclosure**
**Set Permissions – Full Disclosure** 1\)On STEP3 Page, please click on the menu to set permissions. (If you don't have a menu, click on the \[+] Add button to create a menu first) 2\)Menu Settings: In Permission Settings – Select the access permission in 'Full disclosure'. 3\) Click on the Save button. \*By default, menus are set to ' Full disclosure' if you do not set permissions. You can also see the applied screen on the virtual machine on the right to check the detailed function and how it will appear on the app launch screen. For the best result, please test it on your mobile. ### App launch screen ![](/files/yjd6Sx1uxvvkr2HDnBNs) When you set the permissions to 'Full disclosure', everyone who has installed the app can access it, irrespective of their membership status. If you launch the app as a guest, you can see that the logged-in user has access to the same menu as the guest. ​ > **\*\*2.\*\*Permission setting: Permission Group Disclosure** ​\*\**-Select Specific Members*\*
**Set Permissions – Permission Group Disclosure** 1\)On STEP3 Page, please select the menu to set permissions. (If you don't have a menu, click on the \[+] Add button to create a menu first) 2\)Menu Settings: In Permission Settings, select the access right for the 'Permission Group Disclosure' option. 3\)After selecting a member in the member selection window, you can click on the \[Add] button to create a permission list. 4\)Click on the \[Okay] button 5\) Click on the \[Save] button. \* You can select by adding specific members from the All Members section also. The Members Groups tab allows you to add members of a specific group. **-Select a group of members**
Members can see which groups you have created as ratings. If you are selecting a group of 2nd or 1st grade, please select it from the appropriate tabs. \*Before selecting a membership group, a permission group must be created first. On the Manager page, go to the \ to create different levels/groups for the app users. For instructions on how to create a group, please refer to the manual below. ☞ Permission Groups Settings-See how to create and apply groups ### App launch screen ![](/files/x1AnFWSdLvYDpWAFmUTw) If you have selected the Assigned Permissions only for Level 2 members, this is how users will see your app while accessing the menu. As you can see, only members of Level 2 will have access to the menu, and users who are not at that level will notice that the menu is not visible in the app. *** > **\*\*3.\*\*Permission setting: Member-only selection**
**Permission Settings – Private** 1\)On the STEP3 Page, please select the menu to set permissions. (If you don't have a menu, click on the \[+] Add button to create a menu first) 2\)Menu Settings: In Permission Settings – Select the access right to 'Private'. 3\) Click on the \[Save] button. ### App launch screen ![](/files/mspUjdfojQkyuwZ04E4p) If you select 'Private' for the access right, the menu will be accessible to all users who have registered in the app, and only guests who have not registered for membership will not be able to access it. {% hint style="warning" %} **\[Instructions]** 1\)Permission settings can be freely modified at any time after the app is created. \*No updates required. If you modify the access permission after creation, such as setting it from Full Disclosure to Private, it will be automatically reflected in the app. \*Reflects when you exit the app and relaunch it. 2\)The menu permission function is exclusively available on the Maker V3 version (not available in the Maker V2 version). So, if you wish to use this feature, you can switch to the MakerV3 version easily. Be sure to proceed with the initial update at the time of the transition from MakerV2 to MakerV3. {% endhint %} \*\*\*\* \*\*\*\* **Related Articles** * [앱 메뉴 비활성화 이용방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/menu-hiding/) * [메뉴 아이콘 이미지 등록방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/icon/) * [푸시앱 툴바-이용방법 및 기능 소개](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/pushapp-toolbar/) * [웹뷰앱 – 기본 설정, 고급 설정 옵션](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/webviewapp-options/) * [웹뷰,푸시앱-최초 실행 주소 이용방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/firstrun-url/) * [푸시앱 제작방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/push/) # Page Design - UI KIT **What is UI KIT?** This kit includes all types of bulletin board features provided by Swing2App. You can view the general board UI, location registration (map)board, group chat, calendar, and stamp board functions from here and apply them to your app.
Below, we'll show you how to apply each bulletin board UI to your app. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) Bulletin board The bulletin board is a feature that allows administrators to make posts for in-app community use, and users who use the app can also register their posts. The Swing2App provides a variety of bulletin board-style UI. You can create a board for each UI-specific style and apply it to your app to make use of it.
1\)On MakerV3, go to the STEP3 page 2\)Select any menu \*If you don't have any default menus, please create a new one by clicking on the \[+] Add button. 3\) Enter the name of the menu. 4\) Select the \[UI KIT] option from the page design. 5\) Please click on the \[Bulletin Board] option. 6\) Preview the board you want to register and click on the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the bulletin board page to see the Apply button) **\*NOTE** \*I haven't created a bulletin board, but I can see that there is a bulletin board. It's a sample built-in bulletin board, to show how each board type will appear in your app. Therefore, before using the bulletin board feature, please create a bulletin board. Go to the \*App Manager page - Click on the Services option - Click on the Bulletin Board, and delete the unused/default bulletin board. Now, please register the board that you wish to apply to the app. 7\) On the MakerV3 page-> Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} If you select the Preview button, you can see how the page will appear in your app. (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon: During the production phase, menu settings are not required. So, please apply additional menu settings as per your requirement. {% endhint %} Check out the detailed manual on how to create a bulletin board and apply it to your app. ☞ Create a board manual ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) Location Registration Location registration is a map board, you can use it to register any address in the app \~!! It's a location registration feature that you can use when you need an in-app map to guide your customers. The map function is provided in conjunction with Kakao Map. The map board allows you to enter a variety of details, such as a business address, business description, directions, homepage, phone number, business image etc.
1\)On MakerV3, go to the STEP3 page 2\)Select any menu \*If you don't have any default menus, please create a new one by clicking on the \[+] Add button. 3\) Enter the name of the menu. 4\) Select the \[UI KIT] option from the page design. 5\) Please click on the \[Map Board] option. 6\) Preview the board you want to register and click on the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the bulletin board page to see the Apply button) **\*NOTE:** \*Please create a location registration board first. If you don't create one, the location registration board won't appear on the screen and won't be applicable to your app. \*To create a location registration board, you should click on the \[New] button on the UI KIT screen, or you can create a bulletin board from App Manager-Service Management- Board Management. 7\) Click on the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icons during the production phase are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without such settings, so please apply additional if required. {% endhint %} **Please check the detailed manual on how to use the location registration (map) bulletin board.** **☞** **Location Registration (Map) Bulletin Board Manual** ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) Group Chat Within the app, multiple users can chat at the same time, and you can also chat with administrators and multiple users. You can also set chat room permissions for each group of members, and you can also set up a secret chat room where app users need to enter the password to access the chat room.
1\)On MakerV3, go to the STEP3 page 2\)Select any menu \*If you don't have any default menus, please create a new one by clicking on the \[+] Add button. 3\) Enter the name of the menu. 4\) Select the \[UI KIT] option from the page design. 5\) Please click on the \[Chat Board] option. 6\) Preview the board you want to register and click on the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the bulletin board page to see the Apply button) \*Please create a group chat board first. If you don't have a group chat board, it won't appear on the screen and won't be applicable to your app. \*You can select the \[New] button on the UI KIT screen, or you can create a bulletin board from App Manager-Service Management- Board Management. 7\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} For details on how to create a group chat room and how to use it, please refer to the manual below. ☞Group Chat Room Manual ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) Calendar You can easily register key events in your calendar, and businesses that need to manage bookings can record their reservation status by date and time. In the calendar, you can also keep important news and announcements.
1\)On MakerV3, go to the STEP3 page 2\)Select any menu \*If you don't have any default menus, please create a new one by clicking on the \[+] Add button. 3\) Enter the name of the menu. 4\) Select the \[UI KIT] option from the page design. 5\) Please click on the \[Calendar Board] option. 6\) Preview the board you want to register and click on the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the bulletin board page to see the Apply button) \*Please create a calendar board first. If you don't have a stamp that you created, it won't appear on the screen and can't be applied to your app. \*You can select the \[New] button on the UI KIT screen, or you can create a bulletin board from App Operation-Service Management- Board Management. 7\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} For a detailed manual on how to use a calendar, please check the manual below. ☞ Calendar How-to Manual ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) Stamp Stamps are mobile online coupons that allow administrators to add stamps to a user's account. You can use it in conjunction with a coupon. The administrator can add a stamp with the membership number issued by the app, or you can add it by taking a QR code. When you register for the stamp board, you can add a stamp with the QR code and membership number that are automatically generated.
1\)On MakerV3, go to the STEP3 page 2\)Select any menu \*If you don't have any default menus, please create a new one by clicking on the \[+] Add button. 3\) Enter the name of the menu. 4\) Select the \[UI KIT] option from the page design. 5\) Please click on the \[Stamp Board] option. 6\) Preview the board you want to register and click on the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the bulletin board page to see the Apply button) \*Please create a stamp board first. If you don't have a stamp that you created, it won't appear on the screen and can't be applied to your app. \*You can select the \[New] button on the UI KIT screen, or you can create a bulletin board from App Operation-Service Management- Board Management. 7\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} For a detailed manual on how to register a stamp board and use the stamp, please refer to the manual below. ☞ Stamp Use and Registration Method Manual # Page Design - eStore Page **We will introduce you to the basic pages required to create a shopping mall app and how to apply them to the app.** This function is provided for free, and when the shopping mall application is activated, the \[Swing Store] menu will immediately appear on the app manager page.\ Users can freely manage their stores through the Swing Shop menu. In addition to product registration, the basic pages required for the shopping mall app are also provided. We provide all types of shopping mall pages such as shopping mall main screen, shopping cart, my page, check my purchase history, search for products, etc. Therefore, when creating an app, users can add only the necessary menus and apply them to the app. Check the shopping mall function page and the app launch screen that applied the page. **\*Swing Shop is only available for general prototype (slide, top, footer, dropdown) app creation.** **Webviews and push apps that link to the website are not available.** **Q. Where do I find the shopping mall feature page and how do I apply it to the app?** When you sign up for a swing shop, they provide you with basic pages that you can operate in the mall. → On the MakerV3 page-> Go to the STEP3 page → Click on the \[eStore] option provided under Page design-> here you can see the pages related to the swing shop (the page required to operate the mall).
**\[Swing2App eStore provides]** **- Customer page(for users): Cart, My Page** **- Shopping mall main, shopping mall information** **- Category List** **- Digital merchandise purchase completion page** **-Booking date reservation products, booking date + time reservation products** **- Search product feature** You can apply the required pages to the app and use them. Each page is applied to a menu and by looking at the virtual machine on the right, you can see in real-time how the page looks in the app. So as you build your app, you can apply multiple pages to the menu and see how it works for your app through a virtual machine. I'll show you the app launch screen for each page through the manual below\~!! ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **1.** Shop Main Page ![](/files/kyDnBKpGK0CEhw7GoDDO) The shop main page is the main home screen page suitable for application to the home screen. The mall offers to be used as the main screen. A menu of popular items, categories, and major items is provided. Popular Items, Categories, and Major Merchandise menu bars are fixed styles, so no design modifications can be made separately. It is not mandatory to apply the page as a home screen, so you can customize it to suit your app's style ^^ ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%ED%99%94%EC%82%B4%ED%91%9C.png) ### How to apply: Shop main page
On the MakerV3 page 1\)Go to the STEP3 page. 2\)Select \[HOME] \*You can apply Shop main page to your home screen, or you can add it to a menu. If you want to add it as a menu, select the \[+] shape button to create a new menu first. 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Click on the \[eStore] from the page design 5\) Click on the \[Page] option. 6\) Find the 'Shop Main' page and click on the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 7\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **2. Shopping** Cart ![](/files/k9m4QDIrJ1Prn04QyjlJ) A shopping cart is a **page that stores items of interest and items that you plan to buy.** You can check the items you put in your shopping cart to make a purchase. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **3.** Category List ![](/files/NBwjtCXsOhCkNTLLMkGO) A category list is a **page that shows a list of categories, not individual products.** When you register a product, you create a category first and then register your product by that category. For example, a clothing mall is \- TOP categories: T-shirts, blouses, knits -DRESS Category: One Piece \- BOTTOM Categories: Pants, Skirts, Shorts, Jeans After you have organized these categories, you will register the appropriate products for each category. Therefore, even the categories you create in this way can be configured with the app menu with a category list page. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **4.** Digital Products Page ![](/files/NVxAPOmX3FCk8k3vADWo) This page is only available if you have registered a digital product Page dedicated to digital products. \*Digital products: These are products such as pdfs, videos, files, coupons, etc. Physical or reserved products are not available even if you apply the page. This is a page for viewing and viewing the purchased content. You will need to apply this page to see what users have purchased from the app. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **5.** My Page ![](/files/k6FQxilkCoH9AqH73D3O) \[My Page] is a page where you can check everything related to user purchase information, payment, and delivery. Therefore, in the mall app, it is a must!! It's a feature you need to put in. As you can see in the image, it provides functions such as order status, tracking delivery, delivery completion, purchase completion, exchange tracking, and more. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **6.** Shop Info ![](/files/3pyWq0VTgybyKOJ2sIug) It's a store information page. It is a page consisting of basic shopping mall information, which provides customer center and operating hours. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **7.** Search Page ![](/files/pyLY3TCdQ3SD81LS7j08) A product search page where you can search for and find products registered in the app. You can tap the magnifying glass icon button to search for the product name. \*Select the list in the top menu to view the screen in various styles. \*If you select a filter – it will be filtered by priority, latest, product price, and popularity. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **8.** Booking Page: Schedule Products(based on Date) ![](/files/JMRSrzbQsyBfKlYZjPSD) This page is only available if you have registered the reservation system page dedicated to the reservation system The reservation system is available in 2 categories: a date reservation product that is booked by specifying a date, and a time + **date reservation product that is booked by specifying a date and time.** The first page I'm going to show you is **\[Reserve a Duration (Date)Reservation Product].** It can be applied if you have registered a lodging establishment such as a hotel or a product that makes a reservation for the entire date. As you can see in the image above, the Calendar window shows Check-in and Check-out. When the date lookup is complete, the products available for that date will be viewed. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **9.** Booking Page: Make Reservation (based on Date+Time) ![](/files/GwYdBukZNbKoinKv85uj) This page is only available if you have registered the reservation system page dedicated to the reservation system The second is the **\[Book Time + Date Reservations] page.** As you can see in the image above, you can select a date in the calendar window to look it up. **The products available for booking on that date will be viewed, and you can select a time to make a reservation.** Therefore, if you have registered for a date and time reservation, you can apply to the second page\*\*.\*\* {% hint style="warning" %} **Swing Shop (Shop Mall) Basic** 1\)The swing page provided in the swing shop cannot be designed and modified separately. Because it is presented as a single already completed design page, rather than as a fabrication tool, it is not possible to modify it to the desired shape. If you need individual corrections on the pages provided, you will need to request a customization. Or, in addition to modifying the pages provided by Swing2App, adding new pages also needs to be customized. 2\) Some of the pages provided by the swing shop must be put in the app, and there are many optional checks. So when you're building your app, you just need to find out what pages your app needs, and put the right pages in consideration of style, etc. But there are also some pages that you will definitely need! The reservation system requires you to enter a booking purchase page. For digital products, you will need to fill in the digital product purchase completion page. Depending on what kind of product you are selling, there are some pages you need, so please check and operate them. 3\) You can check the screen applied to the virtual machine, so please use the virtual machine 100% when making ^^ {% endhint %} *** # Page Design - eStore Deals **eStore function – how to use the product** It is a menu that is only available to those who use the swing shop (shopping mall), and you can apply the registered products to the app. Please check how to apply the product page to the app and the app launch screen with the page applied. ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **1.** Apply products to the app The product page is available in the app creation STEP3 page step - eStore function.
1\)Go to STEP3 Page 2\)Select Menu or Create a new menu. Click on the \[+] button to add a new menu. 3\) Enter a menu name. 4\) Select \[eStore] feature from the page design option 5\) Please select \[Product] option. \*Please register your product in the swing shop first. If the product doesn't exist, it can't be applied to the app. 6\) After previewing the product to be applied, click on the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 7\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **2.** Where can I register my products?
**After applying for the swing shop,** App Manager page → Go to \[Shop] option - Click on \[Products] option → You can register products in the product item registration option. Products can be registered by selecting physical, digital, and reservation systems by type. **To modify a registered product:**
1\) Shop - In \[Product] Management Selection 2\) Select \[Product List] from the left menu. 3\) Select the product name you want to edit from the product inquiry list.
You will be taken to the Edit Product Item Registration screen. The product item registration screen and the edit screen work on the same page. It becomes the registration screen when registering a new product, and switches to the edit screen when modifying an already registered product. Therefore, **after you modify what you want to edit on that page, select the \[SAVE] button at the bottom of the screen to take effect.** Instead of needing a separate app update, just select Modify and the fix will be automatically reflected in the app. If you exit the app and relaunch it, you can see the modifications. ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **3.** App launch screen) Product application screen ![](/files/35Bswio14K8v0wM6akyc) This is the screen where the 'Product Category' menu is applied to the app. A product category shows all the products registered in that category. **Related Articles** * [페이지 기능 – 상품카테고리](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/product-category/) * [페이지 기능 – 쇼핑몰 페이지](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/swingshop-page/) * [회원가입 양식 – 가입 항목 추가하기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/appmanage/service/set-membershipform/) * [상품수정-등록한 상품 수정하기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/swingshop/product-edit/) * [페이지 기능 – HTML에디터 페이지](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/editorpage/) * [페이지 기능 – 이미지 페이지](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/imagepage/) # Page Design - Product Category **How to use the product category** It is a menu that is only available to those who use the swing shop (eStore), and it is a page where all the products registered in a particular category are shown. Please see how to apply the product category to the app and the app launch screen with the page applied. ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **1.** Apply product categories to your app The product category page is available in the app creation STEP3 page step - eStore function. ![](/files/DSBY4NiQVTYVFf1qUtmI) 1\)Go to the STEP3 Page Selection 2\)Select Menu or Create a new menu. Click on the \[+] button to add a new menu. 3\) The menu name does not need to be changed. \*Since the category name appears to be the menu name, even if you enter a name, it will not be reflected in the app menu name. 4\) Select \[eStore] feature from the page design option. 5\) Please select the \[Product Category] option. \*Categories must be created in advance when registering for Swing Shop products. If there is no product category, it will not be applicable. 6\) Find the category you want to apply and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 7\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) \*\*2.\*\*Where can I register a product category? ![](/files/qRioGWX5Ub567jMxEmDI) **After applying for the swing shop,** App Manager page → Go to \[Shop] option - Click on \[Products] option → You can register the product category in the product category option. ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **3.** App launch screen) Product category application screen ![](/files/6NP6poAl7WnhT2hGrA68) This is the screen where the 'Product Category' menu is applied to the app. A product category shows all the products registered in that category. {% hint style="danger" %} **Precautions for using product categories** When applying a product category to a menu **– it is only available in the physical and digital product categories.** Since the calendar (screen where you can select the reservation date) screen appears first, the product screen does not appear when you apply the product category. Please refer to the use! {% endhint %} **Related Articles** * [페이지 기능 – 쇼핑몰 기능 페이지](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/swingshop-page/) * [회원가입 양식 – 가입 항목 추가하기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/appmanage/service/set-membershipform/) * [상품수정-등록한 상품 수정하기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/swingshop/product-edit/) * [페이지 기능 – HTML에디터 페이지](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/editorpage/) * [페이지 기능 – 이미지 페이지](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/imagepage/) * [페이지 기능 – 업종별 템플릿](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/template-page/) # Page Design- Page Templates ▶What is a template page? It is a web page creation tool provided by the user page- it is a design template creation tool for each industry. Users can create a web page by inputting only text and images according to the guidelines on the page where the design is applied. Users can create pages more easily by providing templates for each style and industry for web pages that are difficult to create directly in terms of design. *** ### App launch screen - Apply template page ![](/files/J2RQe9JskKYNmJ5vK5qd) This is the screen where I launched the Swing Hotel sample app. From the home screen, each menu was applied to the app using the Hotel03 template page provided by the web template. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9822.png) ▶ **Go to see the template styles by industry** [**http://wp.swing2app.co.kr/template-page/**](http://wp.swing2app.co.kr/template-page/) *** ### **STEP.1** Creating a new web template page You can create a page template on the App MakerV3 screen. ![](/files/QyYpuShSZLrfA9nKdB6f) 1\)On the MakerV3 page – Go to STEP3 Page 2\)Under the Page Design option, select the \[Page Template] option. 3\)Click on the \[+] Add new page-> to open the template editor screen. Below we'll show you how to build a template and how to apply it to your app after it's built. ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-e1611212616323.png) **STEP.2** Creating a Template Page ![](/files/wk1rcFjmuta8xQqJGdV0) Select the **\[Add] button** at the bottom of the site to open the **‘New Page‘** window. Select a template from here and start modifying your template as per your requirement. I'll tell you how to use it in detail below\~! ![](/files/5IL5ugNY3tZLc2nmXh98) 1\)Select the \[**+New**] button on the left side of the Template production screen. 2\) Click on the page type to check various page styles. **\*The Swing2App is constantly updated and available on industry-specific pages.** **\*Users can select a page with the desired design.** *** ![](/files/eiN80UYjGKgmCfzYR2U1) 3\) Select the page and press the **\[Add]** button. ![](/files/S6D53kS6Y3JXnXzMWQQN) 4\) You can see the template page added to the Template editor screen like this. If you look at the right side of the screen, you can modify and use each of them. \*The **\[Copy]** and **\[Delete]** buttons are available at the bottom left of the screen. \*The **\[Default]** button is a button that reverts back to the template style that was originally set. ▶ **Please check how to use it\~!** ![](/files/9kEu9o0T2F0ZUdS8CLem) ![](/files/OHEC4uiNlltUSyJqBB1y) -The **page name** at the top is the page name that will be displayed in the app, so please modify it accordingly. \- ​Each area of ​​the page is designed to be editable -**Text**: Both the text size and color can be specified, and the title area is provided to adjust the margins. \- Both adding and deleting template buttons are possible. \- You can link pages by using the **\[Link Wizard]** feature. -**Menu tab**: If you don't want the header area in your template, check the 'Disable' button to Deactivate it. \*Note: The area will be deleted from the template, you can get back it by clicking on the 'Enable' option. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/%EC%A4%841.png) **\*\*\*\* Create a different style template page** 5\) The templates in different styles follow the same process of modification. When you select a page, it will appear on the screen. If you look at the settings provided on the, you can modify and apply them one by one in the areas that can be modified. ![](/files/H2NHecw0THumpw9Yd2EL) **6) To attach an image, you can register the desired image by pressing the image button.** Each template has an image size that lists the images. It's good if you fit the image according to the size. Even if the size has not been modified, pressing the Edit Image button will open the **\[Image Editing Tools]** window. Here you can register by adjusting it to the size of the image. ![](/files/V7Kj0X3q1Pvx9n0lsIMO) **7) The Link Wizard refers to the feature, by which links can be applied to each banner (button).** If you select the **\[Link Wizard]** button, you can select the page, feature, or link that you want to link with as shown in the image above. In addition to the regular website web links, the Swing2App app can integrate all the features used within the app. **8) When all the work is done, be sure to press the \[Save] button.** You need to press the **\[Save]** button to save the page perfectly!! Items are reflected on the page as soon as they are modified. When all is done, press the **\[Save]** button, and the page is finished saving as you are working. *** ### **STEP.3** Applying your web template page to the app ![템플릿 페이지 앱에 적용하기](/files/tPK4l5LdWahGfCg47zIz) On the App MakerV3 screen 1\)Go to the STEP3 page. 2\)Home Screen –> Select HOME 3\)Enter the menu name (the name that will be shown at the top of the home screen) 4\)Select **\[Page template]** from the page design. 5\)Select the **'Refresh'** button on the right to see the template you have created. 6\) Click on the **\[Apply]** button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 7\)Press the **\[Save]** button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. \*I have selected the home screen and applied the template page, but I can apply it to the menu in addition to the home screen? You can also apply a template page to a menu. \*Select the Preview button to see how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After the page is applied, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, Menu settings are not applicable to HOME and are not required. **\*\*\*\* App launch** **screen) Template Page** ![](/files/J2RQe9JskKYNmJ5vK5qd) *** ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-e1611212616323.png) **STEP. 4** Editing the template page (how to modify) Modifying a template is the same as going to the App MakerV3 – Select \[Page Templates] under the Page design option-> When you hover your mouse cursor over the template page, you'll see different buttons-> Click on **\[More]** button-> Click on **\[Update]** button. ![](/files/SY2nt4sSoVoDpbSV4L8E) Template modifications don't have a separate page. You'll get redirected to the Template editor page-> Modify your old template easily. # Page Design - Image Page ▶**What is an image page?** Image page is a custom editor tool that you can use to create an image for your app. You can edit an image by applying a link and tooltip to it. The ability to apply a variety of links to images can be useful when building apps. ▶**Utilization Tip** 1. When multiple web links need to be applied to one image ex) Applicable to multiple links instead of one, such as homepage and blog. 2. When applying multiple bulletin board links to one image ex) Bulletin board links such as notice boards and free bulletin boards can be applied. 3. If you want to put a more detailed description of the image, you can apply the tooltip so that the message appears. 4. Can work on a banner – Create an image in banner style and specify the area to apply the link. ▶ **If you want to put an image full on your home screen when creating an image page, you can work with the mobile screen resolution standard of 1080px horizontally and 1980-2200px vertically.** **★To fit the horizontal size, the vertical length is adjusted according to the screen of the phone.** **So depending on what prototype you applied to the portrait and the type of phone you have, it may be a little longer or shorter in length.** Because it is fixed horizontally and vertically changes depending on the mobile environment, not all phones can show the same screen. **Please refer to it when using it\~** *** ### Apply Image Page: App launch screen *** **\***Swing2App Official App – Image Page Application Screen ![](/files/S5AjZX1IueHAfsfJYBGk) \*This is the image page screen applied to the official Swing2App app. ​ ![](/files/uJ9wq9ZZvuIKcQoK1Jbo) \- I selected an area above the image and linked the page to each of the banner areas. -When launching the app, you can select a specific banner in the image and make it go to the linked page. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) *** **User App) Example App Image Page Application Screen** ![](/files/s6D7oUgykx5gChtbT3MT) ![](/files/3k6eaA8KVktLDJ7QPcEP) ### **STEP 1.** Create an image page ![](/files/bXr6KZPJIXA094EEVjjZ) You can create a page template on the App MakerV3 screen. 1\)Go to the STEP3 Page 2\)Under the Page Design option-> Click on the \[Image Map] feature 3\) Click on the \[+] button. You'll get redirected to the Image Page editor Tool screen. Below we'll show you how to create an image page and how to apply that page to your app after it's built. *** ### **STEP 2.** Creating an Image Page ![](/files/pLlqooH2f7lrI6d9kX01) In this editor tool screen, you can easily create an image page. **1.Register an image** Be the first to register your image. **Select the \[Upload Image] button or the \[New] button to select the image you want to register.** \*Since the image page is a function to put a banner such as a link on top of the designed image, you need to upload it as a finished image! {% hint style="success" %} If this is the first time you are working, please select the \[New] button to do the work. If you need to re-upload a modified image in addition to what you have already done, you may want to use the \[Upload Image] button! {% endhint %} *** **2. Modify the image page** ![](/files/1JGphxTV36mvkjFEhUnX) Modification process of the image page: **All you need to do is check the 'Shape Tool' which sets the banner area on top of the image, the 'Link Action' which allows you to link to the area, and the 'Default Style' which sets the area style.** {% hint style="success" %} ★Default style -Background Color: You can color the area you set with the tool. -Background Opacity: You can specify the transparency of the area set by the tool. If you don't want the tool to be visible when you select the mouse, you can set the transparency to '0'\*\*.\*\* {% endhint %} *** **3. Shape Tools – Check your style** ![](/files/qMEJkHwQAvJirHtJxOcW) **Tool shapes are available in dot shapes, squares, ellipses, and polygons.** \- When using a dot shape, clicking the mouse cursor over the image creates a point. -When using a rectangular or oval shape, simply place the mouse cursor over the image and drag it from the left to create an area. \- For polygons, dotting multiple areas, and then dotting back to where you originally dotted creates a polygon area. **▶ Please check how to set the area through the image that you are receiving.** ![](/files/y6nQOOQAg9Ur84lHdT10) *** **4. Apply the link** Once you've set up a shape, let's see how to apply a link inside the shape zone you set. ![](/files/rV0RAw1waOae1ZXIFNYb) **For links, please select the \[Link Action] option provided on the right side settings screen.** **1) Mouse hover:** This is a menu that applies how it works when you touch the mouse. Select \[Do nothing] because you will only apply the \[View: Do Nothing, Show Tooltips] link. **2) Click Action:** This is a menu that applies how it works when the mouse is clicked. Select \[Move Link] because you need to go to the link when selecting \[View: Do Nothing, Show Tooltip, Move Link]. **3) Link Wizard:** A tool that allows you to select the app menu, web link, etc. page to be linked. ![](/files/DEisw7zdfPXlwrvHdEcX) When you select the Link Wizard button, the 'Link Wizard' window will pop up as shown in the image above. Here, when you have selected the banner, you can select the menu you want to move. In the manual, we chose the introductory banner for the image, so we'll choose the 'HOMEPAGE' template that we've worked on beforehand. You can select \[Reflect]. {% hint style="danger" %} **\*Precautions** The menus and content within the app need to be completed. If you don't have a bulletin board or user page at all, you won't have a menu to choose from in the Link Wizard, right? So, when you're done creating all the content that will go into your app, use the Link Wizard on the Images page. {% endhint %} ![](/files/9Ybh0qcNrswe6vnOdzqB) Of course\~ in the Link Wizard, you can apply it to all other menus in addition to the above menus. For example, **if you select a banner and you want it to go to your blog, you can select \[Link Wizard] and then in \[Weblink] – enter the blog site address URL and reflect it** *** ▶**Check out how to create an image page with help of video** ![](/files/AigDy2W1Twa6ErcZYHmQ) **You can use the mouse over style to color the Background Color.** **If you set it to '0' in Background Opacity, you can also set the banner to be transparent.** *** ▶**Creating Image Pages TIP** ![](/files/LBZVnkcoNd4LRL5K6xwj) Let me give you a TIP. If you use the **\*\*\[Duplicate Style button]\*\* in the list, you can get the same area style and the default style.** All you have to do is change the link settings, which makes it a little easier! **5. Complete Production** ![](/files/5byaf2u3TCAbNOn7n0Ll) The image page has been applied Finally, please enter the page name. (When applied to the app, the page name will appear in the menu.) Press the \[Save] button and you're done. So let's go back to the app creation page and apply that image page to the app!! *** ### **STEP.3** Applying an Image Page to Your App ![](/files/pXqyVq9iCO8pvWENQHCE) Go to the MakerV3 screen 1\) Click on the STEP3 page 2\)Home Screen – Select **HOME** 3\)You do not need to change the menu name. \*The image page is the name saved by the Image Page Creator and is displayed at the top of the home screen. 4\) Select \[Image Map] from the page design. 5\)Select the 'Refresh' button on the right to see the template you have created. 6\) Select \[Apply]. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 7\)Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*I have selected the home screen and applied the page, but I can apply it to the menu in addition to the home screen. You can also apply pages to menus. \*Image pages are subject to the 'Page Name' entered in the Page Maker as the home screen name. \*Select the Preview button to see how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After the page is applied, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the editing phase, Menu settings are not applicable to HOME and are not required. {% endhint %} *** ### **STEP.4** Image Page Creator – Applying the Tooltip In addition to linking a link banner to an image page, I'll also show you how to apply the tooltip. What is a tooltip? **The tooltip is used as a way to attach a message window-shaped icon above the image and provide an additional description.** **Example of applying tooltips)** ![](/files/onlurj12lFh9zbWzn1T2) **1. Image Page - How to Apply Tooltips** ![](/files/sKRGZo3JRE0o5Wslk1yy) Select the \[New] button in the Image Page Creation Tool and import the image. **1)Select the area where you want to apply the tooltip over the image by dragging the area to the tool menu.** —Let me explain the menu types for you to use in the right menu bar— **2) Link Action** The link action is a menu that applies how the area to which you applied the tooltip will look. (1) Mouseover action: This is a menu that applies how it works when the mouse is pressed. Select \[Do nothing]. (2) Click Action: This is a menu that applies how it works when the mouse is clicked. Since the tooltip should be shown when touched, select \[Show tooltip] from the click action. **\*Utilize TIP. You can create using both the tooltip menu and the 2 weblink menus.** **3)Basic style** It's a tool area style. Check the options only for background color and background transparency. If you want the tooltip to show the area where it will be shown, please add color and transparency. If you want to make the area invisible, set the Background Opacity to '0'. **4) Tooltip style** It's a menu where you enter the tooltip style. - > box area design with message visible You can modify the horizontal and vertical size, set the color, tooltip position, transparency, and degree of area rounding. \*Caution\* When modifying the size, please make sure that the horizontal length does not exceed 330. (up to 330px) **5) Text Style** Text Style is a menu where you can modify the text color, font size, tooltip box size, etc. created in the tooltip. You can edit it by dividing the title area and the body area. **6) Tooltip content** Enter what you want to enter in the tooltip box. The tooltip is divided into a title (title) and a text (body) to create the content. **7) Enter the page name** \*Enter the page name after saving all the contents. **8) After completion, press the \[Save] button.** ​ ![](/files/zjBscqZ71OMdw2z97iBg) **9)** **Select \[Preview]** to see the tooltip box applied over the image. **2. Apply the tooltip to the Image Page app** ![](/files/rmnFpxOmmX164LpkKZK6) Image pages created with the tooltip can also be applied to your app. The method for applying it to your app is the same as the one we showed you above. Go to the MakerV3 screen 1\) Click on the STEP3 page 2\)Home Screen – Select **HOME** 3\)You do not need to change the menu name. \*The image page is the name saved by the Image Page Creator and is displayed at the top of the home screen. 4\) Select \[Image Map] from the page design. 5\)Select the 'Refresh' button on the right to see the template you have created. 6\) Select \[Apply]. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 7\)Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*I have selected the home screen and applied the page, but I can apply it to the menu in addition to the home screen. You can also apply pages to menus. \*Image pages are subject to the 'Page Name' entered in the Page Maker as the home screen name. \*Select the Preview button to see how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After the page is applied, you can page appearance in the app through the virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the editing phase, Menu settings are not applicable to HOME and are not required. {% endhint %} ​ **3. App launch screen) Image Page Tooltip** ![](/files/onlurj12lFh9zbWzn1T2) *** ### **STEP.5** Editing the Image Page (How to Modify) Modifying a template is the same as going to the App MakerV3 – Select \[Page Templates] under the Page design option-> When you hover your mouse cursor over the template page, you'll see different buttons-> Click on \[More] button-> Click on \[Update] button. ![](/files/JfvJ3FbZMxKwQbZTl6Ql) Modifying the image page doesn't mean you have a separate page. You'll get redirected to the Template editor page-> Modify your old template easily. # Page Design - HTML Editor ▶ **What is an HTML Editor Page?** One of the features provided by the Swing2App user page is a menu that allows users to create their own web pages. Just like typing a post on a blog or café, you are free to place and create articles and images. You can apply a variety of web links, videos, text effects, and more. The main feature is that the user is free to create whatever style they want. ▶ **Editor Page Styles:** HTML editor pages can be created in any style you want. 1\) You can also insert an image and make it look like an image page. 2\) Just like writing a blog post, you can freely place posts and images, and apply video or web link movement. Therefore, if you think about how to build it in advance, and then work on it, it will be easier to use. 3\) You can create an unlimited number of HTML editor pages! *** ### Apply HTML Editor Page (app launch screen) ![](/files/rjGK41UXozCGzpmz2LAp) It's an HTML editor page applied to the official Swing2App app. We'll refer to the editor page above to make the production the same style. ### **STEP.1** Creating an HTML Editor Page ![](/files/Iw5EpHrsBW7v4BtsUc3e) HTML editor page can be created in the App MakerV3 screen. 1\)Go to STEP3 Page 2\)Under Page Design option, select \[HTML Editor] feature. 3\) Click on the \[+] button Clicking \[+] Add new page button will redirect you to the HTML Editor Page editor Tool screen. Below I'll show you how to create an editor page and how to apply it to your app after it's built. ### **STEP2.** Creating an HTML Editor Page #### \*\*\*1.\*\*HTML Editor Page Editor ![](/files/pc2Y6uNj4TQPXG5L0Ti4) The image above is the HTML Editor Page Maker screen. HTML editor pages have the same style as the editor writing used to write posts. It's the same as how you write a post, so you can use it without difficulty! There's a screen where you can write like a blog or a bulletin board. If you look at the top, you'll find a bar of different optional features for production and writing. {% hint style="success" %} **The page name is displayed as the page title on the app launch screen.** **Attachments such as images and videos, regular files, and web links can all be attached.** **And since you can customize the text, you can specify options such as font, color, etc.** **In addition, you can apply a variety of styles through the editor option bar menu.** {% endhint %} So let's work on it like the editor page of the official app shown above! **2. Register the video (enter YouTube URL)** ![](/files/076MAgdMdQdR0gQcWIuF) 1\)For videos, please select the \[Insert Video] icon button in the option bar. 2\) Enter the video URL. At this time, you can enter the video URL registered on YouTube and you can easily register it. If you press the third video upload button, you can also attach it as a video file. 3\)Press the insert button to complete the video registration in the text!! {% hint style="warning" %} **Query!!** I entered the video using the above method, but when I look at it in the app, the video screen does not match the horizontal and vertical ratios. {% endhint %} **See app launch)** ![](/files/QNtWkpkGJBoSrnO5etMU) So if you want to scale it to fit the screen, you can modify the video size in the following ways: ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%ED%99%94%EC%82%B4%ED%91%9C-3.png) ![](/files/VfD8gHZyzJQ8SXstshVX) When you click on the registered video, you can directly modify the image size: landscape and portrait length. Modified it to 380px wide and 200px vertical. **App launch screen)** ![](/files/GXAovXBNjIPDQ12sek1y) By resizing the video, you can adjust the video thumbnail ratio on the app screen to fit the screen. **3. Image Registration** ![](/files/a6zIGvtx9QJJoGK2aiIF) 1\) Select the \[Insert Image] icon button in the option bar. 2\)Drag & drop the image or click to register the image file in the attachment box. When you register, the image is applied directly to your screen. \*At this time, the image will be automatically modified to a horizontal size of 300px regardless of the actual image size. ​The image that is displayed on the web page is adjusted to fit the horizontal surface of the phone, so I have it sized to 300px horizontally. So the image size is adjusted. You can edit the image size again!! ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%ED%99%94%EC%82%B4%ED%91%9C-3.png) ![](/files/BEFZSoBPg57zgFRj1erV) 11\) When you click on the image, an options window will open below. Select the \[Resize] button here. 2\)Please put the size in the width (horizontal) field. \*If you only add the horizontal length, the height (vertical) will be automatically adjusted to the landscape. 3\)Press the Update button. {% hint style="success" %} Conversely, you can modify the image to the original image size significantly. On the actual app screen, it will appear full to fit the landscape, so you can use it in the auto-size of 300px, or you can use it in its original size. Instead, if the image needs to appear smaller on the screen, you can modify the size of the image to be smaller, just like I did. {% endhint %} **4. Registration of text articles** ![](/files/pQqR6XGMY4nkxHf18cip) You can input text when you hold the mouse cursor in the body. From the top options bar, you can select font, size, color, etc, and modify it to the style you want. **5. Insert a web link** ![](/files/C4SKi5VFKG3IObry0b3D) If you look at the Swing2App Official App Editor page for a moment, tap on the image and you'll be taken to a new page!! On the editor page, you can also insert a web link to each image, text, etc. Since you can link a web link to the image, you can touch it to go to the page you want. **1) When you click on the image, an options window will open below. Select the \[Insert Link] button here.** **2)Enter URL Options window will open anew. Enter the URL (web link address) in the appropriate field.** **\*Important!**\*\* You need to select \[Open in New Tab] to make it run a little more reliably, so be sure to check it!\*\* **3)Select the Insert button, and the link to the image will be finished linking.** {% hint style="warning" %} **★ One minute!** \- I don't want to link to a website, but I want to make the image go to a specific bulletin board created by the app! \- I want to go to the image page! -It's a shopping mall app, so I want to make you go to the product page!! If you want to link to a page created by an app rather than an external web link like this, there's a way!! Please check the details below. {% endhint %} ▶ **Using the Link Wizard** ![](/files/mmN3t1TUnfrsxlmoCBJB) 1\) When you click on the image, an options window will open below. Select the \[Insert Link] button here. 2\)Enter URL Options window will open. Select the 2nd icon \[Link Wizard] button here. 3\)**The Link Wizard pop-up window will open.** You can select from the left menu and add the swing function you want. \- If you want to put an image page, you can select the user page and apply it. -If you want to include a bulletin board, please select a bulletin board and apply it. \- If you want to go to a specific post, after selecting the post – you can apply it by searching for posts. In addition to the regular website links, the \[Link Wizard] allows you to go to the pages used within the app!! **6. Press the Save button when you finish the production.** ![](/files/zrm2BwrpSFNonNGzgMk6) When the editor page is finished creating, press the Save button and exit. *** ### **STEP.3** Applying HTML Editor Page to App ![](/files/NJeTRmego0a6MaeqHtwb) Go to the MakerV3 screen. 1\)Go to the STEP3 page 2\)Home Screen – Select HOME 3\)Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[HTML Editor] from the page design. 5\) Select the 'Refresh' button on the right to see the page you have created. 6\) Select \[Apply]. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 7\)Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*I have selected the home screen and applied the page, but I can apply it to the menu in addition to the home screen. You can also apply a page to a menu. \*Select the Preview button to see how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After the page is applied, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the editing phase, Menu settings are not applicable to HOME and are not required. {% endhint %} *** ### **STEP4.** HTML Editor Page Creation TIP Here are a few more features you need to create! **1. Horizontal Line** ![](/files/p57q8lqDmS97IMtICcDJ) As you write, there are times when you need something to differentiate between the two topics. It's usually called a divider line. If you press the Insert Horizontal Line button in the option bar, the divider is applied to the body. **2. Full Screen** ![](/files/fScDO2T4GE64IDNN0HRR) As you work on the page, the content gets long and the page goes down. As the page scrolls down, the top options bar disappears from the work view. At this time! **If you select the \[Full Screen] button, which is the last button on the option bar**, the screen is moved to the full screen, and this inconvenience disappears. The options bar is right at the top!! Since it is fixed, no matter how many pages are turned down, it does not disappear from the view of the work, and it is possible to work comfortably ^^ ​ **3. Quick Insertion** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%97%90%EB%94%94%ED%84%B0%ED%8E%98%EC%9D%B4%EC%A7%8013_20.07.png) If you look at the left side of the body screen, there is a \[+] shaped button. With the Quick Insert button, selecting it gives you quick access to frequently used options such as inserting images, inserting videos, and inserting horizontal lines. *** *** ### **STEP.5** Editing HTML Editor Pages (How to Modify\*\*)\*\* The same can be done by going into the App MakerV3 screen– HTML Editor \[Modify] button. ![](/files/d2E0eXMKFQg6XDUorMEE) Hover your mouse cursor over the editor page and there is a \[Edit] button. Select the \[Edit] button and then select the \[Modify] button →. Go to the HTML Editor Page Editor Tool screen. Editing the editor page doesn't mean that there is a separate page. You can update it by going in the same way as the creation page and making changes. # Page Design - Sign Up, login & Settings Page. *** **Page design provided by the page step - A swing page is a menu that provides the essential functionality of the app provided by Swing2App.** Sign up, log in, and setting pages are some of the most common app features. In addition to these functions, you can select a variety of functions from the swing page design and apply them to your app. We'll show you how to apply the sign-up, login, and settings pages provided by the swing page design to the app and the app launch screen. ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-e1611212616323.png) **1. Basic Feature->** Page: Sign up ![](/files/VKXjblzBk9USbOo0qWy5) Go to the MakerV3 screen. 1\)Go to the STEP3 page 2\)If you don't have any default menus, please create a new one by clicking on the \[+] Add button 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Feature] - \[Page] in the page design option. 5\) Find the Signup page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*Even after applying, you can still see how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. #### **▶**App launch screen) Registration ![](/files/ZrypxDvercShTiT7OKuy) This is the app launch screen with the registration function applied. \*\*Basic Settings Items of Sign up- ID, Password, Password Confirmation, Name (Nickname)\*\* if you do not modify anything. The items on the registration form can be modified by the operator himself. \*App Manager page → services option → Subscription settings option → modify the information in the membership form. You can find out more about how to set up the membership form by checking the manual link below. **☞****Setting up the membership form** *** ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-e1611212616323.png) **2. Basic Feature->** Page: Login ![](/files/PYr0rnK6qJOEgJ5BUOts) Go to the MakerV3 screen. 1\)Go to the STEP3 page 2\)If you don't have any default menus, please create a new one by clicking on the \[+] Add button 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Feature] - \[Page] in the page design option. 5\) Find the Login page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*Even after applying, you can still see how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. **▶ App launch screen) Login** ![](/files/XQje8onaiwmXD1ongyPK) The app launch screen with the sign-up feature applied. The ID and password entry screen will be displayed. **\*In addition to the general ID, the ID field will be changed when setting the email and phone number ID.** The login screen also displays the ability to sign up. **Once the login is complete, the login menu will change to 'Log Out'.** ![](/files/UaWQyn48wCRUvBWZ4LwP) After registering and completing the login, the login listed in the menu name will automatically change to → logout. *** ### ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-e1611212616323.png) **3. Basic Feature->** Page: Settings ![](/files/XUdUpsNyJLvxGn3E7vF1) Go to the MakerV3 screen. 1\)Go to the STEP3 page 2\)If you don't have any default menus, please create a new one by clicking on the \[+] Add button 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Feature] - \[Page] in the page design option. 5\) Find the Settings page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*Even after applying, you can still see how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. **▶App launch screen) Settings** ![](/files/FqlNEWEfpAIOSTNiVCLR) The app launch screen with the settings features applied. Settings include both Signup and Login options. So it's okay not to use the sign-up or log-in functions in the menu, just apply the settings to the app. In addition to these features, we also provide **push-notification settings, notification list checking, app sharing, app version check, and admin login.** Therefore, when creating an app, we recommend that you apply the setting function to the app and create it! Administrator login is a feature that allows you to log in as an administrator and operate the app. You can check the details of how to use the function by checking the manual link below. **☞****App Manager menu to see how to use the menu** {% hint style="warning" %} **\*Important Information** 1\)Membership signup, login, and settings provided on the swing page are not applicable to the home screen. It is only applicable to app menus (categories), so please use it only as a menu. 2\) It is recommended that you apply one function of 'login' rather than using membership and login together. Or use the 'Settings' menu that comes with the registration and login menu. 3\) The membership registration form can be modified on the [http://www.swing2app.co.kr/view/app\_policy](https://www.swing2app.com/view/app_policy) of the \[Subscription Settings] page, and when the ID form is modified, it is reflected on the login screen. 4\)Since the settings page is provided with a fixed content UX, the item cannot be modified like registering. Available only on the pages provided. 5\) All the features (pages) provided on the swing page are only provided with a fixed design, so style modification is not possible. Depending on the prototype color change, the background color, etc., can be modified, but the design cannot be changed. {% endhint %} *** *** # Page Design - Search Posts Page The Swing2App offers a variety of board styles, and users are free to create a board and write a post\~! The post search function, which finds the search terms you want, can also be useful. The Swing2App offers 2 different types of search post functions. **1. Integrated board search: Filter search terms across all boards applied to your app.** **2. Search for individual posts: Search for posts on individual bulletin boards** **e.g. Search for posts on the announcement board, search for posts on the free bulletin board** –Please check the manual below to find out how to use and apply the post search. ### **1.** Post Search Function ![](/files/UP6mZggzZt5GO5KUBaTB) To search for a post, a search term input window will appear at the top of the bulletin board list. After typing in the word you want to search, click the "magnifying glass" icon in the upper-right corner to filter the search terms to show them. ### \*\*2.\*\*Apply it to the \[Search Post] app ![](/files/L2kv9gSu9rOYv0GeIXlR) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Functions] - \[Page] in the page design. 5\) Find the 'Search Posts' page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*Even after applying, you can still see how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. ### **3.** App launch screen ![](/files/GQiarvpxH92AN2Xslm65) If you select the Search Posts menu that you have created, you will see a list of posts from all the boards applied to the app, as shown in the image above. You'll see a search terms field at the top. When you enter a search term, it is filtered to show it. 1\) Integrated Post Search If you are searching for content in posts on all bulletin boards – please apply the \[Search Posts] function provided by the swing page! 2\) Search for individual posts If you apply the board without adding any other features, the search term input window within the board is provided with the default settings. {% hint style="success" %} **★**\*\* \*\***Post Search Cleanup TIP** 1\) Integrated Post Search If you are searching for content in posts on all bulletin boards – please apply the \[Search Posts] function provided by the swing page! 2\) Search for individual posts If you apply the board without adding any other features, the search term input window within the board is provided with the default settings. {% endhint %} *** {% hint style="info" %} **Search individual posts** On the board, the search box is created with the default settings. So the ability to search for posts on a specific board is automatically provided on each board without having to add anything else. Board List Click the icon in the shape of a 'magnifying glass' in the upper-right corner of the screen to open a window where you can enter a search term. {% endhint %} *** *** *** **Related Articles** * [페이지 기본기능-회원가입, 로그인, 설정](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/join-login/) * [푸시, 웹뷰앱 초간단 앱제작방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/push-webview/) * [업데이트 유형별 앱 실행화면](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/update-type/) * [앱 업데이트 방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/app-update/) * [STEP4 앱제작하기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/appcreation/) * [앱 추가 제작](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/app-add/) # Page Design - View Favorite Page We'll tell you how to use the 'View Interest' provided by Swing2App. **View Posts – A bookmark feature that brings together all the posts you 'liked' a post.** **When a user presses the 'Like' button, they can see all the posts they have liked on the Mindfulness Board.** Check the manual – how to apply the Attention Writing feature to the app and use it! ### **1.** What is a View Interest? **It's a feature that brings together and shows all the posts that the user has pressed the 'like' button on the app post.** It's a common bookmarking feature. If any of your posts are from what you want to see again later, or if you want to save them, just press the 'Like' button. You can see it all in the Watchlist view ### **2.** How to apply the Watchlist app ![](/files/TSCHfQFEFgb8sTfD7SUF) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Functions] - \[Page] in the page design. 5\) Find the 'View Interest' page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*Even after applying, you can still see how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. ### **3.** App launch screen ![](/files/N6kFzcN8Kg0b6IItWhhC) After you do a 'like' check, go to the View Posts Interested, and you'll be able to see all the posts you've just checked on Likes. \*The View Watches bulletin board is displayed in the Timeline UI style. ![](/files/yhsjRJUkmj1w8DXza4ao) If you don't have a 'liked' post, you'll be marked as missing a post. Even if the user who clicked "Like" and another user log in, they will not see the favorite post. ### **4.** Instructions 1\) In order to use 'View Interesting Articles', you will need to recreate the app and use it in the new version. (Soft update is possible when creating the app) \*If you have created or updated your app after 7/01/2019 as of the update, you only need to save it after applying 'View Interest'. 2\) The post 'like' check is only available to users who are logged in after registering for membership in the app. Therefore, the view of the article is also available only to the user and not to the guest. 3\) Please check the logged-in user account. The user who likes must be logged in as the same user in order to see the likes list in the Watchlist of Followers. 4\) Watches view is not applicable to the app – home screen. Applicable to menus only. 5\) The list of 'liked' posts – will be displayed in the order in which the posts were registered and when they were registered. # Page Design - View Coupons Page **What is the Coupon View menu?** **Viewing coupons is a coupon lookup page for users where you can view coupons issued by the app and see which coupons have been used.** When an administrator issues a coupon to a user, the user needs a page where they can see the list of coupons they have received. The View Coupons menu allows users to see a list of coupons they have received and a list of coupons that have been redeemed. So if you're running a coupon-issuing app, you'll have to apply that menu in the app's creation, right? This function is available on page **MakerV3 screen-> STEP3 → Basic Feature→ View coupon page.** I'll show you how to apply the coupon lookup menu to the app and use it\~! ![](/files/KQTbsH6Z3f4nxytNXU8b) **Find out how to create and apply coupons!** The coupon must be registered by the administrator by first creating a coupon for use in the app in the manager screen, and then moving on to the app makerv3 to apply the coupon lookup page to the app. And in the manager screen of the app, the administrator can issue coupons to the user and process the usage. **STEP.1 Create a coupon** Manager page → Services → Coupon → Enter the coupon details to be issued by selecting the \[Add Coupon] button. **STEP.2 Issuing coupons** From the coupon management page → select the \[Send Coupon] button → 1) Select the recipient settings → 2) Select the member you want to send push → 3) Select \[Send Coupon] → 4) Push message Subject → 5) Push Message Content → 6) Register Image → 7) Select \[Send Coupon].​ **STEP.3 Processing coupon redemption** On the Coupon Management page, select 1) \[Use Coupon] button → 2) Enter Coupon Serial Number → 3) \[View and Use Coupon]. Alternatively, you can select the App Manager menu in the app to process coupon redemption. **☞** **\[ Go to the full process manual for creating and issuing coupons]** ### **1.** Apply the coupon lookup menu to the app ![](/files/rlTSL5nRizqJjLvCkEkj) On the MakerV3 screen. 1\)Go to STEP3 Page 2\)Select Menu or Create a new menu. Click on the \[+] button to add a new menu. 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Feature] from under the page design. 5\) Find the 'View coupon' page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*Even after applying, you can still see how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. ### **2. App launch screen** ![](/files/QOJrRefr2YLiLWZjPUg1) After launching the app, select the \[Check My Coupon] menu, and the coupon lookup page will open. When the app issues a coupon, the coupon you received appears in the list of available coupons. \*If there is no coupon issued, the message "Coupon does not exist" will be displayed. ![](/files/PaMeB71ItQ8msbSBEJBm) When you select a coupon from the coupon list, the window switches to full screen so you can see the coupon details in more detail. **- Check the coupons used** ![](/files/7fPVrMOh4fATr4oFFzJP) If the coupon you receive is used by the administrator, you can see that it has been used in the \[Used coupons] list. {% hint style="info" %} Have you checked how to use the Coupon menu? On the app makerv3 page, you can apply the Page Basic Feature - View Coupons menu to your app to see the coupons that users have received. **How to create coupons, issue them to users, and process them for use, please check the manual below for the whole process\~!!** **☞** **Go to Create and issue coupons** {% endhint %} **Related Articles** * [페이지 기능-관심글 보기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/viewfavorites/) * [페이지 기능-게시물 검색 기능](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/postsearch/) * [페이지 기능-회원가입, 로그인, 설정](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/join-login/) * [푸시, 웹뷰앱 초간단 앱제작방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/push-webview/) * [업데이트 유형별 앱 실행화면](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/update-type/) * [앱 업데이트 방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/app-update/) # Page Design - Share Your App Function **What is app sharing?** App sharing is a feature that allows you to share apps created with Swing2App to a variety of applications. You can use your app to share it with other users. You can share apps through various application paths installed on your phone, such as KakaoTalk, messages, email, etc. {% hint style="danger" %} **\*Precautions** -The free version of the app can only be shared on Android phones! (iPhone Free VersionApp Sharing X) -iPhone can't share the free version of the app, only apps released on the App Store. -When sharing an app, if the app is released to the App Store, or Play Store, go to the corresponding Store launch link (URL). For more information on how to download the app to share, please refer to the manual below! **☞****\[Go to the manual on how to download the app to share]** {% endhint %} *** ### **1.** Apply \[Share App] to your app ![](/files/spdS8XT6RqMMb5ifzpgg) On the MakerV3 screen. 1\)Go to STEP3 Page 2\)Select Menu or Create a new menu. Click on the \[+] button to add a new menu. 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Feature] from under the page design. 5\) Click on the \[Function] option-> Select \[Share App] function. Click on the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*Even after applying, you can still see how the page is applied to the app through the virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any additional settings, so please apply then as per your requirement. ### **2.** App launch screen: Share the app ![](/files/Xq0k2PBqA7v4vJzF2Ufw) If you select \[Share App] that you applied to the menu, the list of apps that can be shared will open. \*The app list does not look the same on all phones but will be displayed differently depending on the user's mobile phone device and model. \*The first window that opens displays the selective application, and if you select \[Share Other], you can see and select other applications. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EC%8A%A4%EC%9C%99%ED%8E%98%EC%9D%B4%EC%A7%80-%EC%95%B1%EA%B3%B5%EC%9C%A0%ED%95%98%EA%B8%B04.png) If you select \[Share Other], you can see a list of various applications. **1)Share apps with KakaoTalk – Install shared apps** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EC%B9%B4%EC%B9%B4%EC%98%A4%EC%95%B1%EA%B3%B5%EC%9C%A0.png) When sharing the app with KakaoTalk, please select the \[Read More] button in the chat window. A new window will pop up and you will be asked to select Run App. If the app is already installed on your phone, press the \[Launch App] button to go directly to the app. \*If you share with a user who has not installed the app, the user can download and install the app by pressing the \[Download App (APK)] button. \*If the app is released on the Play Store, please press the \[Install and launch the app] button. Go to the PlayStore launch link. **2) Email app sharing** In addition to sharing Katok, you can also share it by email. When you access the recipient's email, you'll receive an app-sharing email in your inbox. If you select the link, you will be taken to the app installation window as shown in the image above. The method of launching the app and installing the app is the same as the KakaoTalk sharing method described above, and you can launch the app and download the app according to the user's presence or absence of the app installation. ### **3.** Settings menu: Share the app ![](/files/9tF7oFxeG8EaSRSSkzR0) App sharing is also available in the settings menu which is set by default within the app without having to add the app sharing function separately on the swing page. After launching the app, you can use the Share App function in the → Settings menu. The setting is a page where you can set app basics, set notifications, and sign up, and the settings menu is created as the default settings when you create an app. Therefore, you can also use the app sharing function as a basic function in the settings menu. **And in addition to sharing apps, you can also share bulletin boards, posts, and images.** ### \[App sharing instructions - including app sharing, bulletin boards, and post sharing] ▶Android Phones The app you created in the free version can only be shared on Android phones. (Android Phone Android ↔ Phone) -If you share with a user who has not installed the app, you can download the app and install it by pressing the download button of the app (APK). -When you share with a user who has installed the app, simply press the button to launch the app and you will immediately go to the app. -If the app is released on the Play Store, you can go to the Play Store to download the app. ▶iPhone Apps created in the free version don't support sharing on iPhones. If your app is released on the App Store, iPhone users can also share it. (When sharing, you can go to the App Store and download the app) ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) **★ Share apps, share bulletin boards, and posts For the full process manual, please check out the manual below\~!** ☞ **\[Go to the manual on how to download the app to share]** ☞ **\[Go to the bulletin board and post sharing manual on how to use it]** # Page Design - App Introduction Page **What is an app introduction?** **The app introduction is a home screen style page provided by the swing page and is one of the menus that fills up the main home screen.** It can show you the app introduction, site address (URL), address, phone number, and email address, making it the most basic home screen configuration design. When you first build your app with Swing2App, If you are not sure about what to put on the home screen, go with the app introduction page which has a default setting to show users the home screen guidelines. In addition to the app introduction page, you can freely change and create various other menus – image pages, web templates, HTML editor pages, images, bulletin boards, web links, etc. \*Since the app introduction is the default sample page, we recommend that you change it to another menu. **Go to the HomeScreen editing Manual:** . swing2app. co.kr/ documentation/ v3manual/home/ ### **1.** Apply \[App Introduction Page] to your app ![](/files/dlJZMGgoB7y1Ly7OyP0R) On the MakerV3 screen. 1\)Go to STEP3 Page 2\)Select Menu or Create a new menu. Click on the \[+] button to add a new menu. \*The app introduction can also be applied to the HOME menu. 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select the \[Basic Feature]-> \[Page] option from under the page design. 5\) Click on the \[Function] option-> Select \[App Info] page. Click on the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any additional settings, so please apply additional settings if required. {% endhint %} ### **2.** App launch screen: Check the app introduction page ![](/files/tHdCzA3lh6hMLDVVXfBG) **This is the screen where the app introduction page is applied.** **Representative of the app icon image, the style is that the app introduction, the website link (URL) at the bottom, and the navigation buttons at the bottom are placed.** The app introduction is the home main screen that we provide by default to those who are creating apps with a Swing2App for the first time. Therefore, you do not have to apply the home screen as an 'Introduction to the App' and use it. You can modify your home screen with a variety of different menus to create. **▶ Please check the page you are moving to when selecting the App Introduction-Icon banner through the image that you are in.** ![](/files/je8s2cOv2z9Kx0cGlQFM) ### **03.** How to modify the app introduction menu and contents ![](/files/YRhHKEoaqHFRB2Xo1a5l) **\[How to modify the app introduction description and banner content]** You can modify the items on the app introduction page from the \[Advanced Settings] menu at the top of the app creation screen. 1\)Select the \[Advanced Settings] menu at the top of the app creation page 2\)Settings: App Service Information 3\)You can modify it by pressing the \[EDIT] button. 4\)After modification, press the \[Save] button and it will be reflected in the app. When you create your first app, you need to request that the app be created. When you make a modification back to an app you've created, it is automatically reflected in the app when you save it. ### **04.** App introduction content, how to delete buttons ![](/files/lPKhRVXTGISoMHwMi1H5) **Advanced Settings – In the App Service Information, press the \[Reset] button in the 'Phone number, email, site address, address, app description'** Press \[Reset] and then simply press the \[Save] button at the top to remove the navigation button. If you want the buttons to be visible again, you can press the \[EDIT] button on each setting value and enter the contents. ![](/files/TPoRMCR1spOiFM0DmMHS) On the app introduction screen, you can see that the navigation button at the bottom is missing\~! {% hint style="danger" %} **App introduction instructions** \*\*\*\* **1)If I modify the introductory text of the app and save it, will it not be reflected immediately?** App Introduction Title Phrase Modification will be reflected only if you save it on the first 1 modification and then press the \[App Creation] button to update it to the new version. After 1 modification, just save it and it will be automatically reflected in the app from then on. **2)When entering the site address, it is linked with the \[Share] icon button at the bottom and the site link address in the middle.** Therefore, if you enter the site address, the sharing button and the site address will be displayed together. If you delete it, it will be removed along with the share button and the site address. **3) The representative image of the app introduction page is displayed in conjunction with the app icon image. \*Separate modification and removal are not possible.** **4) When the first app was created, the home screen set the main screen to the 'About App' page.** It's a guideline-setting screen for first-time creators. Therefore, in addition to the app introduction page, the home screen can be modified with various menus. {% endhint %} *** *** # Page Design - Admin Chat Page **How to use the 1:1 chat between managers and app members \[Manager Chat]** It's a feature that allows app admins to talk to members who use the app. You can send and receive conversations in real-time, like KakaoTalk or Messenger, which can be useful if you need to communicate with a specific member. -App managers can select members to chat with. -App members can also talk to the manager from the chat room menu applied to the app. Please check the manual to find out how to use the admin chat (1:1 chat). *** ![](/files/UoyMFPQeu2lxBcmK5PEk) ### **1.** Apply admin chat to the app \* You need to apply the \[admin chat] page to the app first, so that both the user and the admin can chat, right? The admin chat function is provided in the app creation – step 3 – page basics of the page. ![](/files/4YYEinyAIA47FXSZCEM5) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Functions] - \[Page] in the page design. 5\) Find the 'Admin Chat' page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} > **Add a chat list feature too!** The chat list is a menu where you can check your chatting history. Chat lists must also be applied to the app so that you can still check your conversation history in the list window after the conversation ends. ![](/files/PVVPktsrcIMGiaR5Ruct) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Functions] - \[Page] in the page design. 5\) Find the 'Chat List' page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. ### **2.** App launch screen: Chat room screen ![](/files/UoyMFPQeu2lxBcmK5PEk) When you view the app launch screen, you receive messages entered by administrators in the chat room, and app members can send and receive text by typing in text. **How can app users (members) chat with administrators?** **Users can have a conversation by entering the chat menu in the app, and the conversation list can be viewed in the chat list.** Please check below how to chat!! {% hint style="success" %} **How can app users (members) chat with administrators?** Users can have a conversation by entering the chat menu in the app, and the conversation list can be viewed in the chat list. Please check below how to chat!! {% endhint %} ### **3.** How users can chat with the app manager ![](/files/PhBtzNwlIupTYwKvcZxs) As soon as you enter the chat room menu created above, a chat window will open. Users are free to enter messages (texts). ### ▶ Chat List ![](/files/OlZoQUNUGh1yQUCMghcf) If you want to chat with the manager again after a conversation, you can go into the 'Chat List'. You can check your conversation list. Here you can see the list of managers who have had the conversation. \*The chat list menu is also available on the swing page. If you use the admin chat feature, please add a chat list to the menu as well. ☞**See how to use the chat list** *** **How can admins chat with app members?** **Administrators can have a conversation by selecting members from the member lookup menu provided by the Swing web (app operation page).** Check out below how admins can chat with app members!! {% hint style="success" %} **How can admins chat with app members?** *** Administrators can have a conversation by selecting members from the member lookup menu provided by the swing web (app operation page). Check out below how admins can chat with app members!! {% endhint %} ### **4.** How admins can chat with app members Administrators can chat on the web (swing homepage) or use it in the app. *** **1) Move the member inquiry page** Swing Homepage App Maker Page → Push & Member → Member Inquiry ->Go to the menu. ![](/files/pUf4oM4jnIMgYxoeZEzv) **If you look at the member inquiry page, you can check the \[Dedicated Conversation] and \[Public Conversation] buttons.** **Select the member you want to talk to on the member lookup page, then select the Chat button and the chat will start!!** {% hint style="info" %} **Private conversation? What is a public conversation?** The conversation option doesn't matter much to app members. It's a chat option that managers can choose from. ▶ **Dedicated Conversations** Only the admin you're chatting with can see it. For other managers, chat pushes don't come in. ▶ **Have a public conversation** If you have multiple administrators, you can use them when you need to share your conversations. When you chat to have a public conversation, other managers are also pushed when the app member enters the chat message. {% endhint %} *** ![](/files/UawUWbQ7LM4nnk4oJa7t) Select the person you want to talk to, and then choose the Chat button at the top. **3) Move the chat list page: Chat window opens** ![](/files/AtFKEazQv5vH87V87kU8) When you choose to talk, you'll be taken to the chat list page. The chat window will open. Admins can enter text and chat with members in the chat room. ​ **\[Chat List Page]** ![](/files/IxNpdmF2AsEokhlUe1F7) ![](/files/YpHd6X5Xw5gXdwzsYylI) On the Chat List page, you can see a chat list of all the members you've previously chatted with. So if you need to talk to a member you've previously chatted with, you can continue the chat again by selecting the member from the chat list page. **\*For instructions on how to use the chat manager page, please refer to the corresponding manual.** **☞** **\[Go to the chat manager page to see how to use it]** > **Additional Information** If you want to talk back to a member you've previously chatted with in the app, please use the chat list. ![](/files/OlZoQUNUGh1yQUCMghcf) The chat list allows you to see a list of members and conversations you've already chatted with. You can start chatting by selecting the member you want to talk to again. **Administrators can chat on the web (swing homepage) or use it in the app.** The app administrator login allows the administrator to communicate with members in the app as well. ### **5.** Alarm Push Notification - Manager, Member When you chat, both the app manager – the app member can receive a push for chat message notifications. {% hint style="danger" %} **\*Instructions** \*\*\*\* **1. 1:1 chat is a manager chat, which is a chat feature between the manager and the app member.** It is available on the app and Swing2App Manager page (web). \*When using the app: \[Settings- App Manager Menu] After logging in, select the desired user in \[User Management] and chat \*Please proceed to the homepage using the method mentioned above. **2. Please apply the chat menu with the operator (1:1 chat) as \[Manager Chat] on the → page of \*App MakerV3 Page → STEP3.** **3. You can also use \[Group Chat], where you can talk to the administrator and several users.** To learn how to use Group Chat, please check the manual below! **☞**[ ](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/appmanage/board/groupchat/)**\[View Group Chat How-to Manual]** {% endhint %} *** *** # Page Design - Chat List Page **1:1 Chat – Chat List How-to Manual** Chat List is a feature available to users and administrators after a 1:1 chat, and it is a menu where you can check the chatting history. Due to the nature of the app, if it is run by multiple app managers (deputy administrators), the user can chat with multiple administrators. Users can check the admin chat list in the chat list and select the desired manager to have a conversation. Admins can also check the list of users they've chatted with to see their conversation history and re-establish the conversation. ![](/files/VyBYZl4moBpUuHMokbqq) ### \*\*1.\*\*What is a chat list? ![](/files/MmdvBXCN0raK8Yp3zxpb) \- As shown in the image above, the chat list is divided into separate chats for each user or administrator who they talked to. \- So when a user exits a chat and then goes into \[Chat List], they can double-check the list of conversations they have had. \- You can choose the person you want to talk to and chat. **\*Please check the manual below to learn how to apply admin chat.** **☞** **See how to use the admin chat** ### **2.**\[Chat List] Applying it to the app ![](/files/m2wXKqeUTaDYYgxIwUHd) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Functions] - \[Page] in the page design. 5\) Find the 'Chat List' page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. \*For apps created before 2019.3.8, the \[Chat List] menu is not visible on the swing page. Please use it after updating. {% endhint %} ### \*\*3.\*\*Chat List app launch screen ![](/files/OlZoQUNUGh1yQUCMghcf) In the app menu, select – Chat list, and you'll see a list of users chatting with your manager, as shown in the image above. {% hint style="success" %} **\*How to use it** **\*\*\*\*** After the manager chat, the user can re-enter the chat room and see the list of chats. The chat room was not admin-separated because there was no distinction, and all the admins were shown in the integration. **\*Chat rooms will only show the admin public conversation list, not the administrator-only conversation list.** Therefore, it is difficult for the user to determine which manager they have been chatting with, and they want to ask the manager they were chatting with again, but they couldn't choose it, which was a lot of inconvenience. {% endhint %} *** ![](/files/dWrZbEq36fEZDHs03vJJ) However!! Now you can use \[Chat List] to see a list of each admin you have talked to.. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2019/03/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2019_03_12_17_14_21_497.gif) \*If you have chatted with several managers and would like to contact the specific manager who last exchanged chats, you can start the chat by selecting that specific manager from the chat list. Thus, the user can have a conversation at any time by checking the list of managers who want to chat. \* In the chat list, \[Integrated Manager Chat] can check the chat history of the 'public conversation' instead of the 'dedicated conversation' when the administrator chats. {% hint style="danger" %} **Instructions** 1\)The chat list function will be applied from the app created from 03/08/2019. (Those who have previously built the app won't see the chat list.) For previously created apps, please press \[Request to Create App] to update the app to the new version. After the update, in the page menu - look at the swing page and you will see that \[Chat List] has been added! 2\) If you want to show the list by admin in the chat list, the administrator must use it as a dedicated chat. If you chat in a public chat, the administrators are not separated, and they are shown together as an integrated manager chat. 3\) Group chats are not applicable. Only applicable in 1:1 admin chat 4\)The chat list is not a function for administrators, but for ordinary users who use the app. We hope you find it useful to make it easier for users to use. {% endhint %} *** # Page Design - Surveys Page **What is a survey?** Survey management is a feature that allows you to conduct surveys of users who use the app. Objective surveys can be conducted with feedback from users, and surveys can be conducted for various purposes, such as satisfaction surveys, promotional surveys, etc. The Swing2App provides a tool for surveying, so you can create a questionnaire simply by entering the question and answer questions.. ### \*\*1.\*\*Create a survey First and foremost, create a survey on the app operation page. *** **1. Move the Survey Management menu** ![](/files/EzDL5EjHrNDh8Twx38cv) 1\) App Manager Page → Service Management → Survey Management Go to the menu. 2\) Select the Add Survey button. **2. Enter basic information** ![](/files/aMGvcfi1n3LFeiyIL8oV) On the Survey Management page, please enter the basic information required for the survey\~!! \* Items marked are mandatory items. **1)Survey Name: Enter the title of the survey you want to conduct.** **2) Set a Duration: A period is a period that enters the duration during which you want to conduct the survey, and specifies the start and end dates as dates and times.** You can select the calendar icon or clock icon to set up an event. **3)Add New Survey Items: Survey item management is done by clicking the \[Add New Survey Item] button on the right by entering what you want to enter the questionnaire.** +Surveys can be set to push Select +Push Settings, select the sender and enter the title, content, and image to send the push. +If you need to notify a large number of users of your survey as an announcement, it's a good idea to use push. **3. Enter Survey Entries** ![](/files/C8OnPdB1dlGtzU2xIkXE) **1) Questions:** Enter the questions you want to fill out the questionnaire. \*Select HTML Editor or Simple Editor If you have a variety of optional features, such as font settings, text colors, and attaching images/files/links, please select the HTML Editor and enter your questions. Simple Editor does not have access to the Writing Options feature **2) Use as a guide page:** You can use a guide page for the purpose of writing a notice rather than a page that answers questions. We will explain in detail how to use it below. **3) Required:** Whether it is required or not is the item that selects whether the question is a mandatory question to be answered or whether it is not allowed to be answered. So if you need to answer a required answer, please check the 'Required Answers' section. **4) Answer Type:** The answer type is a single choice that users can choose only one choice when choosing an answer; Multiple selectable multiple selections, Select and check if this is a descriptive answer that needs to be entered in writing. \=> The input method for each type of answer will be explained below! **5) Create a single choice:** For questionnaires where you select a view and fill in the answers, you can add items by clicking the 'Create Answer' icon. **6) Save:** When all the inputs are done, press Save. **4. Complete the registration of the questionnaire** ![](/files/JZb8AdglXOmCcp9mXD5x) When you have finished entering the questionnaire preferences and contents, press 'Save'. ![](/files/j6vX4deALgiqM9vmUcVn) If you look at the survey management page, you can see the completed questionnaire\~! ### **2.** \[Survey] – Apply it to your app Once you've created all the surveys in your app, you should be able to apply them to your app and run the actual surveys in your app, right? We'll show you how to apply the survey menu to the app! ![](/files/oHU2vTP3w9MwgRuxAaDy) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Functions] - \[Page] in the page design. 5\) Find the 'Survey' page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} ### **STEP.3** App launch screen: Check the survey page Once you've even applied the app, let's see how the survey runs in the actual app! ![](/files/0Aq7rhRVfK4svFXgUlx6) When you launch the app again after you've finished entering the survey, the entered survey will appear. Selecting the item takes you to the survey. ### **STEP.4** View Survey Results & Manage Surveys You also need to know how to view and manage your survey results, right? App Manager Page → Service Management → Survey Management Go to the menu. ![](/files/pXgltSNTer6XazVCcZKh) In the Survey Management menu, you can manage ongoing and closed surveys. You can also manage the members who participated in the survey. **\*If you select the number of participants, you can check the member information that participated in the survey, and if you select a member, you can check the survey results.** *** ![](/files/mnfJvIMKFE3UKFpa1DqH) If you select the \[download] button, you can also download the survey result sheet to an Excel file. ​ ![](/files/XCj8p0XhmUHaeadD9HlH) When you select a member, you will be able to see a list of survey answers entered by that member. ![](/files/bevpYDnncleT6SG3XIc2) **You can add new polls, close surveys, and edit \&delete all features.** **- Select the 'Add Survey'** button to add a new questionnaire in addition to the existing questionnaire. **-You can edit the question by selecting the 'Edit' button,** or you can delete the survey by selecting the 'Delete' button.
[Organize how to use the survey menu] **설문조사 만들기, 앱에서 설문 참여하기 상세 내용은 아래 매뉴얼을 꼭\~ 확인해주세요!** **☞** [**\[설문조사 이용방법- 등록, 관리 및 앱실행화면\]**](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/appmanage/service/survey/) **▶ 설문조사지 만들기** [앱운영 페이지 → 서비스관리 →설문관리](http://www.swing2app.co.kr/view/survey) → \[설문 추가] 버튼을 선택 → 설문조사명, 설문기간 설정 후 → \[새 설문항목 추가] 버튼을 눌러서 질문 및 답변 항목을 입력해주시면 됩니다. **▶설문지 앱에 적용하는 방법** 만들어진 설문지는 앱에 적용해주세요. 앱제작 페이지 → 페이지메뉴 → 메뉴추가 →메뉴이름 →\[스윙 페이지] 불러오기 → ‘설문조사’ 선택 적용 후 저장 **▶앱에서 설문 참여하기** 앱을 실행 한뒤 설문조사에 참여할 수 있습니다. 적용된 메뉴를 선택한 뒤 화면을 터치하면 설문에 참여할 수 있어요. \*설문조사는 앱에 가입된 회원 – 사용자 등급부터 이용할 수 있어요. 손님은 이용할 수 없으니 이용시 참고 부탁드려요. **▶사용자들이 입력한 설문 결과 확인하기** 앱운영 페이지 → 서비스관리 →설문관리→참여 인원에서 ‘숫자’ 선택 → ‘사용자’를 선택하면 설문 결과를 확인할 수 있습니다.
*** # Page Design - View My Posts Page **What is the View My Posts Page?** The View My Posts feature shows you the posts you've written in the app, a page where you can see your list of posts at once. We will tell you how to use the 'View My Article' provided by the basic function of the page. Check out the how-to manual on how to apply the View My Posts feature to your app and how it will look in the app. ### **1.** How to apply the View My Posts page to the app ![](/files/TAA1Vggw8jGin6vvY1Ja) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Functions] - \[Page] in the page design. 5\) Find the 'View My Articles' page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. \*If you created your app before 2019.11.30, please recreate your app with the new version first! (Update required) In previous versions, I don't see the View My Posts feature. So, after you create a new one, please apply the View My Posts feature on the app creation page. {% endhint %} ### **2.** App launch screen Go to the View My Posts menu applied to the app and you'll be able to see all the posts you've written. ![](/files/mC9RQKmbEIe2c1jrqIdn) You must be logged in as the user who wrote the article. Not available to guests. If you select View My Posts applied to your app, you can see all the posts that the user has written in the app. {% hint style="danger" %} **Instructions** 1\) View My Posts is only available to users who are logged in after registering for membership in the app. (Not available to guests.) 2\) Please check the logged in user account. You must be logged in as the same user to see the list of articles you've written. 3\) View My Posts is not applicable to the app home screen. Applicable to menus only. 4\) The View My Posts board is displayed in the Timeline UI style. The style (UI) displayed cannot be modified. 5\) If you have created an app before 2019.11.30, an app update is required to use the feature. {% endhint %} *** **Related Articles** * [페이지기능 – 설문조사](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/survey/) * [페이지기능 – 채팅목록](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/chat-list/) * [페이지기능 – 관리자 채팅](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/adminchat/) * [페이지기능 – 앱소개](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/intro/) * [페이지기능 – 앱공유하기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/appshare/) * [페이지 기능-쿠폰조회하기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/couponview/) # Page Design - Attendance Check Page **What is an attendance check?** **It's a menu that can be used as a community and event, similar to a bulletin board, but with differences in that it has an attendance comment function and a closing function!** Therefore, the attendance check is available from the service management menu and not from the bulletin board. Various attendance check events can engage app members. Check the manual to find out how to apply the attendance check page to the app. ### \*\*1.\*\*Register for attendance check Please check the registration method for attendance check through the manual below. You can create an attendance check page first, and then apply it to your app. Attendance check registration can be made in App Manager – Service Management. Also, please check the detailed manual. ![](/files/wmEhrFZa4zIdZUsA6Se4) {% embed url="" %} ### \*\*2.\*\*Apply the attendance check menu to the app Once the attendance check registration is complete, you will need to apply it to the app, right? App Creation – On the MakerV3 screen, go to the STEP3 page, we'll apply attendance checks to the app! ![](/files/twIZ0ZDe0hvZCwofmb57) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\) Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Basic Functions] - \[Page] in the page design. 5\) Find the 'Attendance Check' page and select the \[Apply] button. (Hover the mouse cursor over the page and the Apply button opens) 6\) Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} **\*Quick Menu** You can go directly from the app creation to the attendance check page. ![](/files/uLFH9ovbM4i88QqVGR5N) Select the \[Manage] button on the attendance check page → Select the \[Manage attendance check] button will take you to the app-operated attendance check page. If you need to register a new attendance check or make any corrections, you can manage it by going directly from the App Maker. ### **3.** App launch screen – check attendance Let's launch the app and see how the attendance check is executed in the app! ![](/files/P4I9XKbc9Zzqc1waC8Zh) If you check the attendance check post, you can check the content and image of the post that you entered when you registered for the attendance check. ![](/files/f3qP4Est0uwBfKGtOddz) You can participate by commenting on \[Join Attendance Check Event] at the bottom of the post. **▶Attendance check event closed** ![](/files/WRYBsd6cZBJ3XEXhyGFn) When you close an event, the app will also display a window called 'Closed Event'. **▶ Check the app manager dashboard** ![](/files/KCxR5IFG57BEH48oBOnO) App operators can check the comments on attendance check posts on the App Manager Dashboard – Attendance Check page. \*You can check the confirmation X in the application, and the app operation page in the Swing2App homepage. Once you have selected your username, you will be able to view your membership information. *** # Page Design- Web Link **Link Wizard: How to apply your Internet address, phone number, text, or email address** The link feature provided by Swing2App allows you to apply a generic website URL and phone number, text message number, and email address. Creating an App – Step 3 Page – Page Features: We'll show you how to use links. ### \*\*1.\*\*Apply an Internet address (site URL) link ![](/files/FI3PIrVCyheeNcroVrpC) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\)Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Link] from the page design. 5\) Select \[Internet Address]. 6\)Select Window Opening: Select \*\*'Open in New Window'\*\*. 7\)Website Address: Enter your URL address. Please include a hyperlink (http\://) 8\) Select the \[Apply URL] button. 9\)Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} * [x] **What are \[Open in New], \[Open as New App], and why do I need them?** Websites are sometimes set up to prevent web links from being retrieved from the outside because of the security of each site. Sites that are prohibited from embedding may result in an app refusing to connect or causing an error when you enter a link. **☞ An optional feature that comes up to solve this problem is 'Open in a new window'.** **It's not a style of opening links within the app, it's about popping up a new window in the app so that the site can open without problems!!** ![](/files/i1BdK9zc2saG7ZQrNkfe) The same goes for opening it as a new app. What makes it different from the view in a new window is the structure in which the app is launched and the link is opened. **There are links that run the app. For example, Instagram, Facebook, YouTube, Kakao, etc.** This will generate a link address, but for web addresses that are opened using the original app, please select "Open as a new app" **\*Important\*** When linking YouTube videos and channel links, you must select 'Open as external app'. \_ Google Policy Content **Therefore, when using a web link, be sure to check 'popup' in a new window.** **Even websites that are not secured should be selected to view in a new window so that you can use them more reliably in the app.** *** #### ▶ App launch screen - Apply Internet address Screen ![](/files/o958rgYkrtpJa0CgZNHD) In the Link Wizard, I linked the 'Internet address' and launched the app. When you select the WebLink menu, you will be taken to the website page that has been applied. *** **I'll launch the app to see how the view in a new window and the view in the external app are different!** ▶ **Open in a new window** ![](/files/Ir0WzWb7m9RGc8fSZH5T) I've linked the URL of the homepage. Selecting the menu takes you to a new webpage and launches the site. It's a concept that opens a new Internet window. Press the screen X button or the back button to return to the app. *** ▶ **Open as a new app** ![](/files/ChTZiIrLos1Ytg1zqZJ0) The YouTube link was linked to "View as an external app." As the YouTube app launches, you will be taken to the linked video link. ### **2.** Apply your phone number ![](/files/7CEA8lqqO8Zq94lTDTE5) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\)Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Link] from the page design. 5\) Select \[Dial a phone number]. 6\) Please enter the recipient's phone number. \*Enter the number that will take you to your physical phone. \*Please enter only the number ' – ' Please do not enter special characters!! 7\) Select the \[Apply URL] button. 8\)Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app. {% endhint %} ▶ **App launch screen - Apply phone number screen** ![](/files/dtVPVuXxEFsHvUxmoYS5) In the link wizard, I connected the 'phone number' and launched the app. When you select the Make a call menu, the phone is connected to the number you applied. ### **3.** Apply a text message number ![](/files/pVMqo48TSxCA5Oi3eKWa) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\)Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Link] from the page design. 5\)Select \[Send Text Message]. 6\)Enter the SMS outgoing phone number. \*Enter a number where you can receive actual text messages. \*Please enter only the number ' – ' Please do not enter special characters!! \*Entering SMS content is optional. 7\) Select the \[Apply URL] button. 8\)Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app.. {% endhint %} ▶ **App launch screen - Apply text message number screen** ![](/files/XO5l94SFIXWaSRA9dMjE) In the Link Wizard, I linked the 'text message number' and launched the app. When you select the Send Text menu, you can send a text message to the number that is applied. For the number, please enter your mobile phone number to receive the actual texts! ### **4.** Apply your email address ![](/files/BwB5VikrukEq8mkowZ3i) Move the app creation screen 1\)STEP3 Go to the page step. 2\)Create a new menu. (+ Select the shape button to add a menu) 3\)Enter the menu name 4\) Select \[Link] from the page design. 5\)Select \[Send Email]. 6\)Enter the recipient's email address. \*Title content is optional. 7\) Select the \[Apply URL] button. 8\)Press the \[Save] button at the top of the screen to apply it to the app. {% hint style="info" %} \*If you select the Preview button, you can check how the page will look with a web preview (virtual machine). \*After applying a page, you can also check how the page is applied to the app through a virtual machine. \*Menu icon during the production phase, menu settings are not required. In the manual, we proceeded without any input, and please apply additional if necessary when creating the app.. {% endhint %} \ ▶**App launch screen - Apply Email Address screen** ![](/files/29xV7lp0Ng6aJ1pbS7kN) In the link wizard, I linked my 'email address' and launched the app. When selecting the Send Email menu, you can send mail to the applied email. **\*On the user's phone, the mail app connected to that phone will be launched to send mail.** Example) If Google mail is linked, send it after running gmail app / Send it after running Outlook mail when Outlook is linked, etc. It comes from an email set up for each user's phone. *** {% hint style="danger" %} **\*Link function important guide** **\*\*\*\*** 1.The link function cannot be applied to the home screen (HOME menu). **Please apply the link function to menus only**. The home screen is **not recommended because the web link 'View in a new window' does not apply.** It won't open in a new window, so as we mentioned earlier, we can't fix it if you have security at stake. If a security program such as payment is activated, it will not be able to be used normally within the app. So make sure you don't use a web link on your home screen! In in-app categories except for the home screen, you can launch view as a new window or view as an external app. 2.Even if you apply other web links, there are links that do not apply normally to the menu, or that the site connection is not successful. **1) Shared web link provided by Google Drive with only certain permissions available** **2) Web links that are only available within a specific company (links with external web server shield)** **3)Privacy websites that prohibit other external embeddings** These sites will not work properly if you link to the app if you get an error or if you see it. Please refer to the usage. {% endhint %} *** *** # STEP4 Complete App Creation
STEP4 Complete App Creation
When you're done building in the Swing-to-App App Maker, choose to build your app so that you can download it. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/%EC%95%B1%EC%A0%9C%EC%9E%91%ED%95%98%EA%B8%B0.png) 1\) Select the \[Save] button \*Finally, save all the contents. 2\) Select the \[Create App] button. 3\)Select \[Create] in the Update Options window. \*Update type, display options can be made as checked. Since this is your first time building an app (there is nothing to update), no matter how you apply it, it won't affect your production. If you subsequently modify the app and proceed with the update, please select the form you want. {% hint style="info" %} \- Creating an app doesn't cost anything. After production, you can come back into the maker screen to modify and update the app. \- A file (APK) is created that requires authoring to download the app. -You can download and install the APK file to your Android phone. You can check the apps you created by installing them directly on your phone. \*App installation can only be done on Android phones. iPhone not available \- If you need to modify it after production, please go back to App Creation and do the same. If an update is required, please select the \[Update App] button to update the app version to use it. {% endhint %} ## Check your app's creation history If you click Create App on the App Creation page, you will be immediately taken to the App History page on the App Operations page. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/06/%EC%95%B1%EC%A0%9C%EC%9E%91%EC%99%84%EB%A3%8C_%EC%A7%84%ED%96%89%EC%83%81%ED%83%9C1.png) If you check the status of each platform, is it still marked as 'Pending Production Order'? You can check the progress of your app's creation on that screen. Please be patient because it will be made within 5 minutes after pressing the app creation request \~! ​ ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/06/%EC%95%B1%EC%A0%9C%EC%9E%91%EC%99%84%EB%A3%8C_%EC%A7%84%ED%96%89%EC%83%81%ED%83%9C2.png) In less than 1 minute while I was waiting for the production, a \[Swing Preview] pop-up window popped up. It's a feature that allows you to preview the app through a swing preview before it is created. \*View on the web: Select the \[Watch directly on the web] button to preview apps created on virtual machines on the web. \*Preview to your phone: After downloading the official Swing-to-App app – App Preview menu – log in with your swing account or scan the QR code shown in the pop-up window and you can preview the app on your phone! (It's a preview, not a down) ​ ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2022/06/%EC%95%B1%EC%A0%9C%EC%9E%91%EC%99%84%EB%A3%8C_%EC%A7%84%ED%96%89%EC%83%81%ED%83%9C3.png) After a while, you'll notice that the platform-specific status has changed to "App Creation Complete." With App Preview, you can download the app from your Android phone. **See how to install apps created using app preview on your phone** **Or, when the production is complete, the APK file (the file that you can download the app from) will be sent to you via Swing2App subscription email.** **You can also open the mailbox on your phone to download and install the APK file directly.** \*APK The file will not be opened on your PC, so be sure to check it on your phone. \*APK file installation can only be installed on Android phones. (iPhones are not supported.) **​** **See how to install apps created using app preview on your phone** **Related Articles** * Push, Webview app ultra-simple app creation method * App launch screen by update type * How to update an app * Create an app addition * How to create an app home screen * [STEP3 ](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/)Page # How to create an additional app ### How to create an additional app Swing2App lets you create and manage multiple apps in one account! **+Free swing2app users can create up to 3 apps in one account** **+Paid swing2app users can create up to 10 apps in one account.** We'll show you how to create additional new apps in your account. *** ## \*\*\*\* **1.** PC Version – Create additional apps **First, let's access the PC version of the Swing2App homepage and add the app\~**
**After logging in to the Swing2App homepage, go to the \[MakerV3] screen.** There is a button that looks like **\[+]** at the top of the App Maker screen. You can use this button to create a new app. After you'll click on this button, **the App Creation Wizard pop-up window appears.** After you select a new app style (type), the app makerV3 screen will pop up and you can proceed with the app creation step by step. *** ## \*\*\*\* **2.** Mobile version – Create additional apps **Did you know, In addition to the PC version of the site, the Swing2App can also be used on mobile to create an app!** **We'll also show you how to use \[Add App] to create a new app on your mobile.** ![](/files/fIV1nd0srFQJ4xgh0Cjd) Accessed the Swing2App site on my mobile and it will take you to the app manager page. On mobile, you **can create additional apps by pressing the + button next to the app name.** When you click on the add button, **the \[App Creation Wizard]** window will pop up just like the PC version. The rest of the app production method is the same. *** ## \*\*\*\* **3.** See the list of apps you've created **Where can I find a list of apps created by Swing2App as well as newly added apps?**
**We've provided a list of apps in the upper-left corner of the Swing2App MakerV3 dashboard.** Click on the drop-down arrow button with the mouse to open a list of apps. You can see all apps created by you in your account. To switch from one app to another, simply select the app from the list and it will take you to its app creation screen. ### **▶**Manage your apps
**Go to App Manager Page-> My Menu-> Manage apps** option for information on all of your apps. On the Manage Apps page, you can uninstall (delete) apps, change the order of apps, check expiration dates, and view simple information such as the number of members. *** # How to update an app **How to update your app: Guide to updating your created app** In Swing2App, you can freely modify and update the app design, content, etc for unlimited times. **-When modifying the app basic information and design theme, you can create the app in a new version by clicking on the \[Save] button, and then clicking on the \[Update App] button.** After you click on the \[Update App] button, you can choose the update type and select you you want to show an update notification. **-Page menu and app manager contents can be automatically reflected in the app even if you just save it.**
### How to update an app **★ In Swing2App, you can modify and update your apps unlimited times!!** If you modify the page menu content on the app maker page, just press the \[Save] button and it will be reflected directly in the app. When modifying the app basic information and design theme content, you must update the app to the new version by pressing the \[Update App] button. → When requesting the creation of an app, please select 'App Update Type' and 'Show Updates option' to proceed with the update. You will be able to see modified content after confirming the update requirement message within the app. ### Swing2App App Update Important Content **\*This is important, so please check it first!!** **1.Step 3, Page Menu during the app creation phase to modify the contents and use all the features of the app operation.** → just press the Save button and it will be automatically reflected in the app and you will not have to re-create the app. **2. Step 2 during the app creation phase \[design theme] – Change prototype, change skin color** → Press the \[Update App] button to recreate it. → Apps not released on Store \*Update Type: Select Soft Update. Select Hard Update if your app is released on the Play Store, App Store, etc. (see below) → Users whose apps have been released to the Play Store, App Store, etc. will need to update the new version of the app within the Store after the new version of the app is created. ★ \[Soft Update] is displayed when the app is produced 3 or more times. Only 1 to 3 times can be updated hard. **3. Step 1 of the app creation phase \[Basic Information] – Change the app name, standby screen image, icon image** → Press the \[Update App] button to recreate your app. \*Update Type: Select Hard Update → Users whose apps have been released to the Play Store, App Store, etc. will need to update the new version of the app within the Store after the new version of the app is created. ### Play Store, App Store Update Guide **1.If you need a Store Update** \=> App Basics, Design Themes If you modify the app name, icons, standby image, and design theme, you will need to make the Hard update and then update the newly created version of the app to the Store. \=>If you modify the Store information other than your app (store launch app name, app description, screenshot image, etc.), you will still need a Store update. **2.All app operation functions and page menus do not need updating.** Menu and content modifications and registrations are all automatically reflected in the app as long as you save them. **\*Important\* Please check when updating apps released on the Play Store and App Store!** **The type of update provided by the Swing2App app: Soft updates are not the official update method provided by Google.** **Users who have had their app released on the Play Store are encouraged to proceed with a hard update → without using a soft update and then update the new version of the app within the Store** When making a soft update, you can receive sanctions such as the deletion of apps according to the rules of the Play Store and App Store. Swing2App does not take responsibility for this option, so be sure to check the contents before proceeding. If you have not launched your app on the store and you are a free user, in that case, you can proceed with the soft update. *** ## App update type, display options *** ### **1.** Update Type
**1) Hard Update** A hard update is **a type of update that you download by reinstalling the updated app.** **\*Hard updates can be selected when modifying the app basics in Step 1.** **2) Soft Update** The Soft update does not require you to reinstall the app, it is an updated style that is automatically downloaded within the app. **\*Soft update can be used to modify the design theme in step 2, and when modifying the basic information of the app in step 1, you must choose Hard Update.** **\*For those who have the app released on the Play Store, please select Hard Update (App Reinstallation) instead of soft when modifying the design theme!** *** ### **2.** Show Updates option
The \[Update message option] is for how you want users to see updates. **If you need want to make updating the app mandatory before user can use the app, select the 'Required update' option.** **If you want to make an update optional, then select the 'Recommended update' option.** **1) Recommended Updates** Ask the user if they want to update, and only the user who selects OK will proceed with the update. (Optional update) **2) Required Updates** Forces the update without the user’s selection\*\*.\*\* **3) Don't show updates** Disable the update notification window. (You can set it up when you are doing app testing, etc.) *** ### \*\*3.\*\*App launch screen: Update type Depending on the type of update, let's see how the update works in the actual app. #### **1)**Soft Updates & **Recommended Updates** ![](/files/ySozmdiIOHLWX2OIVFmv) In this type of update, the message window will **pop up asking users if they want to update the app.** **The user must select 'OK' for the update to proceed.** Because the recommendation is for the update to progress by the user, if you **select 'Cancel', the update will not proceed.** For soft updates, you don't have to reinstall the app, update will be **downloaded from within the app and will be updated automatically.** **2)**\*\* \*\***Soft Updates & Required Updates** ![](/files/QRv09aLh8JfUJUEO9SSx) Because it's a soft update, you **don't have to reinstall the app, it's downloaded from within the app and gets auto-updated.** When selecting the display **option as 'Required',** **a pop-up will appear to inform the user that an update is taking place.** *** **3)Hard Update & Recommended Updates** ![](/files/AmklLwK2aUTureM4qAlF) **Hard update, on the recommended selection, a message window will pop up asking if you want to do the → update, and the user will have to select 'OK' before the update will proceed.** If you **choose to 'Cancel'** because it is optional, the update will not proceed. In case of a hard update, unlike software\*\*, it moves to the mobile phone device and installs the new version of the app again.\*\* It will install the update of the existing application and install it again by overwriting it with the new version of the app. **\[Reinstall Progress]** ![](/files/O7tnD5NOfRRJdcPphdb6) *** **4)**\*\* \*\***Hard Updates & Required Updates** ![](/files/hKByPfpmHnhJqRt6MnHM) Hard Update, if you choose Required, **the update will proceed immediately if you click OK.** The same hard update will **go to your phone device and reinstall the new version of the app.** It will install the update of the existing application and install it again by overwriting it with the new version of the app. **\[Reinstall Progress]** ![](/files/2GTJVSHuECIyf1UCy6x3) ### \[Instructions] You can freely edit the app created by Swing-to-App even after making the app. **Page menu steps – Contents such as menu modification and content registration are automatically reflected in the app by simply pressing \[Save], so you do not need to update them separately.** **In addition, the various functions provided by the Manager page can be applied and immediately reflected in the app.** **- What needs to be updated?** **\*App Basics – Modify app name, icon, standby screen image** **\*Design Themes - Prototypes and skin color modifications require app updates.** Therefore, press the \[Update App] button to recreate the app in a new version. The modifications are reflected accordingly when you are updated to a newly created version. **\*Important\***\*\* Soft updates are not officially provided by Apple and Google.\*\* Therefore, **users who have released an app to the Play Store or the App Store are advised not to use the soft update, but to proceed with the → Hard Update, and then update the newly created version of the app to the Store.** When making a soft update, you can receive sanctions such as the deletion of apps according to the rules of the Play Store and App Store. The Swing2App does not take responsibility for this option, so be sure to check the contents before proceeding. # App launch screen by update type ### App launch screen depending on the update type Depending on the type of update, let's see how the update works in the actual app. {% hint style="info" %} **\*The app launch screen we show you is an app that has not been released in the Store.** **\*\*If your app has been released on the Play Store or App Store, you will need to make the hard update and re-upload the newly created version on the store.** **Apps downloaded from the Store must be updated through the Store.** **\*Users will not receive the update if you will only update the app to a new version, without re-upload the newly created version on the store.** {% endhint %} *** ### **1)** Soft Updates & Recommended Updates. ![](/files/7DpmKkVgV4Hk4qKoCDAr) In this type of update, the message window will **pop up asking users if they want to update the app.** **The user must select 'OK' for the update to proceed.** Because the recommendation is for the update to progress by the user, if you **select 'Cancel', the update will not proceed.** For soft updates, you don't have to reinstall the app, update will be **downloaded from within the app and will be updated automatically.** *** ### **2)** Soft Updates & Required Updates. ![](/files/DE7jifUBJvwzTjQZPSss) Because it's a soft update, you **don't have to reinstall the app, it's downloaded from within the app and gets auto-updated.** When selecting the display **option as 'Required',** **a pop-up will appear to inform the user that an update is taking place.** **When you select 'OK', the in-app update will take place immediately.** *** ### \*\*3)\*\*Hard Update & Recommended Updates. ![](/files/b4mTpGSSCGK9koWQJvcv) **Hard update, on the recommended selection, a message window will pop up asking if you want to do the → update, and the user will have to select 'OK' before the update will proceed.** If you **choose to 'Cancel'** because it is optional, the update will not proceed. In case of a hard update, unlike software\*\*, it moves to the mobile phone device and installs the new version of the app again.\*\* It will install the update of the existing application and install it again by overwriting it with the new version of the app. **\[Reinstall Progress]** ![](/files/O7tnD5NOfRRJdcPphdb6) ### **4)** Hard Updates & Required Updates. ![](/files/Mr4agDtX4pEiDhBeiBii) Hard Update, if you choose Required, **the update will proceed immediately if you click OK.** The same hard update will **go to your phone device and reinstall the new version of the app.** It will install the update of the existing application and install it again by overwriting it with the new version of the app. **\[Reinstall Progress]** ![](/files/2GTJVSHuECIyf1UCy6x3) ### \[Instructions] You can freely edit the app created by Swing-to-App even after making the app. **Page menu steps – Contents such as menu modification and content registration are automatically reflected in the app by simply pressing \[Save], so you do not need to update them separately.** **In addition, the various functions provided by the Manager page can be applied and immediately reflected in the app.** **- What needs to be updated?** **\*App Basics – Modify app name, icon, standby screen image** **\*Design Themes - Prototypes and skin color modifications require app updates.** Therefore, press the \[Update App] button to recreate the app in a new version. The modifications are reflected accordingly when you are updated to a newly created version. **\*Important\***\*\* Soft updates are not officially provided by Apple and Google.\*\* Therefore, **users who have released an app to the Play Store or the App Store are advised not to use the soft update, but to proceed with the → Hard Update, and then update the newly created version of the app to the Store.** When making a soft update, you can receive sanctions such as the deletion of apps according to the rules of the Play Store and App Store. The Swing2App does not take responsibility for this option, so be sure to check the contents before proceeding. **Related Articles** * [앱 업데이트 방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/app-update/) * [STEP4 앱제작하기](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/appcreation/) * [앱 추가 제작](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/app-add/) * [앱 홈화면 제작방법](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/home/) * [STEP3 페이지](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step3-page/) * [STEP2 디자인](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/documentation/v3manual/step2-design/) # App Update *** ## **1. App Update**
1\)Go to the 'Maker' screen.
2\)Click the **\[App Update]** button on the top right. 3\)Check the "No Update Message" and click **\[Make]**. For Push Apps: Select **"No Update Message"**. 📢For **General Prototype Apps**:
-Update Type: Select **"Hard Update (App Re-install)"**. -Update Message Option: Select **"No Update Message"**. *** ## **2.App Production Completed**
After starting the update, go to [**Manager> Manage Version> Product History**](https://www.swing2app.com/view/app_work_history)**.** Once you proceed with production, the app will be rebuilt as a new version. * General prototype apps: Built within 5 minutes * WebView and push apps: Built within 10 minutes For those submitting an upload request, the “Upload Request” button will be activated once the production is complete.\ Please click the button at that time and submit the request form. For paid apps (apps with a valid subscription), the AAB file can be downloaded from the App Production History page. App creation may take up to 10 minutes. Once completed, the '**Get AAB File'** button will be activated. Download the AAB file and proceed to the Google Play Console. # App production manual(V2) This manual is about how to create Swing2App Steps for App production – Please select the sub-category such as App Basic Information, Design Theme, Page Menu etc. # App basics Manual step for app basic information. Please select a sub-category and check the production method manual for basic information. # Guide to create an app ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Picture-1.png) **Swing2App Step by Step App Production Manual** After registering on the homepage, Swing2App will open a page where you can create an app. User can create their app using the **Maker(V2)** tools. **Please check the step by step manual on how to create an app on the Maker(V2) page.** \ **★ Before the app is created, please check the app production TIP!** Swing2App provides app production tools, and as a service that requires users to build their apps, the production method manual is well built.\ If you look next to the **Manager** and **Maker(V2)**, you’ll see **Help.**\ Clicking on the **Help** will take you to the corresponding help manual site describing how to use or create an app. Therefore, when you want to check the manual while creating an app, be sure to check the **Help,** to view the manual. ### **STEP.1 APP BASICS** **App Basics** is a step to input basic information required for the app production like registering the app name, logo image, splash screen image, etc. When you enter the app production page, the following page will open. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Make1.png) **How to create app basic information** 1. **App ID:** Apply your unique ID to the produced app. Check for duplicate after entering! 2. **App Name:** Enter the app name. 3. **App icon:** Register the app Logo image. 4. **Idle Screen:** Register the splash screen image that is displayed for 1-2 seconds when the app is launched. \*When you select the app logo and the splash screen image attachment button, the image editing tool window will pop up. You can modify the image to the desired size using the image editing tool provided by Swing2App. **Image editing tools** When you select the icon image button, you can upload the image in the Attached File window. If the logo is uploaded and is of correct dimensions, you can complete it by pressing **Apply** immediately without modification. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make2.png) **If you need to edit because of the different sizes, go to the image edit tool window.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make3.png) **The image above is the image editing tool window.** The image editing tool is swing2app’s service, and if the user is unable to modify the image, the image editing tool makes it easier to modify the size. Once you’ve applied the size, you can apply it by selecting the Upload (Edited) button. \*Step 1 When all the basic information items are entered, press the \[Save] button and move to the next step design theme. ### **STEP.2 Design Theme** **Stage 2 Design Theme, is the stage to determine the overall design and style of the UI design and color of the app.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-04-22-at-14.59.02.png) **\[Step 2 design theme production method]** **1) Select a prototype: Select a prototype that determines the design of your app’s UI.**\\ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make4.png) \*Swing2App offers a total of six prototype designs. Select prototype If you press ‘?’ the question mark button, you can see all the styles that have been applied. ☞ [Check the Prototype design](https://support.swing2app.com/prototypeui/)\\ **2) Skin: Set the skin color of the UI design.** Skin color provides 3 color combinations of app background, menu, and text.\\ Since the color that matched the trends are selected, you can see the UI that changes color instantly through the virtual machine by selecting the desired combination. You can instantly see a UI that changes color. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make5.png) **3. Save** ★But what if you don’t have a favorite among the color combinations? If you don’t have the color you want, you can choose your color from Detail Color Settings. In addition to a fixed color combination, detailed color settings are an option that allows you to select and apply your colors. **\*If you’ve applied both prototypes and skin colors in the design theme, save them and go to the next level in the page menu.** ### **STEP.3 Page Menu** **Step 3 Page Menu, is a step to organize the contents of the app by creating categories and menus in the overall app tool.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-04-22-at-15.42.22.png) The page menu is a step that composes the home screen and menu. We will show you how to apply both the home screen and menu. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%A4%841-1.png) **1. How to apply your home screen** The home screen is the main screen that you see when you launch the app, and you can configure how you want the main screen to appear. Menus provided by Swing2App – You can apply menus such as web links, swing2app pages, user pages, bulletin boards, and images. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make6.png) **\* How to apply the Home Screen** 1. Select the home screen and open the menu settings window on the right. 2. Enter the name that will be shown at the top of the home screen in the Menu Name. 3. Select which menu to apply to your home screen. **☞** [**Check the home screen production manual**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/apphomescreen) \*\*▶ Weblink \*\***home screen applied** **Let’s apply a web link to the home screen.** **Production method** 1. Click on the home screen and you will see a menu settings page on your right. 2. Rename the menu at the top of the home screen. (Unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the Web link menu in the menu settings. (Swing homepage URL: ) 4. Enter the web link URL in the bottom area. 5. Click apply 6. Press Save to complete! ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make7.png) **\[Check it out with GIF]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_01_55_147.gif) **★ Precautions** Some sites sometimes prohibit embedding when applying web links. \*Portal sites such as Naver, Daum, YouTube, social media sites (Instagram, KakaoTalk, Facebook) are some of the leading sites that have been prohibited from embedding! In particular, blogs or Daum café that are operated by Naver are blocked, so it may not work properly on the home screen. So on the app home screen weblink – avoid these portal sites and social media sites! For more information on how to create your home screen, please check out this post! ☞ [\[View how to create an app home screen\]](/manual/maual/pagemenu/apphomescreen) Once you’ve applied the home screen, then apply the menu. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%A4%841-1.png) **2. Delete menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make8.png) **\[How to delete the default menus]** If you delete the menu named \[UI], select the \[UI] category and select the \[Delete] button above. Menus can be deleted in this way. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%A4%841-1.png) **3. Add new menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make9.png) Instructions to delete existing menus and adding new ones.\\ 1. Select the Add categories button. 2. Enter the name of the category. 3. Menu type: Select which menu to apply. 4. Apply 5. Save **You can see the new menu has been created by viewing the virtual machine.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%A4%841-1.png) **4. Add sub-menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make10.png) We will show you how to add a sub-menu below the menu you have created. Select the menu to move and drag the mouse to where you want to move. The menu is completed by the position you drag. – You can configure it as a lower or upper menu. **If you look at the virtual machine, you can see that a menu called \[Swing2App Introduction] has been created as a sub-menu.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%9D%B4%EB%AF%B8%EC%A7%8039.png) **Select the \[Swing2App Introduction]** menu to open the applied image. In the page menu step, it is easier to create an app by first understanding how to use the menus.\ Therefore, please first check how to use each menu. \* Advanced setting is not necessary for production, so please work only up to the 3-page menu. When the production is completed with the page menu, press the app production request button to complete the app production. ### **STEP.4 App production Request** **When the app production is completed, click the \[App Creation Request] button.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make11.png) **Check the update display option as ‘Recommended’ and select \[Create].** \*The update display option is optional, so it’s not required. ### **STEP.5 App Production completed** **1. Check the app production progress** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make12.png) If you press the app creation request on the app production page, you will be directed to the app production history page on the app operation page. When you check the status by platform, is it still marked as ‘Pending Production Order’? You can check the progress of the app production on that screen. Please wait a little while because it will be produced within 5 minutes after pressing the app production request! **2. Swing2App preview (app preview)** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make14.png) In less than a minute while waiting for production, the \[Swing2App Preview] pop-up window appears. This is the ability to preview the app through swing2app preview before the app is produced. \*View on the web: Select the \[View on Web] button to preview apps created by virtual machines on the web. \*Preview on your phone: After downloading the official swing2app app – app preview menu – log in with your swing2app account or scan the QR code displayed in the pop-up window and you’ll be able to preview the app on your phone! (Only preview, no download) \ **3. Complete App Production** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make13.png) After a while, you can see the platform status has changed to ‘App production completed’. **When the production is completed, the APK file (file to download the app) will be sent to your swing2app subscription email.** **You can download the APK file directly by opening the mailbox on your phone.** With the app preview described above, you can download the app from your Android phone. \*APK files cannot be opened on your pc, so please check on your phone. \*APK file installation can only be done on Android Phones. (iPhone not supported) **★ App Preview** Swing2App \[Preview App] allows iPhone users to check the app on their phone. Android phone users can check it directly on their mobile phones without having to download the APK file. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/koko%EC%B2%98.jpg) * Please download the ‘Swing2App’ official app from the App Store and Play Store. \*If the app has already been installed, please update it to the latest version. * After launching the app → Select the \[App Preview] menu at the top of the category, and log in to your swing2app website subscription account (ID, password). * When you’re logged in, the app preview page opens, and you’ll see a list of apps you’ve created. * On the iPhone, it can be checked by pressing the preview button. * App preview, app download is available on Android phones. \*Swing2App prototypes – Apps created with Push and Web View are not available for app preview. (App downloads only) As a result, push and web view apps are not available on the iPhone and can be downloaded only on Android phones. **★ How to edit the app?** Even after app production, you’ll still be able to edit and update your app. When you edit, you can go to the Maker(V2) page, modify the content, and then save it. * **If you edit the page menu in step 3, press \[Save], write posts, etc. and then will be automatically reflected on the app!** * **If you modify the 2-step design theme, press the \[App Creation Request] after \[Saving] and get updated with the new version! \*Soft update** * **Step 1 If you modify the app basic information, \[Save] and press the \[App Creation Request] button to receive updates to the new version! \*Hard update** * **★ IMPORTANT CONTENT \*Please check the important content!!** 1. **If you modify the content of the ****Page Menu**** in step 3 of the app production phase, just press the \[Save] button and it will be automatically reflected in the app.**\ \*You don’t need to recreate the app! 2. **Step 2 ****Design Theme,**** When modifying the contents – Changing profile, changing design color, etc., please re-request the app production and select \[Soft Update].**\ If you select soft updates, it will be updated within your app without having to re-post your app, which has been released in the Play Store, App Store, etc.\ \[Soft Update] will be displayed at least 3 times in the app production. Only 1 to 3 times hard updates are possible. 3. **Step 1 ****App Basic,**** when you change the app name, idle screen image, icon image, etc., you must re-create the app.**\ Please **select Hard Update at this time!!** **The first-step item must be hard updated before it is reflected in the app.**\ If you modify the contents of the first step, please click “Request App Production” to create a new version of the APK file again.\ You’ll need to update the APK file by uploading it back to the Store. **★What is the difference between soft and hard updates?** 1. Hard update: The APK file is reinstalled, and the app must be reinstalled to receive updates.\ \*If the app is available in the Play Store or App Store, you’ll need to update the new version of the app back to the Store.\ If you change the app name, icon, and idle screen, the new version of the APK file must be updated again to the Play Store/App Store after the app is recreated. 2. Soft Update: You can get updates by simply re-launching the app without reinstalling it. Apps must be released on the Play Store or App Store.\ \*You do not need to update the app on the store. # App Update Type And Method ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/update_meth.png) Instructions on how to update the app in Swing2App In Swing2App, you can freely modify and update the app design, content, etc. -When modifying the basic information and design theme of the app, you can edit the content on the app production page, press the \[Save] button, and then press the \[App Creation Request] button to create the app with the new version. If you press \[App Creation Request], you can use the update type and update display option items. -The page menu and the contents of the app operation are automatically reflected in the app even if you save it. ### **▶ Swing2App Important Update Information** **\*Please first check the important information!!** **1. Step 3, Page Menu during the app creation phase to modify the contents and use all the features of the app operation.**\ **→ Just press the \[Save] button and it will automatically reflect on the app and you do not need to re-create the app.** **2. Step 2 during the app creation phase \[design theme] – Change prototype, change skin color**\ **→Please re-create by pressing the \[App Creation Request] button. Please select \[Soft Update].**\ **→Hard update is recommended for users who have released apps on Play Store, App Store, etc. (see below)**\ ★\[Soft Update] is displayed when the app is produced 3 or more times. Only 1 to 3 times can be updated hard. **3. Step 1 of the app creation phase \[app basic information]-Change the app name, standby screen image, icon image**\ **→Please re-create it by pressing the \[App Creation Request] button. Please select Hard Update!**\*\* → Users who have released apps on the Play Store, App Store, etc. must update the new version of the APK file to the store again after the app is created.\*\* **\*Important\* Please check when updating apps released on the Play Store and App Store!** **Soft updates are not officially updated by Apple and Google.** **Users who have launched the app on the PlayStore and App Store are encouraged to do so without using soft updates → hard updates, and then update the newly created version of the app to the Store.** By the Play Store, the App Store rules when making a software update, you may receive sanctions, such as deleting the app. Swing2App does not take responsibility for this option, so please check the contents before proceeding. ### **▶ How to update an app** **★**In the Swing-to-App, you can edit and update the created app from time to time!! If you edit the page menu content on the app creation page, just click the \[Save] button and it will be reflected directly in the app. When modifying the basic information of the app and the design theme, you can update the app with the new version by pressing the \[App Creation Request] button. → When requesting to make an app, select ‘App update type’ or ‘Update display option’ to proceed with the update. As the new version of the app is rebuilt, the existing app is updated. ### **▶ App Update Style** **1.Update type** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_update.png) **1) Hard Update**\ A hard update is **a type of update that you download by reinstalling the updated app.**\ **\*Hard update can be selected when editing the first-level app basics and second-level design theme.**\ \ **2) Soft Update**\ Soft update does not require you to reinstall the app, it is an updated style that is automatically restarted and downloaded within the app.\ **\*Soft Update – Can be used when editing the design theme and must be edited in the first step of the app basic information. You must choose a hard update.** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%A4%841.png) **2. Display Update Option** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_update1.png) The Display Updates option selects how the update display will look to the user. **If you need to update to use the app, select ‘Required’.** **If it is optional, select ‘Recommended’.** **1) Recommended Update**\ **Ask the user if they want to update, and only the user who selects OK will proceed with the update. (Optional update)**\ \ **2) Mandatory Update**\ **Forces the update without the user’s selection.** **3) Ignore Update**\ **Make sure that the update notification window does not appear. (It can be set when testing)** ### **▶ App launch screen: Update type** **If you have checked for updates and important details! Depending on the type of update, let’s check how the update proceeds in the actual app.** **1. Soft update & Recommended** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/soft1.png) The recommendation comes from a message window asking if you want to update, as in the image above. The update proceeds when the user selects ‘OK’. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/soft2.png) For soft updates, it is downloaded from within the app and **automatically updated without having to reinstall the app.** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%A4%841.png) **2. Soft Update & Required** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/soft3.png) **If you select Soft Update and Required to update the app → Updates in the app will proceed immediately without asking the user.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/soft4.png) **If you select Soft Update and Required to update the app → Updates in the app will proceed immediately without asking the user.** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%A4%841.png) **3.Hard updates & Recommendations** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/hard1.png) **Hard update, when selecting the recommended → A message window appears asking if you want to update, and the user must select ‘OK’ to proceed with the update.** Since it is optional, if you select ‘Cancel’, the update will not be performed. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%E1%84%92%E1%85%AA%E1%84%89%E1%85%A1%E1%86%AF%E1%84%91%E1%85%AD-2.png) **\[Reinstallation Progress]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/hard2.png) **In case of a hard update, unlike software, it moves to the mobile phone device and installs the new version of the app again.** It will install the update of the existing application and install it again by overwriting it with the new version of the app. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%A4%841.png) **4. Hard update& Required** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/hard3.png) **If you select Hard Update or \[Required], the update will proceed immediately if you click OK.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%E1%84%92%E1%85%AA%E1%84%89%E1%85%A1%E1%86%AF%E1%84%91%E1%85%AD-2.png) **\[Reinstallation progress]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/hard4.png) **Go to your phone device and install the new version of the app again.** It will install the update of the existing application and install it again by overwriting it with the new version of the app. **\[Information]** You can freely edit the app created by Swing-to-App even after making the app. **Page menu step – Contents such as menu modification and content registration are automatically reflected in the app by pressing \[Save], so there is no need to update separately.** **Also, simply apply the various functions provided by the app operation and it will be reflected in the app immediately.** **\*App basic information-App name, icon, standby screen image modification, design theme-prototype, skin color modification require an app update.** Therefore, press the \[App Creation Request] button to re-create the app as a new version. When you update to the newly produced version, the modified contents are reflected. ​ **\*Important\* Soft update is not an update method provided by Apple and Google.** **Therefore, it is recommended that users who have launched the app on the Play Store or App Store do not use soft updates → proceed to hard updates and then update and use the newly created version of the app in the store.** When making a soft update, you can receive sanctions such as the deletion of apps according to the rules of the Play Store and App Store. Swing-to-App does not take responsibility for this option, so be sure to check the contents before proceeding. # App Launch Screen Update Type ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_launch.png) **App Launch Screen Update Type** Once you’ve modified app content and confirmed update type, let’s see how the update works in the actual app depending on the type of update. > **App Lunch Screen: Update Types** **If you’ve checked how to update and what’s important! Depending on the type of update, we’ll see how the update works in the actual app.** ### **1. Soft Update & Recommended** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/soft1.png) The recommendation is a **pop-up notification window asking if you want to update like in the above image.**\ **The update will not proceed until the user selects OK.**\ Since it is optional, if you select ‘Cancel’, the update will not proceed. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/soft2.png) For the soft updates, **it will be downloaded from within the app and automatically updated without having to reinstall the app.** ### **2. Soft Update & Essential** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/soft3.png) **If you choose the update as required, the update will proceed unconditionally without the user’s selection.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/soft4.png) Since it is a soft update, like the above image **it will be downloaded and automatically updated in the app without having to reinstall the app.** ### **3.Hard Update & Recommended** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/hard1.png) **\[Recommended] will be a notification window asking if you want to update, and the user must select ‘OK’ to update.** Since it is optional, if you select ‘Cancel’, the update will not proceed. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%ED%99%94%EC%82%B4%ED%91%9C-2.png) **\[Re-installation process]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/hard2.png) **In case of a hard update, unlike the software, you will go to your device and reinstall a new version of the app.**\ **It will install the update of the existing application and will overwrite it with the new version of the app.** ### **4. Hard Update & Essentials** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/hard3.png) If you choose \[Mandatory], the update will be made mandatory without asking for user selection ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%ED%99%94%EC%82%B4%ED%91%9C-2.png) **\[Re-installation process]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/hard4.png) Unlike the hard update software, you will **go to the device and reinstall the new version of the app.**\ You will install an update of your existing application and will overwrite and install it again with a new version of the app. **\[Instructions]** Apps created by swing2app are free to modify after the app creation. **Page menu steps – You don’t need to update the menu modifications and content registration because it will automatically reflect on the app by pressing the \[Save] button.** **You can also apply the various features that App Manager offers, and they’ll be reflected directly into your app.** **\*App basic information – App name, icon, standby screen image modification, design theme – prototype, skin color modification requires app update.** So, press the \[Request app] button to recreate the app to a new version. When you update to a newly created version, the changes will be reflected. \*Important\* Soft updates are not officially provided by Apple and Google. **Therefore, users who have launched their app on the Play Store and App Store are not advised to apply soft updates → proceed with hard updates, and then push updates of newly created versions of the app to the Store.** When applying a soft update, you can face problems like re-payment or app deletion according to play store and app store regulations. Swing2app is not responsible for any action taken by the store, so please confirm the contents and proceed. # Push or WebView version creation method (super simple app creation) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/push_webview.png) If you have a website or an active website, You can create an app by linking the website URL to the app as it is. It’s really simple! In seconds we will show you how to create an app through video. You can create a mobile app in just 5 minutes using the ‘push’ or ‘web view’ UI style among the prototypes provided by Swing2App. You can create your website by linking it with the app.\ \ Just enter the basic information of the app and select ‘push’ or ‘ web view’ in the design theme \*Weblink: Enter the URL address, save it, and press ‘Request to create an app’ to get it done.\ \ **We’ll show you a manual on how to build an app with a push version and a web-view version.** **\[Create a push version app]** **▶What is Push Version?** Swing2App offers several types of UI design-prototypes. Of these, ‘Push’ only is produced without being linked to the app as long as you enter the user’s homepage URL without any other product features. And with **push notifications**, you can send events, advertisements, and promotional messages to your users. **\*The web-view version is not available in Swing2App’s other menus, so if you want to send push, please select the ‘push’ UI.** **▶Push Features** **-When creating an app with a web view, you can create it by just putting the web link URL address.** **-Unlike the web view, you can use the send push features provided by Swing2App.** **-Push toolbar is created at the bottom of the app screen when creating an app.**\ \\ ### **▶How to create a push version app** ### **Step 1. App basic** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/make15.png) Step 1, after logging in to Swing2App homepage \[App production page] **Apply the App ID → App Name → App Icon Image →** **app idle screen image** **and press the** Save button. ### **Step 2. Design Theme** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/make16.png) Step 2 Design theme **\*Prototype: Select ‘Push Only’** \*Design Skin Color: You don’t need to choose the color. ### **Step 3. Page Menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/make18.png) Step 3. Page Menu 1)**Select \[Home Screen] button → 2)Menu type: Select weblink → 3)Enter URL address in weblink field → 4)Apply button → 5)Select save button → 6)Request button for app production.** You can check the completed app using the swing2app preview or by downloading the APK file sent by email from your Android phone. **\*Apps made with web view and push can only be checked on Android phones. (Cannot be checked on iPhone)** **▶ Send Push** You can send push notifications after creating apps with the push version. On the Manager page→ Push & Member → Send Push menu, enter the subject and content of the message, and select the web link to send. \*Scheduled push delivery is also available. **\[Create a Web View Version App]** **▶ What is the Web View Version?** The ‘web view’ prototype is also produced without any other production function. Unlike the push version, you won’t be able to use any other features of Swing2App, such as sending push. **▶ Web View Features** * When creating an app with a web view, you can create it by just putting the web link URL address. * Since this is a style that uses only web links, other menus provided by Swing2App cannot be used (push notifications, bulletin boards, and all menus are not available). * If you want to send push notifications, you must select Prototype: Push Only. * ### **▶ How to create a Web View Version App** ### **Step 1. App Basic** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/make15.png) Step 1, after logging in to Swing2App homepage \[App Production Page] **Apply the App ID → App Name → App Icon Image →** **App idle screen image** **and press the** Save button. ### **Step 2. Design Theme** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/make17.png) Step 2 Design Theme **\*Prototype: Select ‘Web view Only’** \*Design Skin Color: No need to choose the color. ### **Step 3. Page Menu** 1. Select the Home Screen and select the web link in the **Page menu.** 2. Enter URL address in weblink field. 3. Select the Save button 4. Click on the App Creation button for app production. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/make18.png) You can check the completed app using the swing2app preview or by downloading the APK file sent by email from your Android phone. **\* Apps made with web view and push can only be checked on Android phones. (Can’t be checked on iPhone)** **\*Please be careful when creating a push version and web-view version.** 1. **Some web links do not work with the app.**\ **\*Portal sites such as Naver, YouTube, social media sites (Instagram, KakaoTalk, Facebook) are some of the leading sites that have been banned from loading!**\ In particular, many users want to link their Naver blog or Daum Café with a web view or push version.\ If you link to these sites, you will get errors or it will not work properly.\ \*Apps applied with these web links are difficult to launch in Play Store or App Store.\ So while it’s okay to put the link in another prototype as an external menu, make sure that the link to the app is not used as the site address above. 2. **It cannot change from a push version or web view version prototype to another prototype.**\ After creating a web view based (push, web view) prototype → You cannot change it to a normal prototype (slide, top, footer, drop-down list, drop-down box).\ **\*If you need to change from web view based on other prototypes, you have to create a new app.** 3. **If the purpose is to commercialize the app (store release), please use the paid version.**\ Apps created with a web view or push cannot use the free commercial version (free app with swing2app ads).\ \*The free commercial version is only available for Prototype – Top, Footer, Slide, Dropdown List/Box prototype.\ **To release push or web view apps on Play Store and App Store, you must purchase a paid app ticket and use it as a paid version.** **TIP. If you are launching the app as a web view version, you can purchase unlimited web view vouchers and use the app for an unlimited time without any limitation.** **☞** [**Go to the web view unlimited plug-in products**](/manual/appmanage/pay/webview-unlimited) # WebView App Manual(production and operation) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/webview.png) **WebView app production, store release method, Q\&A** We will tell you how to make a WebView app (a web app made by walking a website) and how to release it to the store. Swing2App is a user-created app builder, and you must create your app with the app-creation tool provided by Swing2App. If you sign up as a member after accessing the homepage, the app production page will open, and you can make the app for free right away! ### **STEP.1 Web view app production** **Step 1: Basic App Information** After logging in to the Swing2App homepage, \[Maker(V2)] Step 1 Basic Information **Enter the App ID → App name → App icon image → App standby screen image, and save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/make15.png) **Step 2: Design Theme** \*Prototype: Select ‘WebView only’ \*Design skin color: You don’t need to select a color. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/make17.png) **Step 3: Page Menu** 1. Select the Home Screen and select the web link in the **Page menu.** 2. Enter URL address in weblink field. 3. Select the Save button 4. Click on the App Creation button for app production. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/12/make18.png) ### **STEP.2 Check the App** \*WebViews and push-made apps can only be found on Android phones. (You can’t check on iPhone.) Download and check the app you created on Swing2App Official App – \[App Preview]. If you don’t have any problems after testing, you can purchase a pass and upload a ticket. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/koko%EC%B2%98.jpg) 1\) Download the official ‘Swing2App’ from the Play Store. \*If the app is already installed, please update it to the latest version. ▶[**Play Store release link(URL)**](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.hustay.swing.pbf061408642545519fc0306f1985d1bf) 2\) After launching the app → select the \[App Preview] menu at the top of the category and login with your Swing2App website subscription account (ID, password). \*Caution: You must enter the account you signed up on at the Swing2App website . This is not an account signed up for the official Swing2App app! 3\) When login is complete, the app preview page opens, and you can check the list of apps you have created. 4\) You can install the app on your phone by pressing the \[Download App] button. \*WebView app is only available on Android phones. (iPhone not available) After testing, if there are no problems, you can prepare to launch the store. When launching the App Store or Play Store app, you need to switch from the free version app to the paid version. To convert the paid version, simply purchase a Swing2App paid app pass, please check below. ### **STEP.3 Purchasing passes and tickets** There are two types of products that can be purchased from the web view app. You can purchase the product you want from the two. Please go to the Manager → Online Stores → Vouchers & Tickets, ticket purchase page. **1) Basic Swing2App pass (one-month pass purchased monthly)** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/Artboard-%E2%80%93-1.png) **\*Basic swing ticket (1 month) $33 + Play store upload ticket $5 + App store upload ticket $20** -A paid app ticket is a product with one month, so you must pay $33 per month. Alternatively, you can purchase by choosing the number of months, such as 6 months or 12 months. -Upload ticket is an optional product (the cost of uploading your app to the store instead of Swing2App), so you only have to pay once for the first registration. \*However, if there is an app update, the uploaded app must also be updated. -Which store to launch is an option of the user, so if you only release the App Store, you can purchase only the App Store upload ticket. -If you can upload the Play Store yourself, you only need to purchase the pass and upload it directly. (You do not need to purchase an upload ticket) -App Store is only available for uploading, so if you are going to release it, be sure to purchase the App Store upload ticket and apply. **or** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9822.jpg) **2) Unlimited plug-in for WebView (Unlimited use for a single payment, unlimited use)** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/Artboard-%E2%80%93-2.png) If you want to continue using the WebView app for an unlimited period, there is a ‘WebView unlimited plugin’ product on the Swing2App plugin purchase page. Unlimited purchase of WebView plugin products once purchased! No restrictions on the period of use! Unlimited! There are three types of products, and you can purchase products according to the platform you want to launch! **1) If you are going to release both the App Store and Play Store → Buy an unlimited WebView (iPhone + Android) $300.** **2) If only App Store is released → Unlimited plugin for web view (iPhone) $230** **3) If only the Play Store is released → Unlimited plugin for web view (Android) $99** Therefore, we plan to operate the app for a long time, and if you operate without restrictions, we recommend that you purchase the ‘Unlimited use of WebView plugin’ product. Depending on whether the Play Store or App Store is released, you can purchase products for each platform, so you can use them reasonably. You can purchase the upload ticket in the same way. Play store upload ticket $5 + App store upload ticket $20 **For web view unlimited plug-in products, please check the precautions and usage.** [**☞ Go to see how to use the WebView unlimited plug-in product**](/manual/appmanage/pay/webview-unlimited) **\* In addition to the cost of paying for Swing-to-App, the Apple developer account registration fee ($129 per year) and Google developer registration fee ($25, lifetime use) must be paid by the user.** If you click the \[Buy] button, you can check the details of the service and usage guide provided by the ticket. Therefore, be sure to check the product before purchasing it. If you are not sure if you look at the contents, please leave an inquiry on the bulletin board. We will help you in detail. ^^ ### **STEP. 4 Store upload request** If you have purchased all the tickets and tickets above! You must apply for an upload to submit your application to Swing2App. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/d2.png) \* Go to App Operation → Version Control → App Production History menu, and select the \[Apply for Uploading Play Store] or \[Apply for Uploading App Store] button in the Market Registration field. An application pop-up will appear, and you must fill in the content according to the application form and submit the upload request to the Swing2App. \*Please make sure to upload after payment [☞ \[How to apply for Play Store upload\]](/manual/appmanage/version/playstore-upload) [☞ \[How to apply for App Store upload\]](/manual/appmanage/version/appstore-upload) If you apply for the Play Store or App Store upload after purchasing all products, such as a voucher, we will act for you and upload your app to the store. You must check the policy of each store. \*Store registration policy: ### **STEP.5 Store launch completion (release after review)** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/d3.png) When the application is completed, Swing2App’s Play Store Uploader / App Store Uploader starts uploading your app to the store. \*Play Store review period: 7 days \*App store review period: 1 week to 2 weeks Since each store has a long review time, you must wait for the review period after uploading. **-When the upload process starts, an email will be sent to each store’s policies and important notices.** **-After the normal launch, an e-mail and text (if a user number is registered) will be sent out.** **-If the review is rejected, the reason for the rejection and measures will be provided.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/12/%EC%9C%A0%EB%A3%8C%EB%B2%84%EC%A0%84_En-e1596541501826.png) When the store launch is complete, you can check the apps released from the Play Store and App Store. The App Store is exposed when searching for the app name immediately after the app is released. The Play Store does not immediately search for names even when the app is released. \*Google converts it to exposure after checking how actively the app operates to prevent indiscriminate launch even when the app is released. Therefore, you have to install a lot of apps and manage reviews, ratings, etc. After a while, the app name search is exposed. ​ Make sure to check the contents of the store policy, so there will be no problem when using the app release later. Please check. [**☞ \[Check the store terms and conditions\]**](https://support.swing2app.com/market-policy/) **Precautions and WebView app production Q\&A** **Q. Web view app is said to be difficult to release on the App Store and Play Store, right?** **–Play Store** Web view and push version app (web app connected to the website) must submit supporting documents (advance notice document) according to Google web view policy. To prove that the site connected to the app is owned by you or your company (company), you must submit documents such as business registration certificate or website domain registration confirmation. When submitting documents, the WebView app can also be released on the Play Store without any problems. **–App Store–** Because Apple does not approve the WebView app by policy, it is often rejected by the review and may not be released. However, some apps are released, so the WebView app needs to be reviewed to know whether it will be released. We will help you to launch the App Store with your appeal as much as possible. \* PC version web, not the mobile web, will be rejected. The website must be connected to the mobile web. \* Web apps with only simple promotional or marketing content, no content, or limited user participation are rejected. \* Please note that even if the store release is rejected, the usage fee and upload ticket cost will not be refunded for apps that have registered for the App Store. **Q. Is it possible to connect to any website and make it when creating a web view app?** When creating a web view app, you must be careful not to use other companies or sites of famous brands like I made! You can only use the website operated by our company, the website I made (using a hosting company), etc. Many users want to link their own Naver blog or Daum Cafe with a web view or push. If these sites are linked to the app, there will be an error or it will not work properly. \* These apps cannot be released in the Play Store or App Store. (Rejected for copyright or brand imitation) And some web links do not work with the app, that is, forbids embedding. \*Naver, Daum portal sites and sites provided by the portal (modoo, store farm web, etc.), YouTube, SNS sites (Instagram, Kakao Talk, Facebook) are representative sites that prohibit the spread! Therefore, you need to apply a homepage that can prove that it is a site I created with domain registration information, and a website (homepage) that can be verified with a business registration certificate if the company makes it. **Q. Can’t I send a WebView app?** Yes, the WebView app cannot be pushed because other functions of the app cannot be used. If you need to send a push, you must make it a push version app, not a web view app. **Q. Can I change the web link when purchasing a WebView unlimited plug-in product?** Yes, that’s right. The WebView unlimited product does not change the homepage URL applied to the app, so please use it carefully. The weblink can be changed if purchased with a general pass. **Q. If it is difficult to make it yourself if you pay for the development, can you do all of the above in Swing2App?** Yes, if you request production, we will do all of it for you. From icon and standby screen image design to app production and store upload, we will proceed. App production costs and labor costs for production agencies are incurred separately, so please contact us for help. However, you need to create your own Google Developer account to be uploaded to the Play Store and inform your account. The Apple Store account is optional for the App Store, but if you use your account, you must also create your account to inform us. Accounts are not created by Swing2App. **Q. Can I switch from web view to push version or update from push version to web view version?** Yes, it is possible. After making the app production-design theme-prototype, save, and re-app request. When a new version app is created, you can update the store again with the version app. However, users who use the WebView unlimited plugin cannot change it. **Q. How do I change the web link address after creating a web view app?** Changing the web link address applied to the app is the same. Page menu 1)\[Home screen] button selection → 2)Menu type: Weblink selection → 3) Enter URL address in weblink column → 4) Apply button → 5) Select save button \*Weblink address modification is automatically reflected in the app by pressing the save button. \*Relaunch after the app is closed and the changed website will be applied. However, it is not possible to change the web link address in the app using the WebView unlimited plugin product. **Q. Will it change from a WebView app to a general prototype?** After making a WebView-based (push, WebView) prototype → You cannot change it with a general prototype (slide, top, footer, drop-down list, drop-down box). \*If you need to change from a WebView-based prototype to another, you need to create a new app. **Q. Is it not possible to apply for a free commercial WebView app?** WebView free commercial version can only be applied to apps created with the general prototype, and push version apps cannot be applied. **Q. Can I change the WebView to unlimited plug-in after using the basic license?** Yes, it is possible. If you purchase the WebView unlimited plug-in after using the basic license, it will be produced with unlimited settings. \*Precautions 1\) This is a new version of the app created with an unlimited web view, and you must update it on the app store and play store again. Existing license applications and WebView unrestricted apps are not compatible with each other, so users need to update to the new version to receive updates. 2\) Even if you purchase and use the Swing2App Paid App voucher, you will not receive a partial refund for the remaining period even if you pay for the unlimited WebView plugin. Therefore, we recommend that you purchase unlimited tickets for the WebView after using the paid application ticket. **Q. Is the WebView app modified or updated on the website directly reflected in the app?** Yes, since the web app is an application-driven by a website, the screen displayed on the website is reflected in the app. Updates from the web are automatically reflected in the app even if you don’t have to do anything in the app. **Q. Is it not possible for the app to operate normally on the mobile web?** If there are no problems on the web, the problem will not occur in the app. However, technical errors can occur at any time. Therefore, if you have any problems with testing before launching the app, please leave it as an inquiry board. We are helping to confirm the symptoms. # Push App Manual(production and operation) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/kdhdnfj.png) **Push app production, store launch method, Q\&A** **What is a Push app?** Push app is a web app creation platform created by linking a mobile web URL such as a homepage. Since the website is linked to the app as it is, you can create the same app as the web. Unlike web view apps, push apps can send push notifications to users who have installed the app! ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/Artboard-%E2%80%93-5.png) If you are thinking of creating a push app, be sure to check the push app creation manual. You can check everything from push app creation to store launch method, push delivery method, and precautions. Swing2App is an app builder created by the user, and the user must create an app with the app creation tool provided by Swing2App. When you sign up for membership after accessing the homepage, the app creation page opens immediately, and you can create apps for free! ### **STEP.1 Push app production** **Step1: App basic information** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/gdhd.png) After logging in to the Swing2App homepage \[Maker(V2)] Step 1 Basic App Information 1\) Enter App ID: This is a unique app identifier and cannot be changed after setting. 2\) Enter the app name 3\) App icon image 4\) App standby screen image registration 5\) Select \[Save] button 6\) Select the \[Next] button. **\*For the app icon image and standby screen image, first create an image according to the size indicated on the screen and then register.** For icons and standby screens, please see the production guideline manual first and create them! **\*Except for the app ID, the app name, icon, and standby screen image can be modified and updated without restrictions.** The modification of basic app information is reflected only when you update to a new version by pressing the \[App Production Request] button. **Step 2: Design theme** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/gdhye.png) 1\) Prototype selection: Select **‘Push Only’** 2\) Select whether to display the toolbar -Select whether to use the toolbar or remove the toolbar 3\)\[Save] button 4\) Select the \[Next] button. **Step 3 Page Menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/hdgsk.png) 1\) Enter site address: Enter the URL address of the link you want to apply to the app. \*\*When entering a link, be sure to enter the hyperlink http\:// 2\) \[Save] button 3\) \[App Creation request] button 4\) Click the \[Create] button to complete. Push app production is completed within 10 minutes. You can check the completed app by using the Swing2App official app \[App Preview] or downloading the APK file sent by email from your Android phone. **\* Apps created by push and web view can only be checked on Android phones. (I can’t check the iPhone\~)** Since creating an app is simple, you can easily follow it by looking at the manual. The production can be used free of charge at no extra cost. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) > **Push app creation instructions** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/Group-80.png) Occasionally, while creating a web view app or a push app, if you enter the website address and press the save button, you can see the message ‘Connection refused’ on the web preview screen. **The message will be displayed if the connected website has a security setting that blocks external connections, that is, prohibits external sharing and embedding.** Therefore, if you connect a link to a website with security settings in this way, you will see a connection rejection message on the web preview screen. Even if such a message appears, **it does not mean that the app cannot be produced.** **You can check it more accurately if you check it with the app as it is simply not displayed on the web for security reasons.** Therefore, please download and check the app after saving and \[App Creation Request]. If you look at it as an app, you can see that the site works normally in conjunction with the app. If the connection is rejected in the app, please contact us through the inquiry board. \*However, the URL for internal use and the site address used by the company’s internal server cannot be connected, and cannot be created with a web app. ### **STEP.2 Download and check the created app** **\*Apps created by push and web view can only be checked on Android phones. (I can’t check the iPhone\~)** **Swing2App Official App-Download and check the app created in \[App Preview].** **If there is no problem after testing, you can purchase a pass and an upload ticket.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/02_PC_%EB%AF%B8%EB%A6%AC%EB%B3%B4%EA%B8%B0%EC%95%B1_En.png) 1\) Download the official “Swing2App” app from the Play Store. \*If the app is already installed, please update to the latest version. **▶**[**Play Store release link(URL)**](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.hustay.swing.pbf061408642545519fc0306f1985d1bf) 2\) After launching the app → Select the \[App Preview] menu at the top of the category and log in with the Swing2App website subscription account (ID, password). \*Note: You must log in with the account you signed up for on the Swing2App website: . It is not an account signed up in the official Swing2App app\~! 3\) When login is complete, the app preview page opens, and you can check the list of apps you have created. 4\) You can install the app from your mobile phone by pressing the \[Download App] button. \*The WebView app is only available on Android phones. (iPhone is not available) ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) **▶ App launch screen: App preview-Download app** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/ezgif.com-gif-maker.gif) Please check the process of downloading the app in the app preview through the GIF image. When installing the app, a Google Play Protect blocking message may sometimes appear. You can ignore it and select Install and proceed. By installing the web view app on your Android phone like this, you can test whether the operation is completed normally. If there is no problem, you can prepare for the store launch. **When you launch an App Store or Play Store app, you need to switch from the free version app to the paid version.** **To switch to the paid version, you can purchase a swing-to-app paid app license, please check below.** ### **STEP.3 Purchase of vouchers and tickets** There are two types of products that can be purchased in the push app. You can purchase the product you want from among the two. **1. Swing2App Basic Pass (Purchase a 1-month pass monthly or purchase a pass for each desired period)** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/Artboard-%E2%80%93-1.png) **-Information of purchase products**– Manager → Online Stores → Go to the Vouchers & Tickets page. [https://support.swing2app.com/view/shop\_list](https://swing2app.com/view/shop_list) **▶ Swing Basic Ticket (1 month) $33 + Play Store upload ticket $5 + App Store upload ticket $20** -Swing basic type (1 month) product has a 30-day period of use, and if you continue to operate the store app, you must purchase it every 1 month. -The upload ticket is an optional product (the cost of uploading the user’s app to the store instead of the swing2app), so you only need to pay once at the time of initial registration. **\[Recommended pass]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/Artboard-%E2%80%93-6.png) If you purchase a 6 or 12 months long-term pass, you can use it at a lower price than purchasing a monthly pass. -Swing basic pass (12 months) $290, 26% discount from monthly purchase -Basic Swing Pass (6 months) $160, 19% discount from monthly purchase ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9822.jpg) **or** **2. Push-only Lifetime Paid App (Unlimited use without period limit for one payment)** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/Group-2036.png) **-Purchase product information-** Manager → Online Stores → Go to the Swing2App plug-in purchase page [https://support.swing2app.com/view/order\_info\_action?product\_id=38](https://swing2app.com/view/order_info_action?product_id=38) ▶ **Push-only Lifetime Paid App (Android + iPhone) $550 + Play Store upload ticket $5 + App Store upload ticket $20** If you want to continue using the push app without a period of use, please purchase the ‘Push-only Lifetime Paid App’ product on the swing plugin purchase page. **Once purchased, no repurchase! No period limit! Unlimited!** ▶ **Recommended tip** If you plan to run the app for a long period of time, and if you run the app without a period of use, we recommend purchasing the’Push-only unlimited paid app’ product. You can purchase products for each platform according to the launch of the Play Store and App Store, so you can use them reasonably. You can purchase each upload ticket in the same way. Play Store upload ticket $5 + App Store upload ticket $20 ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) **1) View product details** Before purchasing a voucher or ticket, be sure to check the product details! If you click the **\[Purchase]** button, you can check the service and usage information provided in the voucher in detail. Therefore, be sure to check the product before purchasing. If you are not sure about the contents, please leave an inquiry on the inquiry board. We will help you in detail. ^^ **2) Please check the upload ticket issue and product details.** -The upload ticket is an optional product (the cost of uploading the user’s app to the store instead of the swing2app), so you only need to pay once at the time of initial registration. \*However, if there is an app update, you need to repurchase the upload ticket because you need to update the app on the store. -It is up to the user to decide which store to launch, so if you only launch the App Store, you only need to purchase the App Store upload ticket. -If the user can directly upload the Play Store, they only need to purchase a ticket and upload it directly. (You do not need to purchase an upload ticket.) -Since the App Store is only available as an upload agent, if you plan to release it, be sure to purchase and apply for an App Store upload ticket. **​3) Please register for Apple or Google developer account. (Before store registration)** \*0In addition to the cost to pay for Swing2App, the Apple developer account registration fee (129,000 won per year) and Google developer registration fee (25 dollars, lifetime use) must be made and paid by the user. -Google must have a Google developer account in the user account to register -Apple is optional for developer account: Select between user Apple developer account registration or Swing2App account proxy registration ### **STEP. 4 Store upload application** If you purchased both the voucher and ticket above! You must apply for an upload to receive an upload application through Swing2App. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/d2.png) An application pop-up will appear, and you must fill in the contents according to the application form and apply for upload before the upload application is delivered to Swing2App. \*Please make sure to apply for upload after payment **☞** [**\[How to apply for play store upload\]**](/manual/appmanage/version/playstore-upload) **☞** [**\[App store upload application method\]**](/manual/appmanage/version/appstore-upload) After purchasing all products such as use vouchers, please apply for upload to the Play Store or App Store, and we will act on your behalf to upload your app to the store. You must check the policies for each store. **\*Store registration:** [**https://support.swing2app.com/view/swing\_notice\_detail?notice\_id=292\¬ice\_type=normalNotice**](https://swing2app.com/view/swing_notice_detail?notice_id=292\¬ice_type=normalNotice) ### **STEP.5 Store launch complete (release after review)** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/d3.png) When the application is completed, the Swing2App playstore uploader / Appstore uploader starts the upload process to upload your app to the store. \*Play Store Review Period: 7 days \*App store review period: 1 week to 2 weeks Since the review time is long for each store, you have to wait for the review period after applying for upload. **-When the upload process starts, we will send you an e-mail with information on policies and important notices for each store.** **-After the normal release, an e-mail and text message (if a user number is registered) will be sent.** **-If the screening is rejected, we will inform you of the reasons for refusal and actions to be taken, and re-examination will be done without any additional upload ticket fees.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/Group-201-1-e1596628274458.png) When the store launch is complete, you can check the released apps on the Play Store and App Store. App Store is exposed when searching for the app name immediately after the app is released. In the Play Store, even when the app is released, the name search does not work right away. \*Google checks how actively the app is running and converts it into exposure to prevent indiscriminate release even after app release. Therefore, you need to install a lot of apps and manage reviews, ratings, etc. As time passes, the app name search will be exposed. Make sure to check the contents of the store policy so that there will be no problems when using the app release. **By all means! Please check.☞** [**\[Check the store terms and conditions\]**](https://support.swing2app.com/market-policy/) ### **STEP.6 Sending push from push app** Push apps can send push messages to users who have installed the app! Therefore, if the app is created, check the push sending function and familiarize yourself with how to send a push. **\*Push can be sent from the Manager page → Push & Member → Send push page.** **Please check the manual below for how to send a push app.** **☞**[**Go to see how to send push in push app**](/manual/appmanage/pushmember/pushapp-push) **Precautions and push app production Q\&A** **Q.The push app is said to be difficult to release on the App Store and Play Store. Is it correct?** **–Play Store–** Web view and push version apps (web apps that link the website) must submit supporting documents (prior notice documents) in accordance with the Google Web View policy. In order to prove that the site connected to the app is owned by you or the company (company), you must submit a prior notice document such as a business registration card or website domain registration confirmation. When submitting the documents, you can launch the web view app on the Play Store without any problems. **–App Store–** In fact, because Apple does not approve webview apps by policy, it is often rejected in the review and may not be released. However, there are some apps that are released, so the webview app must be reviewed before you can know whether it is released. We will appeal to you as much as possible to help launch the App Store, but please understand that we cannot determine whether the user will release the app or not! \* PC version web other than mobile web will be rejected. The website must be connected to the mobile web. \*Web apps that have only content for promotion or marketing on the web, have no content, or have restricted users’ participation will be rejected. \* Please note that even if the store launch is rejected, the fee for use and upload tickets are not refundable for apps that have been registered in the App Store. **Q. Can I create a push app by connecting to any site?** When creating a push app, you must be careful, do not use other companies or famous brands’ sites as if you were creating them! You can only use the website operated by our company and the website you created (using a hosting company). There are many users who want to link their own Naver blog or Daum Cafe through web view or push. If these sites are linked to the app, errors or not working properly. \* These apps cannot be released on the Play Store or App Store. (Rejected due to copyright or brand imitation) And among web links, there are sites that do not work with the app, that is, embezzlement is prohibited. \*Portal sites such as Naver and Daum, sites provided by the portal (modoo, Storefarm Web, etc.), YouTube, and SNS sites (Instagram, KakaoTalk, Facebook) are representative sites that prohibit embedding! Therefore, you need to apply a website (homepage) that can prove that it is the site you created with domain registration information, or a website (homepage) that can be verified with a business registration card if it is made by the company. **Q. It is difficult to make it yourself, but if you pay the development fee, can you do the above process in Swing2App?** Yes, if you request the production, we will make it all for you. From designing icons and standby screen images to creating apps and uploading to the store, we will do everything. Since app production costs and labor costs for the production agency are incurred separately, we will assist you with consultation if you request. However, you need to create a Google developer account that will be posted on the Play Store and tell the account. The Apple developer account is optional for the App Store, but if you use your own account, you must create your own account and tell us. Accounts are not created in Swing2App. **Q. Can I remove the toolbar that appears on the push app or change the toolbar design?** Toolbar can be removed and design cannot be changed. If you want to change the design, you have to customize it, and you have to request the development of the design you want. **\[How to remove toolbar]** \*If you look at the Maker(V2) → Design Theme stage, there is a check box for’Show Toolbar’. Check ‘Remove Toolbar’ and save it. Please press the app production request. If you update the app to a new version after making the app, you can use the version with the toolbar removed. **Q. Can I switch from push app to web view version or update from web view app to push app?** Yes it is possible. \* Change the prototype to ‘Web View’ in the Maker(V2) → design theme stage, then save and request to create the app again. When you receive an update to a new version, you can check the prototype changed. If the app is released on the Play Store or App Store, you can update it to the newly created version as well. However, among web view app users, users who use the web view unlimited plug-in cannot be changed to push app. **Q. How do I change the web link address after creating a push app?** Changing the web link address applied to the app is the same. **Maker(V2) → Page Menu Step** **1) Enter the URL address in the web link field → 2) Apply button → 3) Select the save button** \*Editing the web link address is automatically reflected in the app by pressing the save button. \*If you run the app again after closing, it will be applied to the changed website. **Q. Will it change from a push app to a generic prototype?** After making a push-only prototype → It cannot be changed to a normal prototype (slide, top, footer, drop-down list, drop-down box). \*If you need to change from a push-based to another prototype, you need to create and create an app. **Q. Can I apply for free commercial use of push apps?** The application for the free commercial version can only be applied for apps created with a general prototype, and web view and push version apps are not available. **Q. In the push app, do the changes or updates on the website are immediately reflected in the app?** Since yes, web apps are applications that are driven by a website, the screen displayed on the website is reflected in the app as well. Updates on the web are automatically reflected in the app even if you don’t do anything in the app. **Q. Can functions that operate normally on the mobile web not be available in the app?** If there is no problem on the web, the problem does not occur in the app. However, technical errors may occur at any time. Therefore, if you have any problems while testing before launching the app, please leave it as an inquiry board. We are helping you by checking the symptoms. # Remove Push App Toolbar ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/dgyb.png) **How to remove the push toolbar from push-only apps** ▶ **What is the Push Toolbar?** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/Group-1.png) The push tool bar is created at the bottom of the app screen, as you can see in the image when producing a push-only app. Unlike web view apps, push-only apps can send push notifications, so push toolbars are created together. Toolbars are available with all-to-next step, home screen movement, push notification list, sharing, and push setup buttons. Toolbar is a function that is automatically set and provided when producing push apps, so users were not able to delete it themselves before. Now available as an app production option, you can choose whether to use the toolbar or remove it! (Update August 2020) You can remove the toolbar if the app design doesn’t suit you or if you don’t need the feature. The process of producing push apps is all the same. You can check the use of push toolbars at the design theme stage. Please check the method below. ### **Stage 1 App Basic Information** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/gdhd.png) After logging in to the Swing homepage \[Maker (V2)] Step 1 Basic App Information 1\) Enter App ID: This is an app unique identifier and cannot be changed after setting. 2\) Enter the app name 3\) App icon image 4\) App standby screen image registration 5\) Select \[Save] button 6\) Select the \[Next] button. **\*For the app icon image and standby screen image, first create an image according to the size indicated on the screen and then register.** Please make the icon and standby screen first by viewing the production guideline manual! **\*Except for the app ID, the app name, icon, and standby screen image can be modified and updated without restrictions.** Modifying the basic information of the app is reflected only when you update to the new version by pressing the \[App Creation Request] button. ### **Stage 2 design theme** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/hsgheknk.png) 1\) Prototype selection: ‘Push only’ selection 2\) Select whether to display the toolbar The default setting is checked as’Use Toolbar’. \*If you are not using the toolbar, please check ‘Remove Toolbar’. 3\)\[Save] button 4\) Select the \[Next] button. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/idhdxj.png) **\*Apps created for push-only and web-view only cannot be changed to general prototypes.** In other words, it cannot be changed from push-only → to a prototype such as slide or top or footer. The opposite is also the same. Cannot change from general prototype → push or web view prototype If you need to change to a generic prototype, you need to create a new app. **\*When using the push toolbar again, check whether the toolbar is displayed → ‘Use tool bar’.** After saving, you must re-create the app. It is reflected only when you update to the new version by pressing the \[App Creation Request] button. **\*If you select to remove the push toolbar and create an app, a push app is created without a toolbar.** Functions such as checking the list of push notifications and sharing buttons provided in the toolbar will not be available. Because it is a push app, push sending is possible without problems. ### **Step 3 page menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/djdl.png) 1\) Enter site address: Enter the URL address of the link you want to apply to the app. \*When entering a link, be sure to enter the hyperlink http\:// 2\) \[Save] button 3\) \[App Creation Request] button 4\) Click the \[Create] button to complete. **\*The URL link address applied to the app can be changed without restrictions.** You don’t have to create it again, just press the save button and it will be reflected in the app. > **Other push app related usage methods** **1) How do I change the web link address after creating a push app?** Changing the web link address applied to the app is the same. Page Menu → Enter the URL link to be changed in the site address field → Select the Save button \* Editing the web link address is automatically reflected in the app by pressing the save button. \*If you run the app again after closing, it will be applied to the changed website. **2)Sending a push** You can send push notifications after making an app with the push version. In the app operation page → Push & Member → Send push menu, enter the message title and content, and then select and send the web link to be linked. Reservation push sending is also possible. Please refer to the manual below for how to send a push from the push app. **☞**[**Sending push from push app**](/manual/appmanage/pushmember/pushapp-push) 3) Check the web link that does not apply to the push app. (Same for web view app) Among web links, there are sites that do not work with the app, that is, embezzlement is prohibited. \* Portal sites such as Naver and Daum, sites provided by the portal (moddo, Store Farm Web, etc.), YouTube, and SNS sites (Instagram, KakaoTalk, Facebook) are representative sites that prohibit embedding! In particular, there are many users who want to link their own Naver blog or Daum Cafe through web view or push. These sites do not work properly even if an error occurs or is displayed when linked to the app. \* In particular, these apps cannot be released on the Play Store or App Store. Therefore, please do not apply the above links to web-view apps and push apps. It is okay to put the link in the external menu from another prototype, but please make sure that the link to the app link itself is not used as the above site address. # App Production ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/maker_manage.png) Basic Information – How to create an app\ Swing2App can create and manage multiple apps in 1 account. * **Free customers can create up to 3 apps in one account.** * **Paid customers can create up to 10 apps in one account. (1 paid app + 9 free apps)** Therefore if you are creating an app and you want more, you can create it to match the number of available apps.\ **We will show you how to create additional new apps in your account.** **▶ Go to App Production Page(Maker(V2))** After logging in to the swing2app homepage, you will be taken to the “Create App” page from the main dashboard screen. ### **1. PC versions – Create additional apps** **First, we will add the app to the PC version of the Swing2App homepage.** On the **Maker(V2)** screen, select the **Create More Apps,** enter App name, and click **Create.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/appmake1.png) If you choose to create an add-on app, you’ll see the Create new app window.\ Please enter the name of the new app to create, and select Create.\ **A new app production tool will pop up.**\ **You can create the app in the same step.** ### **2. Mobile Versions – Creating additional apps** **Did you know, in addition to the PC version, in Swing2App creating an app with the mobile site is also possible?**\ **We will also show you how to select \[Add more apps] on your mobile site.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/web_edit@3x.png) Access the Swing2App site on your mobile. Go to the App Production page in the same way.\ \ On mobile, **select the icon on the top left of the screen, and the + icon will appear.**\ **This icon is the Add-on app button.**\ If you select the icon, the **\[Create a new app]** windows appear in the same way as the PC version and you can create a new app easily.\ The production method is the same. ### **3. Check added apps** Where can I see the new apps as well as my own created apps? ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/makeapp3.png) The app production page provides a **list of apps in the upper left corner.**\ Open the list to see all the apps you have.\ When creating an app, select the app in the list and go to the app production page.\\ ▶ **Own App Management** If you go to **Manager -> My Menu –> App Management,** you can check the app information you have. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/appmake2.png) You can see all the information related to the apps you have.\ On your App Management page, you can remove (delete) apps, and you can change the order of app sorting. # Guide to create App Icon Image ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/App_icon.png) **Guide to creating App Icon Images** In this manual, we will guide you on how to create and register an app icon image on the Swing2App Maker(V2) – App Basic Information. ### **1. What is an App Icon?** **Represents an app image, which is the representative icon image displayed on the smartphone desktop.** Each brand has its logo. Just think that the app icon is the same as that logo. Register a specific logo that represents your app as an icon!
All the images you see on your phone are app icons. Users can create their app icon images like this. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **2. Guide to create an app icon** **App icons look small on the phone, but you need to work at a very high resolution.** **The recommended icon size for the app is 1024 px \* 1024 px.** **You should make it in the appropriate size and register it on the Maker(V2) page.** What do you need to put in such a big image? It’s should be less than 100px on the phone. But the difference between the image quality on the computer web and the image quality on a mobile phone is huge. \* Mobile phone photos are not only very high resolution but also very large. The more you go to the latest phone, the higher the capacity. The picture quality is also really good. Therefore, please be sure to work with the app icon which should be 1024px\*1024px according to the IOS recommended size\*\*.\*\* **Important!!** When creating an app icon image, it is recommended to use professional design tools – Photoshop, illustrations, etc. When working with Paint, PowerPoint, etc., the picture quality may be worse than you expected. **Also, app icons should be created separately by considering the style, brand, and logo of the app.** We will explain the icon image design below. ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **3. Guide on App Icon Design** **Some of you may have difficulty designing app icons.** **The biggest point of the design is to be ‘neat’.** -Don’t put too many characters. -You can also not put a lot of wallpaper and images. ![](/files/TumKvzbELpkrIg3Kzbfd) If you look at the app icon image on the market, we created just one logo of the brand. Just a few examples. > -We only added the official word Swing on the Swing2App logo. > > -Naver has a green background with English capital N + symbol logo > > -Facebook only include "F" Alphabet base How do you feel about designing? Also, if you look at the apps installed on your phone, you can check how they are being designed to inspire your design! **\*And as mentioned above, please be sure to use the professional image design tool.** ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **4. Apply the App icon** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/makeapp1.png) The App Icon can be attached to the **Maker(V2) → App Basic →App Icon** menu in the Swing2App.\ **You can register an app icon image that has been designed and sized.**\ Swing2App creation can be further edited, so you can apply it as a sample and edit it with another image.\ If the icon size is different, you can change the size with the image editing tool.\ \ **Image editor window** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/makeapp2.png) The image editing tool window is a page where only the size of the image can be adjusted according to the recommended size (it cannot design images) ![](/files/MnoBawMKtMXyMIz576m2) ### **5. App Icon size is different on Android and iPhones!** > Sometimes app icons look different on iPhone and Android phones. What can be the reason?\ > Or\ > An app icon is created in a circle, so why is the image seen as a round rectangle when it is installed on the phone? Some people ask this kind of question.\ The reason is that the icon styles provided by Android and iPhone platforms are different.\ This is because it shows the style set by the platform regardless of the actual icon design of the app.\ Let’s check the app icons shown on iPhone and Android phones below! **1) App Icon styles visible on iPhone**
The iPhone has the same icon style on all iPhone models. As you can see in the image above, the app icon is not a complete rectangle but is rounded and looks like a curved rectangle. \* So you can make the app icon in a square, round or rectangular shape. On the iPhone, all icon styles are presented in a round style. **2) App icon is shown on Android Phone – Android Version 8.0**
★However, android phones have different app icon styles depending on the version! In previous versions of 8.0, the original app icon looks like it’s also visible on your phone. Remember that App icons styles vary depending on the version and model of Android, so app icons may look different for each user’s Android phone. **Therefore, the app icon shape may vary depending on which iOS platform you use, for those who run the app with Swing2App, please refer to the app icon creation and design.** # Guide to Create an Idle Screen Image ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/idle-screen.png) **▶ What is the Idle Screen Image?** The idle screen is an image that is displayed for a second or two before the app is launched.\ Since the idle screen image is a must have in the application, users should also pay attention to the production of the idle screen image while creating the application.\ ( If you look at the app on the market, it’s also necessary for publicity because it puts an image on the idle screen that can promote the company.) But what is important here!!\ **In swing2app, idle image is provided in square size (2282 \* 2282).**\ **Mobile phones are usually long vertical rectangles. If you put a square image, does the image appear broken or distorted? You may ask.**\ The reason for offering square size is that there are so many kinds of mobile phones with square size.\ So the official screen size provided by the application is (2282 \* 2282) px.\ **However, there are guidelines when creating an idle screen.**\ **After checking the production instructions, you need to create it according to the guide so that the image can be applied very cleanly without being cut off or distorted.** Check the manual to find out how to create the idle screen image. **▶ Idle Screen Guidelines** Please refer to the guidelines for the image to enter the idle screen.\ Usually the app idle screen will work in a square ratio. ![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/cd77965de445680da6ea8033bf1395c3.png) **Place the background image in the part that appears in blue, and the grey area in the middle is the part that will contain the important image and logo.**\ In other words, the entire image should be designated as the background image, and the important image should be placed in the center of the screen.\ That way, depending on the phone model, it may look normal without being cut or crushed.\\ **+Example of Idle Screen** ![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/700cd2c1b7a4831ea5913493b5432420.png) ![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/29e5f3bd706c18d530e5b35ac64d0923.png) ![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/52bfc1b281d44406caf4f8fbaf0ad27.png) Existing apps also provide **an important image in the center when you look at the idle screen and make the entire image a background image.** **Check out the instruction below.** ### **STEP.1 Production Method 1 – Launch Photoshop** **First, open Photoshop and work on it so that you can make an idle screen image!!** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B4.png) **1. Please first create a square image of 2282 \* 2282 size idle screen.**\ **2. Use the grid line to give a total of 9 equals. (You don’t have to pay for grids, but you need to be more accurate in your image work.)**\ **3. Center the square area of 750\*750 px.**\ \ \= A color has been added to the area to make it easier to understand.\ ( Let’s create it by adding color and once the image is finished, you can subtract the color.)\ **\* The grey part is the part of the background that covers the entire area of the image.**\ **\* And the image shown on the phone is the blue area.**\ Create an image by putting the image or logo of the company you want to make into the blue area.\ \ **\* Only work inside the blue area.** **The grey color is cut off on the phone, so make sure not to cross the blue area.** ### **STEP.2 Insert an image into the blue area** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B42.png) Place the logo or image in the blue area you created.\ You can create your own image, but the best thing is to put your company’s logo.\ If you want to create a separate promotional image, just place it inside the area.\ \ We place Swing2App image which is the company’s logo.\ As you can see in the image, you can place it neatly into this area. ### **STEP.3 Deleting a background color** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B43.png) When you’re done working on the image, delete the background and area colors you’ve put in earlier.\ **\* If you remove the background color altogether, it will be transparent. It can be white or any other color you want!** ### **STEP.4 Upgrading Background Image** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B44.png) If you just want to cover the background image with a solid color,\ You can upgrade the background image and add the effect.\ The background image looks cut off on your phone, so you might want to give it a brush effect rather than a large image.\ \ If you look at the atmospheric screen guidelines and create an image, it will never be cut off or distorted on your phone. Let’s Go!!\\ ### **STEP.5 Check Idle Screen Image on Phone and run the Application** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B46.png) **An idle screen image is one that appears after running the app.** **I registered the idle screen image created above.**\ **Obviously we made it square but it fits very well into the rectangular cell phone screen.**\ **\*\*Please create an idle screen image in this way.** **▶Create Idle Screen Image with Paint!!** **If you don’t have Photoshop, it’s hard to create an idle image! But you can also create it using paint!** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B45.png) 1\. Launch Paint, and then create an image of size 2282 \* 2282 from the \[Resize] menu at the top.\ 2\. And select the \[rectangular shape] tool tip and make it 750\*750 size in the center.\ (It’s not 750 size, it’s 749, but the error is fine)\ 3\. You can then create an image inside the area just like you saw in Photoshop.\ 4\. After creating, delete the rectangular area. **▶ Incorrect Screen Image 1** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B47.png) When you create an idle screen image, you do not create a center image area, as in the method above.\ **If you fill an image with a full background size, it will be cut off or vertically distorted when running the mobile phone app!**\ Never create an image that fills your screen!! **▶Incorrect way to check your idle screen image** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B48.png) **▶Incorrect Screen Image 2** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B49.png) And the 2nd one is also not the right way.\ **It is the case where you fill the entire screen with text (text). Even in this case, the text is cut off or the image seems to be long.**\ **We** usually recommend that you do not put a lot of text on the idle screen image. We recommend putting a simple image. **▶ Incorrect way to check the idle screen image** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%8C%80%EA%B8%B0%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B410.png) If you register this image as the idle screen image, it looks really ugly, right? The image text is cut off and distorted and the resolution is terrible. So, the idle screen image must follow this guidelines.\ \ \ This is the guide for the idle screen image applied to the app and how to create it. \ **\*\* Things to remember!!**\ **Instead of filling the entire atmosphere with the image, leave the background image on the outside (the part that can be cut off), and apply the image only to the center square area!!** # Image Editing Tool ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Image_edi.png) ▶ **What is an Image Editing Tool?** **Image Editing Tool is an easy way to edit the image size when creating an app provided by Swing2App.** If an image size you want to upload when creating an app is different from the recommended size mentioned in the production method, you can easily change the size. The image editing tool provided by Swing2App allows you to easily edit and upload images to your desired size. This manual will tell you how to use the image editing tools that can be used to attach app icon images. **▶ Where to use Image Editing Tools?** When creating an app, it can be used from the menu that requires image upload. **\*Image Editing Applicable Menu: App Basic Info) App icon, idle screen image/web template page image attachment/market upload image attachment.** When uploading an image that does not fit the specified size, the image editing tool window appears. Just resize and upload it on the image editing tools page. > **When creating an image, the app icon image and the app idle screen image are placed in the app basic information item.** > > **At this time, the image size should be inserted according to the standard size provided by Swing2App to upload.** ### **1. Select an app icon** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_icon-1.png) When you select an app icon image, a file attachment window appears where you can upload an image. Click the \[Upload Image] button here to attach an image from the file. ### **2. The Image Size does not match** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-12.27.54.png) The required App icon image size is 1024 X 1024 px. If the attached image does not match the size, a pop-up window appears to remind about the required size as shown in the above image. If you select ‘OK’, you will be directed to the image editing tool window. ### **3. Image Editing Tool** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_icon1.png) As you can see in the image, the (blue line) area is designated as the image size to be uploaded in the image editing tool window. You can select the blue line with your mouse to pull or reduce it. You can edit the image to fit the area. If the image is large, simply drag the area with the mouse to apply the desired image. **\* If you upload an image smaller than the size you need to upload, you may need to increase the size of the original image, which may result in poor image resolution.** (This happens when the uploaded image size is smaller than the image size above 1024×1024). Therefore, **we recommend that you use an image that is larger than the specified size!!** When you finished editing the image, select the \[Upload (Finish)] button. ### **4. Correct Image Size** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_icon2.png) The image size has been edited. Check the uploaded image in the file attachment window and select the \[Apply] button. **▶ View how to use the Image Editing tools** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_04_13_47_44_228.gif) **5. Register the App Icon Image** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_icon3.png) If the image is edited with the size editing tool, the icon image is registered normally. **–The method of editing the app icon image and the idle screen image is the same.** **–If the size does not match, please register the idle screen by adjusting the size through the image editing tool.** **Please refer to the post for the app icon creation guide.**\ **☞** [**\[Go to the app icon creation guide\]**](/manual/maual/appbasic/appicon) **App Basics – App icon, in addition to the idle image.** **\*You can also use the image editing tool to register images on the web template page or register graphic images in the market upload application!** **Edit Web Template Image Size** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp_edit.png) **How to use the Template Page**\ **\[Maker(V2) – Page menu – Import user page – Move template page creator – Select template]**\ \ Select the template page and select a button to attach an image.\ (The above image is a background image of a restaurant template.)\ The template’s background image size is 1024 × 1546.\ When you upload an image that doesn’t fit, a pop-up window with the message, “The image doesn’t match the size. Do you want to fix it?” appears.\ Selecting ‘OK’ will take you directly to the image editing tool. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp_edit1.png) As you can see from the image, the (blue line) area is designated as the image size to be uploaded in the image editing tool window.\ You can adjust your uploaded image to fit the area.\ When you finished editing the image, select the **\[Upload]** button and the image registration is completed! **Market Upload Request – Edit Graphic Image Size** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EC%9D%B4%EB%AF%B8%EC%A7%80%ED%8E%B8%EC%A7%91%EB%8F%84%EA%B5%AC.png) **Market Upload is available when you apply for a Play Store or App Store upload on Swing2App.**\ \[Manage Version – Production history – Upload request] button is available. When uploading to the market such as the Play Store and App Store, you need to include screenshots, graphic images, etc.\ Play Store screenshot images do not exceed minimum and maximum length,\ but graphic images must be sized exactly as shown above.\ **Graphic image (1024×500), if you can adjust the image size, you can change the size immediately by using the image editing tool.** When you select the graphic image button, you’ll see an image upload window.\ Select the image you want to upload, and if it doesn’t fit, go to the image editor page. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_icon1.png) As you can see in the image, the **(blue line) area** is designated as the image size to be uploaded in the image editing tool window.\ You can adjust your uploaded image to fit the area.\ When you finished editing the image, select the **\[Upload]** button and the image registration is completed. **When uploading an image while creating an app, you can use the image editing tool to register and adjust the image size easily according to the standard size.** # Design Theme Manual Step for Design Theme. Please select a sub-category and check the manual on how to make a design theme. # Prototype UI Design ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/prototype_ui.png) **Introduction to Prototype UI Styles in Swing2App** **Swing2App offers a total of 7 design styles: slides, tops, footers, drop-down lists, drop-down boxes, pushes, and web-view menus.** Check out the manual and see the prototype app screen with each prototype design description. **\* Prototype Singularity 1** **If you change the prototype menu style, you’ll need to recreate your app to see the new version to reflect your edits.** Example) At first I made a slide menu, but I want to change the prototype to a footer style. \=Prototype is not an item that reflects the changes in real, so you must recreate the app through the app production request to reflect the changes! **After pressing the request button for app creation, update it to soft update = \[app re-launch] and you can update without the hassle of reinstalling.** **\* Prototype Singularity 2** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/prot.png) **You can’t make changes to a web view based (push, web view) prototype → after creating an app with a regular prototype (slide, top, footer, drop-down list, drop-down box).** **\*If you need to change the prototype based on the web view, you need to create a new app.** **Press + \[Create Additional app] button to proceed.**\ \ And likewise! **\*After creating a web view based (push, web view) prototype → You can’t change it to a regular prototype (slide, top, footer, drop-down list, drop-down box).** **+Regular prototypes (slides, towers, footers, drop-down lists, drop-down boxes) can be freely changed.** \\ **\* Web View Menu Features** The web view menu has a few special features that are different from other prototype menus. (1) Home address renewal: If you renew your home address (URL), you need to recreate your app. \*Request for App production is required. (2) Using unlimited web view products: You can use an unlimited number of web views without paying for a limited period. You can’t change your home address if you use unlimited items. ★Please check the manual on how to use the web view of unlimited products. ☞ [**\[For Swing2App unlimited web view use plug-in\]**](/manual/appmanage/pay/webview-unlimited) **▶ App production page – When applying the prototype in the design theme, the design is applied directly to the virtual machine on the right.** **Check out the animated images to see how the prototype design changes on the virtual machine.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_04_14_12_14_652.gif) ### **1. Slide Menu** The slide menu does not expose the contents of the categories that create the app from the beginning. It is designed so that when you touch the sliding icon, you can see the contents of the category as the screen moves over. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-22.21.04.png) **▶ App Launch Screen – Apply Slide UI** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/a@3x.png) You can use it by sliding the screen, and you can select an icon to see the menu window. \ **★ TIP to Use Slide Style** Existing slide styles: In addition to creating menus on the right and left sides, you can also create menus either only on the left side or the right side. After deleting the 1 menu, you can create it with the menu button on the left side or the right side only. **Image Reference)**\\ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/b@3x-1.png) **★How to use** Maker(V2) page> Design theme → Prototype: Select slide> Page menu →**Delete all right or left sub-menu**→ Save → Request app production ### **2. Top Menu** In the top menu, **categories, bulletin boards, etc.,** are located **at the top** of the **home screen**. When you touch the menu, the categories corresponding to the menu are displayed on the entire screen. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-21.50.08.png) **▶ App Launch Screen – Top UI** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/c@3x-1.png) In the Top Style, **you can check the subcategory contents by selecting the menu located at the top**. You can easily check the entire menu at a glance. ### **3. Footer Menu** The footer menu is located at the bottom of the home screen. Click the icon to expand the contents of the category across the phone screen. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-21.57.03.png) **▶ App Launch Screen – Apply UI Footer** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/e@3x-1.png) In contrast to the top menu, **this menu is located at the bottom.** Selecting the same category opens a sub-category. ### **4. Drop Down List Menu** The drop-down style is a style with one top menu, **cascading menus, and categories.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-21.54.45.png) **▶ App Launch Screen – Apply Drop-Down UI List** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/d@3x.png) **The drop-down cascades the sub-categories when you select the parent menu.** You can organize multiple menus and categories, which can be useful if you need to put a lot of menus in your app. ### **5. Drop-Down Box Menu** ‘Drop-down Box’ is the same as the ‘Drop-down List’ prototype, and only 1 menu is shown at the top of the home screen. **When you select a menu, the box-shaped square sub-menu opens.**\\ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-22.01.29.png) **▶ App Launch Screen – Apply Drop-Down Box UI** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/f@3x.png) **The drop-down box opens up a square sub-menu when the top menu is selected.** ### **6. Push Menu** Push styles are styles that move your mobile website to your app. The push-only prototype design gives you the freedom to send push, and the bottom of the screen category menu makes it easy to move around the app.\\ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-22.22.28.png) **▶ App Launch Screen – Apply Push UI** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8%ED%91%B8%EC%8B%9C%EC%95%B1.png) Use the Navigation Bar at the bottom to go to the previous step, the next step, and the home screen. Click the bottom push settings button to turn on or off the push notifications. **★** [**\[Super Simple! Go to the Push Version App Production Manual\]**](/manual/maual/appbasic/push-webview) ### **7. Web View Menu** The web view is also a method of moving a website to an app in the same way as Push. **\*The app does not create a separate menu or icon and does not send push.** **Use the app as a menu and category for the site you entered.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-22.22.36.png) . **▶ App Launch Screen – Apply Web View UI** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8%EC%9B%B9%EB%B7%B0%EC%95%B1.png) Since the web view has left the website itself in the app, the app design is very neat and easy to create. If you have a mobile-only site, you can create a mobile-optimized app. **★** [**\[Super Simple! Go to the Web View Version of the App Production Manual\]**](/manual/maual/appbasic/push-webview) **The prototype can be set up on the \[Maker(V2) Page – Design Theme].** **Feel free to create your app through a variety of prototype designs.** **After selecting the prototype, you can also set the skin color to whatever color you like.** **The design theme is immediately reflected through the virtual machine on the right, so please compose the design theme with the content that matches the app.** # App Main Design Style ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/design_theme.png) **What is the app main design style?** The main design of the app is the ability to configure the design by setting the options in the style that the user wants, in addition to the original swing2app setting design theme. If you select a prototype in the design theme and set the skin color, it will be displayed as it is set in the app. When you add this feature, you can put a background image in your main home page, shade it, or make it transparent. **\*The app’s main design style is optional, not a mandatory feature. It is optional!! So please check and apply the style you want. ^^** ★ **How to use App Main Design Style** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/Tutorial_ContentsTutorial_09.jpg) App main design style can be found in the design theme page. You can select a prototype, choose a skin color, and then check it out. These features are not required, but they are optional, so you don’t have to apply them. ### **1. App Main Design Style – Default** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/Tutorial_ContentsTutorial_10.jpg) If you check **\[Default],** other styles will not be applied, and the styles set in the design theme will be applied. If you want to make a default style, please check ‘Default’. ### **2. App Main Design Style – Image-Based** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/Tutorial_ContentsTutorial_11.jpg) If you select \[Image-based], you can register the background image. Please register the image as an attachment. When you add an image, the app introduction screen is overlaid with a background image and appears on the main home screen. (The original swing2app intro page only shows text without a background image). **★ There is no recommended size for the background image to be included in the main design.** **Based on the center of the background image, the horizontal size is 1024 pixels and the vertical size is 1900 pixels.** Therefore, **when inserting a background image, it is recommended that you insert an image with good resolution and image quality so that the surrounding background, rather than a specific image, is cut off.** ![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/c003bede540bd90bb76e09e07e83c488.jpg) (Example image: Please put the background image like the above image) **If you put a normal background image, and it doesn’t fit well with the size of your phone screen, the image will be split or the image will be cropped.** \*Image-based background images are entered into background images on the home screen. Therefore, if you do not link the swing2app page as shown above, you may not see the image applied to the background. ### **3. App Main Design Style – Image-Based + Background Mask** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/Tutorial_ContentsTutorial_12.jpg) We’ll add a background mask to the image you selected above. **The background mask is simply a shade.** **It’s shaded on top of the image.** If you apply the image and the background mask together, like the image captured above, it appears with a blue shade on top of the background image. For normal shading, if you have a background image and the text is hard to see, you can darken it to make the text look better. ### **4. App Main Design Style-Transparency** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/Tutorial_ContentsTutorial_13.jpg) If you select **\[Transparency]**, the navigation on the top becomes transparent so that the applied web template appears as one main page. And when you open the menu, you can see the background behind the menu, with transparent shades applied to the original design color (blue color). If you compare the images when you set the default style above, you’ll understand how it’s different. **\*The menu applied to the home screen of the above image is applied to the web template page – camping the main page.** **★Additional TIP** **When you set transparency in the main design style, the home screen is styled much better if you create it as a web template page or an image page.** **★**\*\* Please also check how to set the app navigation style\*\* **☞** [**How to set the app’s navigation design style**](/manual/maual/designtheme/navigation-styles) # App Navigation Styles ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_navi.png) **What is App navigation style?** Navigation is the Bar area where the app menu name is listed. Look at the image. When you **move the menu applied to the app, like the image you attached, you will have a Bar with the menu name on top.** **That area is called navigation.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EB%84%A4%EB%B9%84%EA%B2%8C%EC%9D%B4%EC%85%98%EB%B0%94.png) **App navigation style is a function to configure the design by setting options to the style you want in addition to the navigation style set in Swing2App.** In the past, when you selected a prototype from a design theme and set the skin color, it would look like it was set into an app just as you typed it. Adding this feature allows you to place an image in the navigation area, or shade it to make it look transparent. \*The app navigation design style is not a required feature, but an option. It’s optional! Please check and apply the style you want. **★ How to use the app navigation Style** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/Tutorial_ContentsTutorial_09.jpg) **App navigation design styles can be found at the Design Theme stage.** **You can select a prototype, choose a skin color, and then check it out.** **These features are not required but are optional, so you don’t have to apply them.** ### **1. App Navigation Style – Default** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/Tutorial_ContentsTutorial_14.jpg) **If** you check **\[Default]** other styles will not be applied, and the styles set in the design theme will be applied. If you set the skin color to blue, the navigation will also be shown as a blue color. If you want to make a default style, please check ‘Default’. ### **2. Navigation App – Register background image** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/Tutorial_ContentsTutorial_15.jpg) If you select \[Background image registration], you can register background image in navigation. Please register your image as an attachment. When you add an image, the background image is displayed on the navigation area as shown in the attached image. **★ There is no recommended size for background image for app navigation.** **When entering the navigation area, it is adjusted to a pixel size of 360 px(horizontally) \*56 px(vertically) around the center background of the image.** When inserting a navigation background image, it is recommended to insert an image in a pattern format. ![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/d58833f4499dc4ec9a4202c52ca2f742.jpg) (Example of background image) **If you put a normal background image and it doesn’t fit properly, the image will be split or will be cropped.** **Therefore, even if the image is cut off, it is recommended to insert an image with an unrelated pattern style!!** ​ ### **3. App Navigation Style – Background Image + Background Mask** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/Tutorial_ContentsTutorial_16.jpg) Let’s apply \[Background Mask] to the image selected above. **The background mask is simply shaded.** **It’s shaded on top of the image.** You can set the degree of shade and shading by selecting a background mask, selecting a color, and setting transparency. If the image and background mask are applied together like the image captured above, it will appear with orange shade color on the background image. For normal shading, if you have a background image and the text is hard to see, you can darken it to make the text look better. \[**Please check the app main design style setting method]** **☞** [**How to set up the app’s main design style**](/manual/maual/designtheme/main-designstyle) # Applying Slide Prototype ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/slide_porto.png) **Prototype: Use the Slide UI Application** The slide style is a style where each menu is placed on the right and left side of the app screen. **You can use this to open either only the menus on the left or the menus on the right side.** Please check the manual on how to use the slide application. **Image Reference)** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/b@3x-1.png) Like the above image, the **menu button is on the left side and is placed on the left side only.** It doesn’t matter if you slide to the left or right, you can place it where you want. **★ How to use** **Maker(V2) Page > Design Theme → Prototype: Select Slide> Page Menu → Delete All Right or Left Sub-menu** **→ Save → Request App Production** ### **1. Prototype: Select Slide Menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-22.21.04.png) **Please go to Swing2App Maker(V2) Page → Design Theme.** First, select the prototype as ‘Slide’ in the design theme phase – Maker(V2). **Since one menu is deleted at random, you can select the slide design.** ### **2. Deleting a Sub-Menu** Select the slide menu and from the page menu, delete all the menus under the right menu. First, delete all the sub-menus on the right menu. -Select the menu and press the \[Delete] button to delete it. -Please press the \[Save] button on the top. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/delete1.png) Remove all the menus on the right and move it to the left slide! **\* Precautions** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/delete2.png) **You can’t delete the top menu that says \[Right Menu]. This is the default menu that can’t be deleted.** **▶ If you look at the animated image, you can check more easily.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_04_14_27_31_866.gif) \*Please delete and save all sub-menus. The menu on the right cannot be deleted, so just leave it. You can choose not to display the icon, but you do not have to delete it. Therefore, you only need to delete the sub-menus. ### **3. Delete completed – Check virtual machine** After the sub-menus are deleted, you can see that all the right menus are gone through the virtual machine! **Click \[App Creation Request]** to complete the production with the left slide style. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/left_icon.png) ### **4. App Launch Screen** **\[Left slide menu]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/left@3x.png) **\[Check the app launch screen with GIF]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_04_14_26_34_566.gif) **★ Information** \* Since the new app creation will reflect the function, please click \[App Creation Request] after creating the app and receive the new version. \* You have deleted the menu from the app production page, but you will not lose any content written on the menu. Even if you delete the menu-gallery bulletin board, the actual bulletin board is not deleted, but the menu reflected in the app is deleted. \* You can check it on the virtual machine, so please check it with the virtual machine and download the app and test it. # Page Menu The manual step for page menu. Please select a subcategory to check the production instruction manual for the page menu. # Page Menu – Main Menu Management ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page_menu.png) **How to operate the main menu in the \[Page menu] step** **※What is the page menu?** This is the third production stage of the **Swing2App Maker(V2) page.** **※What is the main menu?** During the page menu step, create **the main home screen, categories, and menus for your app.** Page menus are the most important step in app production, and you can apply the main home screen and menus that create your app. Check out how to configure Main Page & Menu at the page menu level. **\* Check 1 to 2 step manual on how to create an app!** **▶** [**Check Swing2App production manual**](/manual/maual/appbasic/app-manual) **Maker(V2) Page – Page Menu Step** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-20.26.38.png) The page menu level is provided with menus set by default. Users can create their own menu by editing or deleting them. You can also manage the menu by selecting Add or Delete New Menu. You can set the home screen and category by using various menus. ### **STEP.1 How to create a home screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/wen_home-1.png) The home screen is the main screen that you see when you launch the app, and you can configure how you want the main screen to appear. Swing2App menus – You can apply menus such as web links, swing2app pages, user pages, bulletin boards, and images. **\*Please check the home screen production manual for details on the home screen.** ☞ [**\[View how to create a home screen\]**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/appintroductionpage) **1. How to set up your home screen: Apply Web Link** **The home screen can be applied to a variety of menus. Let’s apply a web link.** **\[Production method]** 1\) Click the \[home screen] and a menu settings page will appear on your right. 2\) You can rename the menu at the top of the home screen. (Unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3\) Select the Web link menu in the menu settings. (Swing2App homepage URL: [https://support.swing2app.com](https://support.swing2app.com/)) 4\) Enter the web link URL in the bottom area. 5\) Click apply 6\) Press Save to complete! ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%E1%84%92%E1%85%AA%E1%84%89%E1%85%A1%E1%86%AF%E1%84%91%E1%85%AD-2.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-01-at-20.35.01.png) ★ **Precautions** **There are sites that sometimes prohibit embedding when applying web links.** **\* Portal sites such as Naver, Daum, YouTube, social media sites (Instagram, KakaoTalk, Facebook) are some of the leading sites that prohibit embedding!** **In particular, blogs or Daum café that is operated by Naver are blocked and may not work properly in the home screen.** **So on the app home screen weblink – avoid these portal sites and social media sites!** **For more information on how to create your home screen, please check out this post!** ☞ [**\[View how to create an app home screen\]**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/appintroductionpage) **2. Check the home screen application** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_04_14_33_49_372.gif) **Once you have applied the home screen, then apply the menu.** ### **STEP.2 Menu management** Swing2App has basic settings to help users create their apps. You may be wondering that this is not the menu that you put in, **\*\* In this case, you can delete the menu and create a new one or use the existing menus.** **1. Delete Menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/delete-1.png) **▶ How to delete default menus** **\* You can organize the menus by deleting the unnecessary menus.** If you want to delete the menu called “UI”, select the \[UI] category and select the trash can \[Delete] button. Menus can be deleted in this way.\\ **▶ Delete menu thumbnail** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_04_14_36_03_289.gif) **2. Add a new menu (Add category)** 1. Select the location to add a new menu item\*\*.\*\* 2. Click on **Add a category.** 3. Enter the menu name. 4. Menu type: Select which menu to apply. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Save. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/add_menu.png) **You can see the new menu is created when you look at the virtual machine.**\\ \ **▶ How to add a sub-menu with animated images** **3. Move Menu: Upper menu or lower menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make10.png) How to add a sub-menu below the menu you have created. Select the menu to move and drag the mouse to where you want to move. The menu is completed by the position you drag. – Can be configured it as an upper or lower menu. **<= Top Menu** **+ Place a menu as a child of another menu** \ **▶ How to move menus with animated images** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_04_14_47_00_396.gif) In the page menu step, it is easier to create an app by first understanding how to use the menus. Therefore, please check the method of use for each menu first. **​** **\* Advanced settings are not required for production, so please only work on the 3-step page menu.** Once you’ve created the page menu, please click the request button to complete the app production. In addition to the basic production methods described above, \* Menu type: We offer a variety of menus, such as swing2app pages, user pages, and bulletin boards. The menu also provides all the manual instructions, so please check the app before you create it which will help you in production and operation methods. **Completed App Production** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/make11.png) When the final work is complete, press the Request App Creation button to complete the creation. # Creating an App Home Screen ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/App_homescreen.png) **How to create your app home screen** Maker(V2) – The first thing on the page menu is to create the home screen. Since the home screen is the first app main screen that appears when you launch the app, you need to apply the menu to match your app design and style. Swing2App provides a variety of menus to configure the home screen. If you are new to swing2app, you’ll have a hard time deciding what to use. This post will show you a variety of menus that can be applied to your home screen. **▶Menu Applied to Home screen** > 1. Web link application > 2. Applying Image > 3. Applying Bulletin Board > 4. User Page – Image Page > 5. User Page – Web Template > 6. User Page – Editor’s Page > 7. App Introduction Page > **Swing2App home screen production can be applied from the Swing2App Maker(V2) page → page menu → Main & Menu Management → Home screen.** ### **1. Apply Web Link** **The first step to decorate your home screen. Let’s create a web link!** **Production Method** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Click **Home Screen** with a mouse and a menu setting page will appear on the right side. 2. You can rename the menu at the top of the home screen. (If you do not change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **Web Link** menu in the **menu type**. 4. Click on the **Link Wizard** icon and the link wizard window will pop-up. Enter the web link in the link wizard window. 5. Click **Apply.** 6. Press **Save** to finish. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page1.png) **▶ It is easier to understand if you look at it** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_01_55_147.gif) **If you look at the mobile phone virtual machine on the right, you can see the swing2app homepage has been applied to the home screen.** ### **2. Apply Image** **The second step is to apply an image menu to register the image on the home screen.** **Production Method** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Click the **Home Screen** with a mouse and a menu setting page will appear on the right side. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **Image** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click on the **Link Wizard** icon and the link wizard window will pop-up. 5. Attache the image you want to display. 6. Click **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button at the bottom of the page. 8. Press **Save** to complete. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page3.png) ▶ **It will be easier to understand if you look at it** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_06_12_728.gif) **​If you look at the mobile phone virtual machine on the right, you can see that the image has been applied to the home screen.** \*Because it is an image, if you touch the image in the app, you will see the image detailed view like you see in a virtual machine. If you are uncomfortable with this part of the app, we recommend that you create a separate image page. ### **3.** **Applying the bulletin board** The third step is to apply the bulletin board to the home screen. **Production Method** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Click the **Home Screen** with a mouse and a menu setting page will appear on the right side. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **Bulletin Board** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the bulletin board list window appears, select the bulletin board to be applied to the home screen.\ \*The bulletin board must create all the necessary bulletin boards from the Manager page → Services → Bulletin Board management menu in advance. 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page7.png) **▶ It will be easier to understand if you look at it** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_10_27_267.gif) **If you look at the virtual machine on the right, you can see the bulletin board is applied to the home screen.** ### **4. Apply image page** **The fourth step is to create an image page and apply it to the home screen.** **Production Method** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Click the **Home Screen** with a mouse and a menu setting page will appear on the right side. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **User Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the Link Wizard window appears, select the **Image Map** to be applied to the home screen.\ \*You must create an image page in advance.\ If you haven’t created any pages, click \[Add Image-Based Page] to create a new one.\ \*The image page is applied with the ‘page name’ entered in the page creator as the home screen name. 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page5.png) ★ Please refer to the post below on how to create an image-based page. **☞**[ **\[View how to create an image page\]**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/image-page) **▶ It will be easier to understand if you look at it** **​** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_27_03_313.gif) **If you look at the virtual phone on the right, you can see that the image page has been applied to the home screen.** ### **5. Apply web template page** **The fifth step is to create and apply a user web template page.** **Production Method** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Click the **Home Screen** with a mouse and a menu setting page will appear on the right side. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **User Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the Link Wizard list window appears, select the **Page Template** to be applied to the home screen. 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on \*\*Save.\*\*​ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page4.png) **★ Please refer to the post below for how to create a web template page!** **☞** [**\[View on how to create a Web Template Page\]**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/template-page) \ ▶ **How to apply a web template page to the home screen. GIF** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_13_49_125.gif) ### **6. Apply Editor Page** **The sixth step is to create and apply a custom page-editor page.** **Production Method** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Click the **Home Screen** with a mouse and a menu setting page will appear on the right side. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **User Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the Link Wizard window appears, select the **HTML Editor** to be applied to the home screen.\ **\*At this time, the editor page must be created in advance.**\ **If you haven’t created a page yet, click \[Add / Manage HTML Editor Page] to create one.** 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page6.png) **★ Please refer to the post below on how to create an editor page.** **☞** [**\[View how to create an editor’s page\]**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/editor-page) **▶ How to apply an editor page to the home screen. gif** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_22_31_474.gif) ### **7. App Introduction Page** The app introduction page is the home screen that is set to the home screen when you create the app in the first swing2app. As a result, users can use the app introduction page as it is, and you can change the home screen in a variety of styles as described above. If you use the home screen in a different style and apply the home screen to the app introduction page again, apply it in the following way. **The seventh step is to create and apply a custom-editor page.** **Production Method** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Click the **Home Screen** with a mouse and a menu setting page will appear on the right side. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **Swing2App Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the Link wizard window appears, select the **App Introduction** to be applied to the home screen. 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page2.png) \*When the app introduction page is applied to the home screen, the home name is displayed as ‘App name’. **▶ How to apply the app introduction page on the home screen. gif** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_29_49_668.gif) **▶The description, address, email address, phone number, website address, etc. on the app introduction page can be modified in the advanced settings.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/info.png) **\[Advanced Settings] Steps on the app Maker(V2) page** **Settings – Select App Service Info to edit your phone, email, address, app description, website address, and more.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_14_13_06_13_367.gif) **This is how you create a home screen.** **Many different menus create the home screen, so decorate your home screen in a variety of styles.** **We recommend that you modify the menus other than the default app introduction menu.** **\*Push and web view style users do not need to create a home screen because they are created by applying the website link to the app.** # How to use Web Link ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Weblink-.png) **How to use the Web Link menu at the page menu?** Web Link is a menu that opens when you copy and paste the URL address (link) of a website.\ You can put a web link directly on the home screen so that the website pops up when you run the app.\ You can link to the web page you want by setting the web link for each menu.\ \ Example:\ After entering the web URL address in the \[Home Page] menu, you can also link the web URL address such as a blog, Instagram, Facebook to the website you entered when selecting the menu. \ How to use web links, as well as their options.\ \[Open in new window], \[Open as external app] function will also be announced.\ **We’ll show you how to use the \[web link] menu in the page menu step.** **★ Wait!!** Why do I need to see a new window or open it with an external app? Some sites are sometimes banned from loading when applying web links.\ \*Portal sites such as Naver, YouTube, SNS sites (Instagram, KakaoTalk, Facebook), etc. are some of the sites that have been banned from loading.\ When you link a site that is banned from loading in the app, the site will not open in the app. ☞ The way to solve the problem is \[open in new window], \[open as external app] function.\ It’s not about opening links inside the app, it’s about creating a new window in the app so that the site can be opened without problems.\ Therefore, if the linked site does not open in the app, please make sure you choose one of the two options. ### **▶ How to apply web links from the page menu** 1. Click **Add a category** and a menu item will be added. 2. You can rename the menu at the top of the home screen. (If you do not change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **Web Link** menu in the **menu type**. 4. Click on the **Link Wizard** icon and the link wizard window will pop-up. Enter the web link in the link wizard window. 5. Click **Apply.** 6. Press **Save** to finish. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page1.png) If you apply a link to the home screen, you can only apply it in a style that opens within the app.\ In the general menu except for the home screen, you can open in a new window or open in an external app. ### **1. Web Links – Opens in new window** **Let’s see how to apply ‘Open in New Window’ after selecting a web link on the Maker(V2) page!** Please go to the **Maker(V2)** page. 1. Move to the page menu step of the app production step. Click the **Add New Category** button on the Main Menu to add the menu. 2. Enter a name in the menu you created. 3. Select the **Web Link** in the **menu type.** 4. Click on **Link Wizard** and add enter the web link address (URL). 5. If you select **Open in a new window**, you have 2 options of ‘Open in new window’ and ‘Open in external app’. 6. Select **Open in a New Window(Pop-up).** 7. Select the **Apply** button. 8. Press the **Save** button. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page8.png) ### **2. Web Links – Open as External App** The opening function with an external app is the same as a new window. Please go to the Maker(V2) page. 1. Move to the page menu step of the app production step. Click the **Add New Category** button on the Main Menu to add the menu. 2. Enter a name in the menu you created. 3. Select the **Web Link** in the **menu type.** 4. Click on **Link Wizard** and add enter the web link address (URL). 5. If you select **Open in a new window**, you have 2 options of ‘Open in new window’ and ‘Open in external app’. 6. Select **Open as External.** 7. Select the **Apply** button. 8. Press the **Save** button. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page9.png) ### **3. App Launch Screen** **Launch the app to see how the new window is different from the external app view.** **▶ Open in a new window** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_43_05_689.gif) Select the \[Open YouTube in a new window] menu and you’ll see a new web page in the app.\ Do you see an internet search bar at the top?? ★ You will be redirected to the YouTube weblink you have applied as a new web page appears within the app. \\ \ **▶ Open as External App** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_16_43_42_250.gif) Select the \[Open with YouTube external app] menu.\ Then, **unlike the new window, you can see the YouTube app running.**\ **★ Weblink address you have applied – the application is running directly within the App.**\ **★ Opening to an external app will open after selecting a different application path if the app is not installed on the phone.**\\ Opening in a new window, opening in an external app, etc., is the same as being able to open a web page, but there is a difference in the style shown in the app. Because it is optional, you can select and apply the menu the way you want. # Home screen: Applying App Introduction Page ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/home_screen.png) **App Home Screen Introduction Page** We will show you how to apply the app introduction page on the app home screen. ★The home screen can be selected and applied to a variety of menus. The app introduction is the initial home screen menu setting when creating a swing2app. Since the menu is provided as a sample, users are encouraged to make the home screen with different menus according to the app style. ### **1. Applying app introduction to the home screen** 1. Click the **Home Screen** with a mouse and a menu setting page will appear on the right side. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **Swing2App Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the Link wizard window appears, select the **App Introduction** to be applied to the home screen. 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Group-2684.png) **★ App introduction screen is applied as the initial default setting value when you first create an app with swing2app, so you don’t have to apply it separately.** However, if you change the home screen back to the app introduction screen using a different menu, you can apply it using the above method. ### **2. Edit the app introduction** **You can edit the app description, site address, and pages that link to the bottom banner that appears in the app introduction.** Go to the **Maker(V2)** 1. Advanced Settings. 2. From App Service Information. 3. You can edit the Phone number, email, site address, address, app description by pressing the EDIT button. 4. Press the Save button and it will be reflected in the app. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Group-2685.png) Changes can be checked through the virtual machine. The first time you create an app, you need to make an app to reflect it. When you edit the app again, it is automatically reflected in the app when you save it. ### **3. App Launch Screen** **If you select the icon banner at the bottom of the app introduction screen through the app launch screen, we will see how the page works.** **1) Make a call** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/home_call.png) **If you select the phone button, you will be redirected to the phone number page.** **2) Send Email** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/home_email.png) \ **If you select the mail button, you will be redirected to the email address you entered.** **3) Map-Location** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EC%96%B4%EC%95%B1%EC%86%8C%EA%B0%9C1.png) **When you select the Map button, the next – map site opens, and the map and location are shown at the address you entered in settings.**\\ **4) Share** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/home_share.png) Selecting the Share button opens a window where you can share the app with various applications. # How to use file attachment ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/fileatt.png) **Menu type: How to use the file attachment function** The file attachment is provided in the menu type of the page menu level, so it can be easily applied. File can be attached to document files such as images (png, jpg, gif), word, ppt, and pdf. **Please check the location of the file attachment function, how to apply the file attachment app, and the app execution screen through the manual ^^** **▶ Where can I use the file attachment?** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/Group-2744.png) You can use the \[Attach file] function in the app creation page-step 3 page menu-menu type for file attachment. ### **1. Applying file attachments to apps** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/Group-2745.png) I’ll introduce you to App Production V2! The existing version of app production has a different design, and the application method is the same!! App Production – Go to the page menu level. 1\) In the Main & Menu Management, select the \[Add Category] button to add a new menu. 2\) Enter the menu name 3\) Menu type: Select \[Attach file] 4\) Click Link Wizard. 5\) Click the + icon on the file attachment to register the attachment. After registering, please click the reflect button. 6\) Apply button 7\) Click the Save button to complete app reflection. ### **2. App execution screen: File download** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/4@3x.png) If you select the file attachment menu in the app, you will be taken to the download page. Touch the file icon to download it. ​ ​ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/5@3x.png) You can also use the share button! You can share the attached file by email or other applications. ^^ **▶ Check with the animated image** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_08_13_16_20_45_354.gif) **▶ Attach image file** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_08_13_16_15_44_707.gif) The image file attachment method is the same. **\[Information]** 1\) Files can be attached to document files such as images (png, jpg, gif), words, ppt, and pdf. 2\) The capacity that can be uploaded at one time is 10MB. 3\) We do not recommend files that are too large because files are also counted as app size. For example, if a video file is too large, it is recommended to use it as a web link (Youtube link) because it takes up the app’s capacity!! 4\) Only one file can be uploaded to the attached file. (Multiple files cannot be registered) If you need to upload multiple files, you need to create multiple categories and upload them to each menu. Or, if you use the file attachment function within the post using the bulletin board-post, you can attach multiple files to the body. # How to use the image attachment ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/imgatt.png) **Menu type: How to use the image attachment function** Image registration is provided in the menu type of the page menu level, so it can be easily applied. **Please check the image attachment function location, how to apply it to the app, and the app execution screen through the manual ^^** ### **▶Where can I use the image attachment?** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/Group-2775.png) For image attachment, you can check the \[Image] menu in the App Production page-Step 3 page menu-Menu type. Select the image menu and register the desired image file, and you are done! ### **1. Attaching images to apps**​ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/Group-2776.png) **\*\*Introduced as an app production V2 version** App Production – Go to the page menu level. **1) In the Main & Menu Management, select the \[Add Category] button to add a new menu.** **2) Enter the menu name** **3) Menu Type: Select \[Image]** **4) Select Link Wizard.** **5) You can register an image file by clicking the + shape icon in the file attachment. After registering, please click the reflect button.** **6) Apply button** **7) Click the Save button to complete app reflection.** ### **2. App execution screen: Image applied screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/3@3x.png) If you select the image registered menu, you can check the image registered on the screen. If you touch the image with your hand, the image detail view window will open. ​ **★ Image detail view window** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/1@3x.png) You can zoom in and out with two fingers, and there is a download button and a share button. **▶ Image Download** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/imgd.png) If you click the download button, the image is downloaded to your phone and saved. If you go to the gallery (photo album) menu on your phone, you can check the downloaded image. ​ **▶ Share** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/s1-1.png) If you select the share icon at the bottom, you can share the image with other apps. ^^ **Image size guide**​ Among the questions that many people ask, you ask about the image size. Since the image is shown according to the size of the mobile phone, there is no exact size and the same size for all phones. If you want to work tightly on the screen, please work with the **Android phone standard size of 1080px and 1920px.** The image shown in the manual was also registered as the image worked at the above size. ​ The vertical part of the image is adjusted to fit the width of the screen. Therefore, when viewed from a phone, the horizontal screen fits perfectly. **The vertical length may be longer on the screen or the screen may remain depending on the phone model.** ​ Please insert the image and adjust the size while checking the screen applied to the phone. However, the image size mentioned is for Android phones and iPhones, and tablets are an exception. **\[Information]** 1\) All image (png, jpg, gif) files can be attached. When attaching a GIF file, you must select ‘All files’ to register the file. 2\) The capacity that can be uploaded at one time is 10MB. 3\) Since images are also counted as app size, we do not recommend registering too large images. 4\) Only one image file can be uploaded for image attachment. (Multi-image registration not possible) If you need to upload multiple images, you need to create multiple categories and upload them to each menu. \* Bulletin board-If you use the file attachment function within a post using a post, you can attach multiple files to the body. \*It is also recommended to integrate it into one image and apply it as an image page. 5\) When attaching an image, a detailed image view screen is provided. If you do not want the screen to appear, we recommend that you work with the user page- image page. # How to use Product category ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/prdcate.png) **Page Menu Menu Type: Product Category** **This menu is available only to those who use Swing Shop (shopping mall).** ### **1. Menu type: Apply product category** App creation screen Step 3 Moves to the page menu level. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/11/digicoup7@3x.png) 1\. From the menu set by default, click the **Add a category** to add a new menu.\ 2\. Edit the name of the added item in **Menu Name.**\ 3\. Select **Product Category** in the **Menu Type.**\ You do not need to change the menu name.\ \*Important\* Since the category name appears as the menu name, even if you enter the name, it is not reflected as the menu name.\ 4\. Click on **Link Wizard**(pencil icon).\ 5\. Search the name in search box in Product Category in the Link Wizard window.\ \* Category must be created in advance when registering Swing Shop products. Not applicable if there is no product category\ 6\. Click on **Reflect.**\ 7\. Click on **Apply** and\ 8\. Click **Save.** ### **2.Where can I register product categories?** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/11/jdndk@3x-1.png) After applying for Swing Shop, you can register product categories in Manager → Shop →Products → Product Category page. ### **3. App launch screen) Product category application screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/11/Group-1875@3x.png) This is the screen with the ‘Product Category’ menu applied to the app. **\*Notes on using product categories** When applying a product category to a menu – **It is only available in the real product and digital product categories.** For reservation products, the calendar (screen where you can select the reservation date) appears first, so the product screen does not appear even if the product category is applied. Please pay attention to use! # How to use Weblink-linkeditor ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/weblink_link-wizard.png) **Web Link Link Wizard: How to apply Internet address, phone number, text message, email address** The web link provided by Swing2App can apply to a phone number, text message number, and email address in addition to the general website URL. This feature is available in the Link Wizard. Create an app-We will show you how to apply a web link using the link wizard at the page menu level. > **Link Wizard: Where can I apply Internet link addresses, phone numbers, text messages, and emails?** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Group-2615.png) **Manager page -> Step 3 Page If you come to the menu level, you can apply the menu.** **At this time, select Menu Type: Web Link and click the Load button at the bottom to open the Link Wizard window.** In the first web link category-you can use web link features such as Internet address, dialling phone number, sending text message, sending email, etc. Please check the application method for each menu and the app execution screen!! ### **1. Applying Internet Address (Site URL) Link** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Group-2609.png) 1. From the menu set by default, click the **Add a category** to add a new menu. 2. Edit the name of the added item in **Menu Name.** 3. Select **Weblink** in the **Menu Type.** 4. Click on **Link Wizard**(pencil icon). 5. Select the **Internet Address** tab in the Link Wizard window. 6. Enter the website URL link in the address field.\ (This is the address of a website such as the homepage, and when entering, please put the http\:// hyperlink) 7. Click on **Reflect.** 8. Click on **Apply** 9. Click **Save.** \* When entering the website’s Internet address, select ‘View in New Window’ to open the window. For SNS(social media) links such as YouTube and Instagram, please select ‘Open with an external app’. ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) ▶ **App execution screen – Internet address application screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Group-2616.png) We ran the app after connecting ‘Internet address’ in the link wizard. When selecting the web link menu, it moves to the applied website page. ### **2. Apply phone number** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Group-2610.png) 1. From the menu set by default, click the **Add a category** to add a new menu. 2. Edit the name of the added item in **Menu Name.** 3. Select **Weblink** in the **Menu Type.** 4. Click on **Link Wizard**(pencil icon). 5. Select the **Dial Your Number** tab in the Link Wizard window. 6. Enter the recipient’s phone number.\ \*Enter the number to be connected to the actual phone.\ \*Please enter only the number ‘–‘ Please do not enter special order characters!! 7. Click on **Reflect.** 8. Click on **Apply** 9. Click **Save.** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) ▶ **App execution screen – Phone number application screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Group-2617.png) We ran the app after connecting the ‘phone number’ in the link wizard. When you select the dialling menu, the call is connected to the number you applied. ### **3.Apply text message number** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Group-2611.png) 1. From the menu set by default, click the **Add a category** to add a new menu. 2. Edit the name of the added item in **Menu Name.** 3. Select **Weblink** in the **Menu Type.** 4. Click on **Link Wizard**(pencil icon). 5. Select the **Text Messages** tab in the Link Wizard window. 6. Enter SMS outgoing phone number.\ \*Enter the number where you can send the actual text message.\ \*Please enter only the number ‘–‘ Please do not enter special order characters!! 7. Click on **Reflect.** 8. Click on **Apply** 9. Click **Save.** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) ▶ **App execution screen – Text message number applied** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Group-2618.png) we ran the app after connecting the ‘text message number’ in the link wizard. When you select the Send Text menu, you can send a text message to the number applied. Please enter your mobile phone number where you can receive text messages! Screenshots are for testing purposes only. ### **4. Apply email address** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Group-2613.png) 1. From the menu set by default, click the **Add a category** to add a new menu. 2. Edit the name of the added item in **Menu Name.** 3. Select **Weblink** in the **Menu Type.** 4. Click on **Link Wizard**(pencil icon). 5. Select the **Send Email** tab in the Link Wizard window. 6. Enter SMS outgoing phone number. 7. Click on **Reflect.** 8. Click on **Apply** 9. Click **Save.** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) ▶**App launch screen – Email address application screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Group-2619.png) We ran the app after connecting ‘email address’ in the link wizard. When you select the Send Email menu, you can send the email to the applied email. **\*On your phone, you can send mail by running the mail application connected to the phone.** Example) When Google mail is linked, send after running gmail application / Send after running outlook mail when linked to Outlook It is sent from an email set for each user’s phone. **\*Important information​** Please note that the web link link wizard cannot be applied to the app home screen and can only be applied to the menu. # How to use User Page ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/usee.png) **Page creation tools and usage provided by the user page** We will tell you about the page creation tools provided by the user page. **▶ What is a user page?** User page is a menu type that provides a page creation tool for creating web pages. ​ **▶ Production tools provided by the user page**\\ **1) Web template page** Design template creation tool by industry. We provide a template with all the designs on it. Users can create web pages by simply entering text, images, etc., in accordance with the guidelines on the designed page. Users can create pages more easily by providing templates for each style and industry that are difficult to produce directly from the design side. ​ **2) Image page** This is a user editor creation tool that allows you to edit the image, apply links to the image, and apply tooltips. Images can be designed and loaded by the user, and multiple links can be applied over the image. It is useful for creating web pages that you want (image design) and various banners and creating web pages that apply multiple links. ​ **3) HTML editor page** You can freely arrange text and images as if you were posting in a blog or cafe. You can apply a variety of web links, videos, and text effects. The biggest feature is that users can freely create the style they want. \\ ### **1. Where can I check and create a user page?** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/user1.png) You can check the user page in the \*Maker(V2) → Page Menu Step 3. 1\) Menu type: User page selection 2\) If you select the Import (pencil-shaped icon) button 3\) You can check user page- page template, image map, and HTML editor in the link wizard window! 4\) Click the \[New +] shape button to go to the page creation tool screen. ​ **\*\*Please refer to the manual link below for how to make three user pages!** [**☞How to make web template page Go to manual**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/template-page) [**☞Go to the manual on how to make an image page**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/image-page) [**☞Go to HTML editor page how to make a manual**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/editor-page) ### **2. How to apply to the created user page app** **If you created all the pages in the above way, you should apply it to the app!** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/user2.png) **\*\*Introduced as an app production V2 version** Maker(V2) – Go to the Page Menu level. **1) In the Main & menu management, select the \[Add category] button to add a new menu.** **2) Enter the menu name** **3) Menu Type: Select \[User Page]** **4) Select import (pencil-shaped icon)** **5) In the link wizard window, select the desired page from the user page-3 page creation tools and click the reflect button.** **It is not selected until the page area lights up in blue.** **\*If you create a user page and select Refresh, it will be converted to the page you added or modified.** **6) Apply button** **7) Click the Save button to complete app reflection.** ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%98.png) **▶ Check how to apply** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_08_13_16_45_37_88.gif) After creating each page creation tool, open the app creation page again and you can see the completed page. Create a category and apply the user page. **\[Information]** 1\) User page creation tools are frequently used on the app home screen. You can put it in a sub-category, and you can decorate it with the app home screen, so please refer to the app creation. 2\) When modifying a user page, apply it on the app creation page after completing the modification-be sure to click the \[Save] button!! Please press. If you only edit it and do not save it on the app creation page, it will not be reflected as the modified content. 3\) Images registered on user pages are not counted! Since it is converted to a web page, it is not counted as an image file. 4\) For each user page, please refer to the usage manual and check the features of each page making tool to decorate the app. # How to create an Image Page ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/image_map.png) **We will tell you how to use the \[Image map] among the functions provided by the user page.** **▶What is an image page?** Image pages are custom editor tools that you create yourself. You can edit an image to apply a link to it and a tooltip. You can apply various links to images, which can be useful when creating an app. **▶Utilization TIP** 1. When multiple web links need to be applied to one image ex) Applicable to multiple links instead of one, such as homepage and blog. 2. When applying multiple bulletin board links to one image ex) Bulletin board links such as notice boards and free bulletin boards can be applied. 3. If you want to put a more detailed description of the image, you can apply the tooltip so that the message appears. 4. Can work on a banner – Create an image in banner style and specify the area to apply the link. **▶ If you want to put a full image on the home screen when creating an image page.** When creating an image page, if you want to put a full image on the home screen, please work with the mobile screen resolution standard of 1080px horizontally and 1920-2200px vertically. The vertical length may be slightly shorter depending on the design of the prototype and the mobile phone model.\ If the height is long, you can scroll down the page. If you can scroll like this, you can just keep the horizontal and the vertical size. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833-1.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **Image page apply Step** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/EN-%EC%9D%B4%EB%AF%B8%EC%A7%80-%ED%8E%98%EC%9D%B4%EC%A7%80.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **Image page application screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_18_54_49_115.gif) ### **STEP 1. Add an image page** **\* Image page operation can be added to the image page on the app page (Page Menu).** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Click **Add a category**. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **User’s Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the Link wizard window appears, select the **Image Map** and click **New.** 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page5.png) Since you need to create an image page first, just select the image page. When you’re done creating your image page, we’ll show you how to apply it to your app again. ### **STEP 2. Creating an image page** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-04-23-at-14.08.25.png) This will open a site where you can create an image page. **1.Register an image** Please register the image first. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/image1.png) Select **the image you want to register** by selecting the **\[Upload Image]** button or **\[New]** button. \*The image page is a function that puts a banner such as a link on the designed image, so you need to upload it as a completed image. > If you are working for the first time, it is a good idea to select the New button. > > If you need to reload an edited image in addition to your previous work, we recommend using the Upload Image button. **2. Create image pages** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/image2.png) Image page operations **Just check the “Shape Tool” to set the banner area on the image, the “Link action” to link to the area, and the “Default style” to set the area style.** > **★Basic style** > > -Background Color : You can color the area set by the tool. > > -Background Opacity : You can specify the transparency of the area set by the tool. > > If you don’t want the tool to be visible when you select the mouse, you can set the transparency to ‘0’. **3. Shape Tools – Check the Style** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/image3.png) **Tool shapes are available in points, rectangles, ovals, and polygons.** -When using a dot shape, click the mouse cursor on the image to create a dot. -When using a square or oval shape, place the mouse cursor on the image and drag from the left to create an area. -In the case of polygons, a point is drawn in several areas, and the point is again made to the point where the first point is taken to create a polygon area. **4. Apply the link** Once the zones are set up, let’s view how to apply links to them. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/image4.png) **To apply a link, select \[Link Action] on the right.** 1\) Mouse hover: A menu that applies how it works when hovering. Select \[Do Nothing] because you will only apply the link \[View: Do nothing, show tool tip]. 2\) Click Action: This menu is used to apply how to operate when the mouse is clicked. \[View: Do nothing, show tooltips, move links] Select \[Move links] because you’ll need to go to the link when you select. 3\) Link Wizard: A tool that allows you to select pages such as app menus and web links. Selecting the Link Wizard button brings up the ‘Link Wizard’ window as shown above. Here you can select the menu you want to move when you select the banner. **\*Precautions** **Menus and content within the app must be completed.** **If you haven’t done anything like bulletin boards or user pages, you won’t have a menu to choose from in the Link Wizard.** **Therefore, please use the link wizard on the image page after completing the production of content for the app.** In this manual, we chose the intro banner for the image, so we will select the ‘Swing2App Cafe Introduction’ template that we have worked with as a web template. You can select \[Reflect]. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/image7.png) Of course, in addition to the above menu, the link wizard can be applied to all other menus. **For example, if you want to move to a blog when you select a banner, select \[Link Wizard] and then \[Web Link] – enter the URL of the blog site address and reflect it.** **▶How to create an image page with GIFS** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_19_05_55_237.gif) **You can use the mouse ****hover style**** to color the background.** **You can also make the banner transparent by setting it to ‘0’ in the Background Opacity.** **▶Image Page Creation TIP** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_19_06_31_918.gif) Here is a TIP. If you use the **\[Duplicate Style button]** in the list, you **can import the same area style and default style.** You only need to change the link settings, so you can create it easily. **5. Complete Production** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/image5.png) The image page has been applied. Finally, enter the page name. (When the app is applied, it is displayed in the menu with the page name). Press the Save button and you’re done. Then go back to the app production page and apply the image page to the app. ### **STEP.3 Apply image pages to your app** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Select the menu item for which you want to apply the Image page. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen. 3. Select the **User’s Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. Select the newly added image page in the User page window and select the ‘Apply’ button.\ (If you do not see the added image page, refresh it.) 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/image6.png) The image page has been applied to the home screen. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-04-23-at-14.19.13.png) . . **Image Page Builder – Applying Tool Tips** In addition to linking link banners to image pages, we will show you how to apply tooltips. **What is a tooltip?** **Tooltips are used as a way to attach a message window-shaped icon to the image and add a description.** **▶ Tooltip application example) App launch screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/star_screen@3x.png) **▶ Image page – How to apply Tooltips** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Tool_tip.png) Like the web link method, select the area by dragging the area to the tool menu. 1. **Link Action**\ The Link Action is a menu that allows you to see how the tooltip will appear. 1. Mouse hover: Select \[Show Tool tips] view because the tooltip contents should be shown when mouse hover. 2. Click Action: Select the \[Do Nothing] view because only tooltips will be applied.\ \*Use TIP: You can create them using both the tooltip menu and the weblink menu. 2. **Text Style**\ Text Style is a menu for editing the text color, font, font size, tooltip box size, etc. created in the tooltip.\\ 3. **Tooltip content**\ Enter what you want to enter in the tooltip box. The tooltip is divided into titles (titles) and text (body) to create content.\ ​Press the Save button after it’s complete. You can see the tooltips applied. **As you can see in the image, you can hover over the specified area to see the tooltip box created.** Image pages created with tooltips can also be applied to apps. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-04-24-at-13.38.58.png) The method to apply to the app is the same as described above. > Go back to the Maker(V2) page – page menu.\ > 1\) Select Home Screen\ > 2\) Select Menu: User Page\ > 3\) Select Link Wizard button\ > 4\) Please select the Apply button after selecting the image page created and add in the user’s page window.\ > 5\) Select the lower Apply button and press the Save button at the top. # How to create a web template page ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/page_template.png) **How to create a web template page** The template page is a web page creation tool provided by the user page – a design template creation tool for each industry. Users can create web pages by simply entering text, images, and so on, as outlined on the designed page. By providing templates for each style and industry for web pages that are difficult to design directly, users can easily create pages. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833-1.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **Template Page Apply Step** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/EN-%ED%8E%98%EC%9D%B4%EC%A7%80-%ED%85%9C%ED%94%8C%EB%A0%9B.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **Web Template Page Application Screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_19_18_28_224.gif) One of the web templates offered by Swing2App is the main page of the \[hotel] **▶Industry-specific template style to view a group** ### **STEP.1 Adding template pages** Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Click **Add a category**. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **User’s Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the Link wizard window appears, select the **Page Template** and click **New.** A template creator window will open. 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp1.png) ### **STEP.2 Template Page Creator** **1. Create a new page** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp2.png) Template page creator site. Select **\[+New]** at the bottom of the site to open the **‘New Page‘** window. Select the page and select the **\[Add]** button. Currently, Swing2App provides template pages for various industries. Nail, Health, Hair, School, Restaurant, Law Firm, Delivery, Hotel, Spa, Moving, Market, etc… The templates are constantly being added and updated. If you have a design that is the same as or similar to the app you want to create, you can select that page type. Each template has a main page, a listing page, and an information page. Please use it according to your application. **2. Edit the page area​​** Let’s work with the ‘Restaurant’ industry template from various industries. **​1) Edit the main page of the restaurant** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp3.png) ​Each area of ​​the page is designed to be editable.\ ex) Main Page\ 1\) Main Title – Please enter your restaurant name or app name.\ 2\) Opening Hours – Please enter the opening hours of the restaurant.\ 3\) Menu (Button) List – You can use the contents you have set.\ You can change the name to the menu you want, attach a link, and click the button to go to another web page. ​ **​2) Edit the restaurant list page** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp4.png) The list page can also be edited by selecting the image, title, and content area of ​​each item. Please upload the image to the size listed. When you have finished entering the information, click the \[Save Data] button to save the changes. We provide all of the designs, styles, and tools that are provided, so you only need to follow the changes listed. **3. Template page top menu** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp5.png) **\[Production method]** You can see various menus at the top of the page production tool. 1. View in a new window – You can open the template page in a new window. 2. Correction area is not displayed – The correction area is captured as a block. If you don’t like it, you can remove the block by pressing the corresponding button. 3. Save Data – After editing the page, press the Save Data button to save the contents. 4. Delete page – If you do not need the page, you can delete it by pressing the Delete button. 5. Initialize page – If you want to work without anything, you can leave the tool alone and delete the set contents. 6. Change to default data – If you want to work and go back to the original page, you can go back by initializing the page. **4. Using the Link Wizard** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp6.png) You can link to each menu on the template page. If you select the \[Link Wizard] button on the right after selecting a button on the template, the Link Wizard window will open. Here you can apply various menus such as internet address (weblink), bulletin board, user page, specific posts, and file attachments. ### **STEP.3 Apply a template to your app** Now, if you’ve edited the template above, you’ll need to apply the template page you created to your app. Go to **Maker(V2)** and click **Page Menu.** 1. Select the menu item for which you want to apply the template page. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen. 3. Select the **User’s Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. Select the newly added template page in the User page window and select the ‘Apply’ button.\ (If you do not see the added web template page, refresh it.) 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp7.png) After creating a template, we are back to the app production page – page menu. You can see how the template page is applied through the virtual machine. **▶ App Launch Screen – Apply Restaurant Template** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/foodtemp.png) The template page is much easier to work with than you can see in the manual. We provide all the tools, so users only need to enter according to the tool. And we will continue to add different design pages for each industry, so please pay more attention. # How to create HTML editor page ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/html_editor.png) **What is the HTML Editor page?** One of the functions provided by the user page of the swing2app operation page is a menu that allows users to create their own web pages. You can freely place your posts and images as if you were typing them into a blog or café. You can apply web links, videos, text effects, and more. The biggest feature is that you can freely create the style you want. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833-1.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%8B%A8%EB%9D%BD1-1.png) **HTML Editor page Apply Step** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/EN-HTML.png) ### **STEP.1 How to create HTML editor page** **1. Select Add/Manage HTML Editor Page** On the **Maker(V2)** page – go to the **Page menu** level. 1. Click **Add a category**. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **User’s Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the Link wizard window appears, select the **HTML Editor** and click **New.** 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/html2-2.png) **2. Editor page creation screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-04-23-at-16.19.48.png) Select Add/Manage HTML Editor Page to open the Creator Site as shown in the image above. HTML editor pages are the same style as writing posts provided by swing2app. It’s the same as how to write a post, so it’s not hard to use. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/html-1.png) You can work in the style you want on the Editor Page Creator site. > **You can attach images, videos, and animated images.** > > **And because you can decorate text, you can specify options such as font and color.** > > **You can apply various styles through the tool bar menu at the top.** **When the editor page is completed, press the save button.** \*The page name is displayed as the screen title on the app launch screen. ### **STEP.2 Apply to Editor Page App** 1. Select the menu item for which you want to apply HTML page. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen. 3. Select the **User’s Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. Select the newly added editor page in the User page window and select the ‘Apply’ button.\ (If you do not see the added editor page, refresh it.) 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/html3-2.png) When the editor page production is completed, please come back to the app production page – page menu. \*If you place the editor page in the ‘home screen’, select ‘home screen’ in the main menu. If you place a page in the menu, you can add a new menu by clicking the \[Add] button. In this case, place the editor page on the home screen. 1. **Select Home screen** 2. **Select User Page** 3. **Click Link Wizard button** 4. **Select the newly added editor page in the User page window and select the ‘Apply’ button.**\ **(If you do not see the added editor page, refresh it.)** 5. **Select the Apply button at the bottom and press the Save.** **You can check the editor page reflected through the app virtual machine.** **Make sure your video plays well, and if you select a link to a web link, make sure you’re going to a linked web page.** Below, we’ll show you some examples of how to apply the editor’s page, so please check. ### **STEP.3 Editor Page Application Screen** **1. Web page style** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/html_cust@3x.png) You can even create a web page style by placing one large image. You can create a promotional image and register the image, and apply a web link (site URL) to set it to go to the linked site when you select the image. **2. Blog Style** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/html_air@3x.png) You can freely arrange text and images like a blog style. You can enter text and register an image to create it. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EC%98%81%EC%96%B4-%EC%97%90%EB%8B%A4%ED%84%B0%ED%8E%98%EC%9D%B4%EC%A7%80.png) You can also register your video. \ **\[Editor page production]** Editor pages can be customized to your style. 1. You can place an image and create it like an image page. 2. You can freely attach posts and images as if you were creating a blog post, and apply a video or web link. So, please plan on how to create it in advance and use the menu. # Swing2App Page – Signup, Login, Settings ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/gfhdjnckc.png) **Swing2App Page- How to apply to member sign-up, login, and setup apps and the App Execution Screen Manual** Swing2App Page is a menu that provides app essentials provided by Swing2App.\ Signing up, logging in, and setting up are typical app functions.\ In addition to this function, you can select various functions on the swing page and apply them to the app.\ I will tell you how to apply the membership, login, and setup page provided by the swing page to the app and the app execution screen.\\ ### **1. Swing2App Page: Sign-up** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/ysvjd.png) 1\) Select \[Add Category] button to create a new menu.\ 2\) Enter menu name\ 3\) Select Swing2App Page from Menu Type\ 4\) Select Link Wizard(pencil icon) button\ 5\) Select the Swing Function in the Link Wizard – Select \[Sign Up]\ 6\) Click \[Reflect] button.\ 7\) Select \[Apply] Button\ 8\) Press the \[Save] button to apply to the app. \*You can also check how the function is applied to the app through the web preview (virtual machine) of the Maker(V2). ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) **▶ App Execution Screen) Sign up for membership** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/jsbd@3x.png) This is an app execution screen with membership function applied. If you do not modify anything, the membership will be displayed as the default setting item – **ID, password, password confirmation, name (nickname).** The items on the membership form can be modified directly by the operator. \*Manager → Services → Subscription Setting → Modification on the membership form You can check the details of the member registration form setting when checking the link in the manual. **☞**[**Setting up the membership form**](/manual/appmanage/service/signup-id) ### **2. Swing2App Page: Login** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/ksuem.png) \*We’ll show you in Maker(V2).\ Go to the Create Apps page – Page Menu step. 1\) Select \[Add Category] button to create a new menu.\ 2\) Enter menu name\ 3\) Select Swing2App Page from Menu Type\ 4\) Select Link Wizard(pencil icon) button\ 5\) Select the Swing Function in the Link Wizard – Select \[Login]\ 6\) Click \[Reflect] button.\ 7\) Select \[Apply] Button\ 8\) Press the \[Save] button to apply to the app. \*You can also check how the function is applied to the app through the web preview (virtual machine) of the Maker(V2). ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) **▶ App Launch Screen) Login** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/ysvjdg@3x.png) This is the app execution screen with the login feature. The ID and password entry screen will be displayed. \*In addition to the regular ID, the ID field will be changed when setting the email or phone number ID. The login screen also displays the membership function. **▶ When login is complete, the login menu changes to ‘Logout’.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/isnld@3x.png) When you finish logging in after signing in, the login listed in the menu name is automatically changed to **→Logout.** ### **3. Swing2App Page: Settings** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/tdhg.png) \*We’ll show you in Maker(V2).\ Go to the Create Apps page – Page Menu step. 1\) Select \[Add Category] button to create a new menu.\ 2\) Enter menu name\ 3\) Select Swing2App Page from Menu Type\ 4\) Select Link Wizard(pencil icon) button\ 5\) Select the Swing Function in the Link Wizard – Select \[Settings]\ 6\) Click \[Reflect] button.\ 7\) Select \[Apply] Button\ 8\) Press the \[Save] button to apply to the app. \*You can also check how the function is applied to the app through the web preview (virtual machine) of the Maker(V2). ![](https://wp.swing2app.co.kr/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/%EC%BA%A1%EC%B2%9833.png) **▶ App Launch Screen) Settings** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/isnkd@3x.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/hsudjd@3x.png) This is the app execution screen with the setup feature applied. The setting includes both membership and login. Therefore, you don’t need to use the sign-up or login function and just apply the settings to the app. In addition to these features \*Notify-Push settings, check notification lists, share apps, check app versions, log in administrator, and close apps. Therefore, we recommend that you apply the setting function to the app when producing the app! Administrator login is a function that allows you to log in from the app as an administrator and operate it. You can find out how to use the function in detail by checking the link in the manual below. **☞**[**Go to see how to use the app manager menu**](/appguide/appoperation/app-administratormenu) **\*Important guidance** 1\)The member subscription, login, and settings provided on the swing page are not applicable to the home screen. It can only be applied to the app menu (category), so please use only the menu. 2\) We recommend that you use one function of ‘Login’ rather than sign-in and sign-in together. Or use the ‘Settings’ menu that comes with the member registration and login menu. 3\)The membership form can be modified at [**https://www.swing2app.com/view/app\_policy**](https://www.swing2app.com/view/app_policy) on the \[Member Subscription Form Settings] page. When the ID form is modified, it is reflected in the login screen. 4\)The setting page is provided with a fixed content UX, so items cannot be modified like membership. You can only use the page provided. 5\) All functions (page) on the swing page are only available in a fixed design, so style modification is not possible. Depending on the color of the prototype, the background color can be modified, but the design cannot be changed. # Swing2App Page – Search Post ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/swing_search.png) How to use the search post function: integrated search of the bulletin board, search individual post. Swing2App provides a variety of bulletin board styles, users can freely make a post to create a bulletin board. At this time, you can also use the search post function to find the desired search terms. Swing2app provides two search post functions. 1. **Integrated Bulletin Board Search: Filters the search query to all bulletin boards applied to the app.** 2. **Search individual posts: Search for posts on individual bulletin boards.** **Ex: Search for announcement board posts, search for bulletin boards post.** –Please check the manual below on how to use and apply the search post. ### **1. Search post functions** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/boardsearch1@3x.png) The search post window will pop up at the top of the board list screen. Enter a word to search for and tap the ‘magnifying glass’ icon in the upper right corner to filter your search terms. ### **2. Apply to \[Search Post] App** 1. Click **Add a category**. 2. You can change the menu name at the top of the home screen (unless you change the name, it will be displayed as the app name.) 3. Select the **Swing2App Page** menu in the **menu type.** 4. Click the **Link Wizard.** 5. When the Link wizard window appears, select the **Search Post**. 6. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Press the **Apply** button. 8. Click on **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/postsearch.png) **\*Bulletin board integrated search function can be called in the Maker(V2)- Swing2App page.** **Search for individual posts** The bulletin board is made with a default search box. Therefore, the function to search for posts in a specific bulletin board is automatically provided for each bulletin board without having to add it. On the top right of the bulletin board, you will see a window where you can enter your search term by tapping on the ‘magnifying glass’ icon. ### **3. App Launch Screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/post_search.png) If you select the \[Search Post] menu you created, you will see a list of posts on all bulletin boards applied to your app, as shown in the above image. You can see the search field at the top. If you enter a search term, the search term is filtered. **★ TIP to organize search post** 1. Integrated search post: If you are searching the content of all the bulletin board posts – Please apply the \[Search Post] provided on the swing2app page. 2. Search for individual posts: If you apply the bulletin board without adding any other function, the search term input window is provided by default in the bulletin board. # Swing2App Page – View Favorites ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/01/view_fav.png) We will tell you how to use the ‘View Favorites’ provided by Swing2App. **View your favorites – A bookmark feature that collects and shows all the posts you’ve liked.** **If the user presses the ‘Like’ button, you can see all the posts you liked on the View Favorite board.** Through the manual – please find out how to apply and use the app’s interest writing function. ### **01. What is your favorite?** **This feature collects all the posts when the user presses the ‘Like’ button on an app post.** This is a general bookmarking function. If you have a post that you want to see later or save, click the ‘Like’ button. View all in Favorites view. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/01/pagefav1.png) ### **02. How to Use** **View favorites can be used in the Maker(V2) page → menu step → Swing2App page.** 1. Add a new menu by clicking **Add new category** or select a menu to apply. 2. Create **Menu Name** (Display Top Title) 3. Select **Swing2App Page** in the **Menu Type.** 4. Select the **Link Wizard** button. 5. Select **View Favorites** from the **Swing Function.** 6. Select the **Reflect** button 7. Select the **Apply** button 8. Select the **Save** button and you’re done. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/01/pagefav.png) ### **03. App Launch Screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/01/fav4.png) If you click ‘Like’ and then go to the Favorite bulletin board, you can see all the posts you just checked. \*View posts are shown in the UI timeline style. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/01/fav@3x.png) If you don’t have a liked post, you’ll see that you don’t have any posts. If a user likes you and another user is logged in, you will not see the likes. **04. Information** 1. To use ‘View Favorites’, you need to re-create the app and use it in the new version. (Soft updates can be made when the app is created). 2. Post ‘Like’ check is available only to users logged in after signing up in the app.\ Therefore, the favorites view is also available only to the user and not to the guest. 3. Check the logged-in user account.\ The user who clicked Like must be logged in as the same user to see the Like list in the View Favorites. 4. View favorites can not be applied to the app home screen. Only applicable for menus. 5. The list of ‘likes’ posts will be displayed in the order in which the posts were registered. # Swing2App Page – View Coupon ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/swing_coupon.png) **What is the View Coupon Menu?** **View Coupon is a coupon inquiry page for users to check the coupon issued by the app, and to check the used coupon.** When an administrator issues a coupon to a user, the user needs a page to see a list of the coupons they have received. The View Coupons menu allows the user to see the list of coupons received and the list of redeemed coupons. Therefore, if you operate a coupon issuance app, you must apply the menu in app creation. This feature is available in Maker(V2)→ Page Menu → Swing2App Page. We will show you how to use the view coupon menu applied to the app. Wait for a second! View how to create and apply a coupon. For coupons, the administrator must first create a coupon to be used in the app in the app operation, register it, and then proceed to app creation and apply the coupon inquiry page to the app. In the app Manager page, administrators can issue coupons to users and process them. **STEP.1 Create Coupon** Manager page → Services → Coupon → Enter the coupon details to be issued by selecting the \[Add Coupon] button. **STEP.2 Issue Coupon** From the coupon management page → select the \[Send Coupon] button → 1) Select the recipient settings → 2) Select the member you want to send push → 3) Select \[Send Coupon] → 4) Push message Subject → 5) Push Message Content → 6) Register Image → 7) Select \[Send Coupon].​ **STEP.3 Use Coupon** On the Coupon Management page, select 1) \[Use Coupon] button → 2) Enter Coupon Serial Number → 3) \[View and Use Coupon]. Alternatively, you can select the app administrator menu in the app to process the use of coupons. **☞** [**\[ Go to the full manual for coupon creation\]**](/manual/appmanage/service/coupon) ### **01. Apply the View Coupon Menu to your app** **Menu Type: Swing2App Page → Search Coupon will show you how to use the menu.** Go to Maker(V2) 1. Click on **Add a Category.** A new item with be added to the menu items. 2. Change the name of the new item added from in **Menu Name** option. 3. Select **Swing2App** from **Menu Type.** 4. Click on the **Link Wizard icon**(pencil icon). 5. Select **View Coupon** from the list in the **Swing Function** tab. 6. Click **Reflect.** 7. Click **Apply** and click **Save** at the top of the page. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/up3.png) ### **02. App Launch Screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/no_coup.png) If you select the Check my coupon menu created above, the coupon inquiry page will open. If no coupon has been issued, the message “coupon does not exist” will be displayed as in the image above. If you’ve received a coupon, check below to see what it will look like. **▶ Coupons Available** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/03/22@3x.png) Once your app has been issued a coupon, it will appear in the list of available coupons. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/coup3.png) When you select the coupon you received, the window will be switched to full screen so you can see the offer in more detail. **▶ Coupons Used** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/coup5.png) When the administrator processes the coupon you received, you can see that it has been processed in the \[Redeemed Coupon] list. **Have you checked how to use the View Coupon Menu?** On the app production page, you can see the coupons that users have received by applying the Swing2App page- View Coupon menu to the app. And this post shows how to apply the menu to search coupons on the swing2app page. Please check the entire manual to find out how to create coupons, issue them to users, and process them. **★ For coupon registration and coupon issuance process, please check the link below.** [https://support.swing2app.com/documentation/appmanage/service/coupon/](/manual/appmanage/service/coupon) # Swing2App Page – Share App ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/swing_share-.png) **What is sharing an app?** App sharing is a feature that allows you to share your app created on Swing2App with various applications. You can use it to share your apps with other users on Kakao Talk, messages, email, etc. You can share the app with a variety of application paths installed on your phone. **\*Precautions** * The free version of the app can be shared only on Android phones. (Share Free Edition App on iPhone X) * iPhone can not share the free version of the app, only apps released on the App Store can be shared. * When you share an app, if the app is released to the App Store or Play Store, you will be taken to the store launch link (URL). ### **01. Apply \[Share Apps]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EC%95%B1%EA%B3%B5%EC%9C%A01.png) Go to **Maker(V2)** 1. Click on **Add a Category.** A new item with be added to the menu items. 2. Change the name of the new item added from in **Menu Name** option. 3. Select **Swing2App** from **Menu Type.** 4. Click on the **Link Wizard icon**(pencil icon). 5. Select **Share** from the **Swing Function** tab. Click **Reflect**. 6. Click **Apply.** 7. Click **Save** at the top of the page. ### **02. Launch App Screen: Share App** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EC%95%B1%EA%B3%B5%EC%9C%A02.png) Select \[Share app] in the menu to open a list of apps that can be shared. \*The displayed application list is not the same on all mobile phones but will vary differently depending on the user’s mobile device and model. \*The first window will display the representative application, and you can select other applications by selecting Share Others. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EC%95%B1%EA%B3%B5%EC%9C%A03-1.png) Select \[Share Others] to see a list of various apps. **▶Email App Sharing** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EC%95%B1%EA%B3%B5%EC%9C%A04.png) In addition to sharing through katok, it can also be shared by email. When you connect to the recipient email, the app sharing email is sent to the inbox. Selecting the link will take you to the app install window as shown above. How to launch and install an app is the same as the kakao talk sharing method described above, and you can run and download the app depending on whether the user installs the app or not. ### **03. Menu Settings: Sharing Apps** \\ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EC%95%B1%EA%B3%B5%EC%9C%A06-1.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EC%95%B1%EA%B3%B5%EC%9C%A05.png) App sharing is also available in the default settings menu within the app, without using the app sharing feature of Swing2App page. **After launching the app, you can use the app sharing feature in the → Menu Settings**. Settings are pages where you can sign up for basic information, notification settings, and membership, and the settings menu is in default when creating the app. As a result, the App Sharing feature is also available as a default feature in the Menu Settings. **And in addition to sharing apps, you can share bulletin boards, posts, and images.** \[App sharing instructions-including app sharing, bulletin board, post sharing] ▶Android Phone Apps created in the free version can only be shared on Android phones. (Android Phone ↔ Android Phone) -If you share with users who have not installed the app, you can download the app by pressing the app (APK) download button. -If you share the app to installed users, just press the Run app button to go directly to the app. -If your app is released on the Play Store, you can go to the Play Store and download the app. ▶ iPhone Apps created in the free version does not support sharing on the iPhone. If the app is released on the App Store, iPhone users can also share it. (You can download the app by going to the App Store when sharing). **★Please check the following link posted for App sharing, bulletin board, and post sharing manual.** [**\[View how to use the app sharing manual\]**](/appguide/appoperation/appshare) [**\[View how to use the Bulletin Post Sharing Manual\]**](/appguide/appoperation/bulletinboard-share) # Swing2App Page – App Introduction ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/swing_intro.png) **What is an app introduction?**\ **App introduction is one of the menus that decorate the main home screen in the home screen style provided by the swing2app page.** App introduction and site address (URL), address, phone number, and email address can show the most basic home screen composition design. Since we don’t know what to put on the home screen when we first created the app with Swing2App, we provide the app introduction page by default to show users the home screen guidelines. So the home screen is, of course, in addition to the app introduction page, a variety of other menus like – image pages, web templates, HTML editor pages, images, bulletin boards, weblinks, etc. can be freely changed. ### **01. App Introduction – Apply to the App** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/appintro-e1587652751614.png) Go to App Production Page – Page Menu. 1\) Select \[Home Screen]. \*App introduction is usually applied to the home screen (main), but can also be applied to the app sub-menu. 2\) Enter the menu name 3\) Select \[Swing2App Page] from the menu type 4\) Select the \[Load] button. 5\) Select and apply the \[App Introduction] menu from the swing2app page menu. 6\) Select the \[Apply] button once more, and, 7)Press the \[Save] button at the top to apply it to the app. ### **02. App Launch Screen: Check the app introduction page** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/zero0.png) **This is the screen with the app introduction page.** **This is a style with an image of the app icon, with the app introduction, website link (URL), and navigation buttons at the bottom.** App introduction is the home main screen that provides a basic setting for those who create the app as a swing2app for the first time. Therefore, you do not have to use the home screen as an ‘app introduction’. You can make your home screen with various other menus. ### **03. App introduction page – How to edit the menu (contents)** 1. App production page – Go to the **Advanced** menu 2. In the **App Service Information** 3. You can edit all by pressing the **EDIT** button on your phone number, email, site address, address, and app description. 4. Press the Save button and it will be reflected in the app. Changes can be checked through the virtual machine. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/info.png) **\[App introduction description and banner contents editing method]**(When you create your first app, you’ll need to create it before it’s automatically reflected in the app when you’re re-editing it). \* The main title area is the default setting item and cannot be modified. “Welcome to —-” (phrase). **▶ How do I remove the navigation buttons below?** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_05_12_19_44_43_329.gif) **Advanced Settings – Press the \[Reset] button under ‘Phone Number, Email, Site Address, Address, App Description’ in the App Service Information.** Just press the Save button and the navigation buttons will disappear. If you want to make the multi-button visible, just press the RESET button on each set to enter the contents. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/screen_reset.png) You can see that the navigation button at the bottom of the app introduction screen is missing. **★ For more information on the app menu, please refer to the link posted below.** **☞** [**\[View the app introduction page manual \]**](/manual/maual/pagemenu/appintroductionpage) # Swing2App Page – Admin Chat ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/1_admin.png) **How to use 1: 1 chat with administrators and app members \[Admin chat]** The administrator can chat with members who use the app. Like Kakao Talk or Messenger, you can exchange conversations in real-time, so it can be useful when you need to communicate with specific members. * The app administrator can select a member to chat with. * App members can also talk to the administrator from the chat room menu applied to the app. Please check how to use the administrator chat (1:1 chat) through the manual. \\ ### **1. Apply admin chat to your app** **\* You must apply the \[Admin Chat] page to the app so both users and administrators can chat.** **The admin chat function is provided in the – Swing2App page of the app production page. Please apply for a chat room in the app.** 1. Click on **Add a Category.** A new item with be added to the menu items. 2. Change the name of the new item added from in **Menu Name** option. 3. Select **Swing2App Page** from **Menu Type.** 4. Click on the **Link Wizard icon**(pencil icon). 5. Select **Admin Chat** 6. .Click **Reflect**. 7. Click **Apply.** 8. Click **Save**. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/Admin_Chat_up.png) **▶Completed Chat Rooms** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/Screenshot-2020-04-14-at-01.51.01.png) You can see the admin chat page (1:1 chat) is applied to the app. So when the app members contact the administrator, you can enter the menu and start the conversation. ### **2. App Launch Screen: Chat room screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EC%98%81%EC%96%B4%EA%B4%80%EB%A6%AC%EC%9E%90%EC%B1%84%ED%8C%85.png) When you view the app launch screen, you will receive messages entered by the administrator in the chat room, and the app members can send and receive texts. **How can administrators chat with app members?** **Administrators can chat by selecting members from the member inquiry menu provided on the Swing2App web(app operation page).** Check out how the admin chats with app members below. ### **3. How administrators chat with app members** **1) Go to the member inquiry page** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/Caht2.png) Move to the swing2app homepage app operation page → push & membership → member inquiry menu. **2)Choose a member to talk to and chat with** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/Chat3.png) **You can check the \[Private Conversations], \[Public Conversations]**\*\* buttons on the Member’s Inquiry page.\*\* **On the member inquiry page, select a member to chat with and then click the corresponding chat button to start chatting.** **What is Private and Public Conversation?** The conversation option doesn’t matter to app members. This is the chat option administrators can choose. **▶Private Conversation** Only admins you are chatting with can see it. Other admins won’t get a chat push. **▶ Public Conversation** If you have multiple administrators, you can use it when you need to share a conversation. When you chat in a public conversation, the app members will also be able to push the chat to other administrators when they enter the chat message. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/e26.png) Select the member you want to chat with and select the \[Private Conversation] button at the top. ​ **3) Move chat list page: open chat window** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/chatlist2.png) If you choose to chat, you’ll be taken to the chat list page. The chat window will open. Administrators can type in the chat room and chat with members. ​ **\[Chat List Page]** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/chatlist1.png) On the chat list page, you can check the chat list of all the members you have chatted with. So if you need to talk to someone you’ve chatted with before, you can continue chatting again by selecting a member from the chat list page. **\*Please refer to the manual on how to use the chat administrator page** **☞** [**\[View how to use the admin chat page\]**](/manual/appmanage/service/chatlist) **★ Wait!!** **Administrators can chat on the web (Swing2App homepage) or in the app.** App administrator login allows admins to talk to members in the app. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/%EC%98%81%EC%96%B4%EA%B4%80%EB%A6%AC%EC%9E%90%EC%B1%84%ED%8C%852.png) ,**\*You can also chat with members in the app. Please check it!** **☞** [**\[View how to use the Admin App menu\]**](/appguide/appoperation/appmaster-chat) ### **4. New alarm push notification – administrators, members** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EC%B1%84%ED%8C%85%ED%99%94%EB%A9%B4.png) When you chat, app administrators and app members can all receive chat message notification pushes. **\*Instructions** 1. **1:1 chat is an administrator chat, chat function between the administrator and the app members.**\ App and swing2app operation page (web) is available.\ \*When using the app: \[Settings-App Administrator Menu] After login, select the user you want in \[User Management] and chat with.\ \*Please proceed to the homepage as mentioned above. 2. **Chat with the operator menu (1:1 chat) \*Maker(V2) → Page menu → Swing2App page, please apply as \[admin chat].** 3. **You can also use the \[Group Chat] to chat with the administrator and several users**.\ Please check the manual below on how to use group chat. **☞**[ **\[How to use the Group Chat Manual\]**](/manual/appmanage/board/groupchat) # Swing2App Page – How to read my article ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/12/Viewmyposts.png) We’ll show you how to use “View My Posts” on the swing2app page. Please check the application method for my article viewing feature to the app and how it looks like in the app! ### **01. What is My Article?** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/12/Mypost1.png) **We’ve added the \[View My Posts] feature, which allows you to see a list of posts you’ve written in the app.** The \[View My Posts] is a feature that shows posts you’ve written in the app, so you can see a list of (posts) at once. ### **02. How to apply in the app** 1. Click on **Add a Category.** A new item with be added to the menu items. 2. Change the name of the new item added from in **Menu Name** option. 3. Select **Swing2App Page** from **Menu Type.** 4. Click on the **Link Wizard icon**(pencil icon). 5. Select **View My Posts**. 6. Click **Reflect**. 7. Click **Apply.** 8. Click **Save**. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/12/mypost2.png) **My article view is available on the Maker(V2) → page menu step → swing2app page** ### **03. App Launch Screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/12/View_post.png) **When you go to the \[My Posts] menu applied to the app, you can collect and view all the posts you’ve created.** You need to be logged in as the user who wrote the article. Guests are not allowed. When you select \[My Posts] applied to the app, the user can see all the posts written in the app. ### **04. Instructions** **1) To use the \[View My Posts] feature, you need to rework on the app (update). (Soft update available)** \*New apps will be available to those who have created or updated the app after 30 November 2019. 2\) My post view is only available to users who are logged in after registering in the app. (Guests are not allowed.) 3\) Please check your logged-in user account. You must be logged in as the same user to see the list of posts you’ve written. 4\) My post view does not apply to the app home screen. Only applicable for menus. 5\) My view board is shown in the timeline UI style. The displayed style (UI) cannot be modified. # Swing2App Page - Survey ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/page_survey.png) **What is a survey?** Survey management is a feature that allows you to conduct a survey for users of the app. Inquiry from users is possible, objective surveys are possible, and surveys can be conducted for various purposes, such as satisfaction surveys and public relation surveys. Swing2App provides a tool for surveys, so you can simply create a questionnaire by entering your questions and answers. ### **01. \[Survey] – Apply App** Go to Maker(V2) – Page Menu. 1. Select the menu item on the Home screen in which you need to enter a new menu item. Then click **Add a Category.** 2. Enter the name of the menu item in **Menu Name.** 3. Select **Swing2App Page** from **Menu Type.** 4. Click the **Link wizard icon.** The link wizard window will open. 5. Select **Survey** from the **Swing Function** list. 6. Click **Reflect.** 7. Click **Apply** and click **Save.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/up2.png) ### **02. App Launch Screen: Check Survey Page** After applying the survey feature to the app, you’ll see the app (you can also check virtual machines) and you’ll see the message “No registered surveys”. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/Screenshot-2020-05-10-at-20.03.23.png) Surveys must be added on the Manager page before the survey will be visible in the app. So if you’ve applied a – survey page to your app, \*Go to Manager → Services → Survey, and please add a questionnaire. **\*Order does not matter.** -You can create a survey first in your app, then apply the survey page in App creation. -After applying the survey page in the app creation-You can create a form in the app operation. ### **03. Create a survey** **Let’s go-to app operations and create a survey paper.** **1. Move survey management menu** Move to Manager Page → Services → Surveys. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/Survey1.png) **2. Enter basic information** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/e9.png) First of all, please enter the basic information required for the survey on the survey management page. \* Items marked with \* are mandatory items. 1\)Name of Survey: Enter the title of the survey. 2\)Date range: Enter the date range for the survey and specify the start date and the end date and time. 3\) Manage survey items: Manage your survey items by entering what you want to enter in the questionnaire and click on the “Add new survey items” icon shown on the right. **Surveys can be sent by push.** **To send a push, select Push Settings, select a destination, and enter a title, content, and image.** **If you need to notify a large audience about your survey with announcements, it’s a good idea to use push.** **3. Enter Survey Items** 1. ​​Question Contents: Enter the question to enter in the questionnaire. 2. Mandatory item: Mandatory item is to select whether the question is mandatory to answer or not.\ Therefore, please check the ‘Required answer items’ if you must answer. 3. Answer Type: The Answer Type allows users to check whether they are single choice, multiple choices, or descriptive answers that need to be entered. 4. Create answer item: Select one item from a single type, multiple selections or action type to create. 5. Save: Press the ‘Save’ button when all contents are completed. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/e10.png) **4. Complete the questionnaire** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/Survey4.png) Please press ‘Save’ when you have completed the basic form and contents. **5. App launch screen: Survey** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/Group-270@3x.png) Once you’ve completed your survey, run the app again, and the survey you’ve entered will pop up. When you select the item, you’ll be taken to the survey site. **For more information on creating surveys and participating in the app, please check the link posted below!** **☞** [**\[How to use survey registration, management and app launch screen\]**](/manual/appmanage/service/survey) **Go to details** ▶ Create a survey Manager page → Services → Surveys → Select the ‘Add Survey’ Button → Survey name, set the survey period → Click the “Add new survey item” button to enter your question and answer item. ▶How to apply to the Forms app Apply the created questionnaire to the app. Maker(V2) page → Page menu → Add menu → Menu name → Load \[Swing2App page] → Select ‘Survey’ and save. ▶Take a survey from the app After running the app, you can take surveys. You can take a survey by selecting the menu and touching the screen. \*Surveys are available for members who subscribe to the app-user ratings. Please note that guests are not allowed. ▶Checking the Survey Results Entered by Users On the Manager page → Services → Surveys → Select ‘Number’ ‘ → ‘User’ from the participants can confirm the results of the survey. Click on the link above to see all the details. # App Production Application TIP Manual TIP on How to create an app Application. Please select a sub-category to view the production manual. # Sending a push using the push API Send Swing2App push using push API Swing2App provides the following to send push messages sent from the dashboard in the form of API. The use of APIs in a manner not previously agreed upon and indiscriminate mass delivery may be restricted. This API is provided to paid app users. **1. API Specification** | API Address | | | -------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | | HTTP Method | Post | | Parameter Name | Input Example | Explanation | | --------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | app\_id | kbe35b81a-5dc6-4cec-ad76-e7bcc3310642 | \*App ID issued by Swing2App | | send\_target\_list | targetUserId or -1 |

\*User ID to send

User\_id for single send

When sending multiple transmissions, separate them with “,” and enter

ex:) user\_id1,user\_id2

Enter -1 for all shipments

ex:) -1

| | send\_target\_type\_list | MEMBER or ALL\_TARGET |

\* Enter MEMBER as many times as you want to send to individual users.

(Example: ‘MEMBER,MEMBER’),

For shipping to all, include ‘ALL\_TARGET’.

(Example: ‘ALL\_TARGET’),

| | send\_type | push | \*Enter ‘push’ because it is push sending | | message\_json | { “messageTitle” : “Content” , “messageContent” : “Content” , “messageLinkUrl” : “ , “messageImageUrl” : “ } |

\*Enter the following variable according to the JSON format string

messageTitle: Title,

messageContent: Content

messageLinkUrl: Link address

messageImageUrl: Image address

\*Can be omitted if there is no link address and image address

| | api\_user | | \*Swing2App User ID | | api\_key | abewfw235ksie8d | \*API KEY issued by Swing2App | **\* App ID and API KEY that need to be issued can be issued by requesting the customer service center.** \[javascript Implementation example – Send all] ``` var apiUserId = "help@swing2app.com"; var apiKey = "test_api_key"; var appId = "test_app_id"; var messageJson = '{ "messageTitle" : "Title" , "messageContent" : "Content" , "messageLinkUrl" : "http://m.naver.com" , messageImageUrl : "http://swing2app.com/abc.png" }'; var sendTargetList = '-1'; var sendTargetTypeList = "ALL_TARGET"; $.ajax({ url: "https://api.swing2app.com/swapi/push_send", type: "post", dataType: "json", data : { app_id : appId, send_target_list : sendTargetList, send_target_type_list : sendTargetTypeList, send_type : 'push' , message_json : messageJson, api_user : apiUserId, api_key : apiKey }, success: function (model) { console.log("Push sending success"); } }); ``` \[javascript Implementation example – Individual delivery] ``` var apiUserId = "help@swing2app.com"; var apiKey = "test_api_key"; var appId = "test_app_id"; var messageJson = '{ "messageTitle" : "Title" , "messageContent" : "Content"}'; var sendTargetList = 'user_id'; var sendTargetTypeList = "MEMBER"; $.ajax({ url: "https://api.swing2app.com/swapi/push_send", type: "post", dataType: "json", data : { app_id : appId, send_target_list : sendTargetList, send_target_type_list : sendTargetTypeList, send_type : 'push' , message_json : messageJson, api_user : apiUserId, api_key : apiKey }, success: function (model) { console.log("Push sending success"); } }); ``` # Insert GIF image ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/gif1.png) **How to create a GIF by putting a GIF image on the home screen** ![](https://s3.ap-northeast-2.amazonaws.com/swing2bucket/resource/image/help/2b3dac295d23afd6263eac46599d1cf7.png) **You can create a screen that moves your home screen by putting a GIF image like an attached image.**\ **Please check how to place the image on your home screen through the app-making swing2app post below.** ### **1. Attached a GIF image on the image page** Go to on **Maker(V2)** and click on **Page Menu.** 1. Click on **Add Category.** A new menu item will appear. 2. Select the new menu item and change the name in **Menu Name.** 3. Select the new menu item. 4. Select the User’s page from Menu Type. 5. Click on the **Link Wizard** icon. The **Link Wizard** pop-up window will open. Select the **Image map** to edit the gif in the Image page creation window. 6. Select the image added as a gif in the Link wizard window. Click on **Reflect.** 7. Click on **Apply.** 8. Click on **Save.** **You can also add an animated image to the image page.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/image1-1-e1588928312121.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-05-08-at-14.23.07.png) You can put it as an image, but you can also create an animated image as an image page.\ **The advantage of Image Page Maker is that it can be created like a web page, and links can be linked by applying a banner on the image.**\ Therefore, to use this function, select User Page – Image Page and apply the animated image.\ **Likewise, when opening an image file, set ‘All Files’ and attach a GIF file.** . **★ GIF image attached important TIP** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-06-22-at-7.08.10-PM.png) GIF files are not visible in regular files.\ Therefore, you need to change the setting to **‘All Files’** at the bottom of the file window to view the GIF files.\ **Change to all files and select the GIF file you have already worked on.**\\ **Complete !! This is the home screen with the image.** However, there is a question here. \*\*Prototype – How do I see the menu name on the image without a toolbar (colored area) that I created in a footer style?\ This is the right way, Design Theme – This is because we applied the style as ‘transparency’ in the app’s main design style.\ We will show you how to change the style to transparent below. ### **2. App main design style: Apply Transparency** +**If you want to remove the toolbar area on the app home screen like the image attached above, you can use the app’s main design style function.** \*\*+App main design style can be found \*\***on the Maker(V2) page – Design Theme stage.**\ \ \ **1) Set as default** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/home-e1588929511116.png) Instead of applying the app’s main design style, we’ll just place the image with the default settings.\ **Then, as it is set from the original swing2app, the prototype: footer style is applied.**\ **As shown in the image above, a toolbar area is created at the top and bottom of the phone screen.**\ The color set in the design theme is shown as it is.\ Doesn’t it look pretty if you have a bar area with colors that don’t match your home screen?\ \ \ **2) App main design style: Choose transparency** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/home1-e1588929537934.png) Select **‘Transparency’** as the App Main Design Style and press the **‘Save’** button.\ Then the toolbar area will be missing and the whole screen will be composed as the main page. The image applied to the home screen can be more emphasized and will look cleaner.\ **The menu (text) color can be changed to a different color, so please edit the text color in the design theme – color to make the text visible on top of the image.** **★ Information** **1) You can create your animated image or write a separate gif file.** **2) To make the image appear fully on the home screen, you can make it in 1024px width and 1680-1980px in height, not more than twice the width.** **The size will be resized depending on what prototype is applied, so please check the image applied to the virtual machine and adjust the size accordingly.** **3) You can only upload files within 5MB.** **4) When uploading a file, you must set ‘Open all files’ to open the gif file.** # Create a Flash style home screen ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Home_screen-2.png) **TIP to Create App) Create Flash Style Home Screen** Flash is a style that automatically converts images, which is a popular way to create screens in apps. Swing2App does not provide a flash function, but you can apply the function of swing2app sufficiently. We will show you how to create a Flash style home screen using Swing2App’s web template page creator. **★ Flash Style Home Screen** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_08_16_50_09_818.gif) **We will show you how to create a Flash style home screen like in the above image.** +The app applies a template page. +You can apply the gif image that you have created to the top header image. ### **STEP.1 Create a web template page** Go to **Maker(V2)** page and click on the **Page menu.** 1. Click on **Add a Category.** A new item with be added to the menu items. 2. Change the name of the new item added from in **Menu Name** option. 3. Select the **User’s page** from **Menu Type.** 4. Click on the **Link Wizard icon**(pencil icon). 5. Select **Page Template** from the **User’s Page** tab and click **New** to select a web template from the list of Swing2App templates. Edit page as per requirement and save. 6. Click **Reflect**. 7. Click **Apply.** 8. Click **Save**. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/temp1.png) ### **STEP.2 Web Template Creator** **1. New Page: Selecting a Page Type** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/flash1.png) If you select the **\[+ New]** button at the bottom, you can check the page tool types of various industries provided by Swing2App (10 industry templates available).\ Select the desired page and press the \[Add] button.\ \ **\*\* I have chosen the \[Details] page of the nail industry here.**\ There is no need to select the same page as the manual.\ You can select the page you want to work with according to the design of your app.\\ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Screenshot-2020-05-08-at-15.47.23.png) The nail-detail page has been opened.\ **\* The Web Template page is a tool for editing and applying images and text to the template tool provided by Swing2App.**\ **You can check the page edits on the left side of the screen, and edit the image and text to match the app’s personality on the web edit screen on the right.** **2. Attach Images**\\ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/flash2.png) Before attaching an image, there is something you have to do first.\ To work like the app home screen shown above, it’s called gif. You need to create a moving gif file first.\ **\*\*Can you see the header image size?**\\ Make sure to check the 1080 x 718-pixel size. \ If the size is not correct, the gif file will go into the regular picture file (png, jpg).\ Please work according to size beforehand. Selecting the header image part opens the file attachment window.\ Select \[Upload] button here and select the desired image file and press \[Apply]. **★ Notice** GIF files are not visible in regular files.\ Therefore, **you need to change the setting to ‘All Files’ at the bottom of the file window to see the gif files**.\ Change to all files and select the gif file you have already worked on. **3. Edit text**\\ ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/flash3.png) If you have attached a gif image to the header, please edit the text (phrase) that corresponds to the rest of the text. I am editing the main title and subtitle text shown in the header image part.\ If you don’t need the content like me, you can delete the existing text as you can see in the above image. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/flash4.png) Please edit all the other details on the template page.\ **\*For text, you can set the font size, color, etc. by selecting the font button next to it.**\ If you want to give a different option than the default one, select the font button and edit it.\ When you have finished entering the template content, select the \[Save Data] button at the top to save it. **★You must also edit the page name. Do not forget!**\ **It appears in the app as the page name.** ### **STEP.3 Apply to Web Template App you created** Go to **Maker(V2)** page and click on the **Page menu.** 1. Click on **Add a Category.** A new item with be added to the menu items. 2. Change the name of the new item added from in **Menu Name** option. 3. Select the **User’s page** from **Menu Type.** 4. Click on the **Link Wizard icon**(pencil icon). 5. Select **Page Template** from the **User’s Page** tab and select the page in with the flash image. 6. Click **Reflect**. 7. Click **Apply.** 8. Click **Save**. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/flash6.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_08_16_52_19_342.gif) As you can see in the virtual machine above, you can see the top header image is applied in Flash style. **★ Notice** 1\) You can create your animated image or write a separate gif file. 2\) However, the image that enters the web template page is listed in the recommended size. Therefore, you need to make an image for that size. 3\) You can only upload files within 5MB. 4\) When uploading a file, you must set ‘All files’ to open the gif file. # Change App Loading Icon ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/app_load.png) **TIP on App production application ) How to change the app loading icon** **▶ What is the loading icon?** Loading is the process of preparing a program to run before the task is executed in the app. The image displayed while loading is the loading icon. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_10_14_39_43_619.gif) **↑↑The grey circle icon will rotate while loading as shown in the image above.** The loading icon is a function that is loaded automatically from the server, so there’s nothing for Swing2App’s users to do.\ The default loading icon is provided like the above image.\ However, there are times when you want to edit the loading icon image to fit your app style a little more.\ So in the manual, we will show you how to change the loading icon by adding another image in addition to the existing loading icon. ### **1. Changing the loading icon** **Swing2App Maker(V2) page → Advanced settings → Please check the App production settings.** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/load_icon1.png) If you look at the app production settings, there is a loading icon menu.\ 1\. Select the Loading icon **EDIT** button.\ 2\. Select the set **Value** image in the EDIT window.\ 3\. Select the **Update** button after attaching the image. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/load_icon2.png) \*Please load your own image. \ \*Please work horizontally and vertically at a square ratio and at least 500px in size.\ \*GIF images can also be attached. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/load_icon3.png) If you have updated your image,\ 4\. Click the **Save** button at the top.\ 5\. Click the **App Creation Request** button.\ 6\. Select the update setting and click the **Make** button\ 7\. Click **OK**. \*If you edit the advanced settings menu, you cannot just save it. You must update your app by reproducing it.\ \*And when editing the advanced settings menu, the edited content is not reflected in the virtual machine, so please check after running the app on the phone. ### **2. Run App Screen – Check the loading icon** **▶ Legacy loading icon** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_10_14_39_43_619.gif) **The loading icon above is the loading icon style provided by swing2app.** \ **▶ Edited Loading Icon** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/%EB%85%B9%ED%99%94_2020_06_10_14_32_41_232.gif) It’s a logo icon that was changed by putting the swing2app logo image. **Application: You can also put GIF images!** As explained above, the loading icon can also contain gif images.\ \ The loading icon is provided by default without changing, so you can use it as it is. You can apply it to other loading icon images to suit your app. # Set device mode (switch app screens) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/device-mode.png) **Setting app device mode** **+Device mode refers to switching the mobile phone screen.** **+You can choose to create the app screen portrait or landscape only.** The default app setting created in Swing2App is \[Horizontal-Vertical Composite], so you can rotate the app screen freely. If you want to see only the landscape mode or portrait mode depending on the app, you can change the app screen to landscape or portrait mode in the advanced settings – device mode. **▶Example of creating an app in landscape** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EA%B0%80%EB%A1%9C%EB%B2%84%EC%A0%84%EC%95%B1.png) ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EA%B0%80%EB%A1%9C%EB%B2%84%EC%A0%84%EC%95%B12.png) If you look at your app, apps created in landscape mode will have the app screen in landscape mode as soon as you launch it. The screen automatically switches to horizontally. Landscape mode is not a separate development. You can build landscape mode apps with advanced setup options provided by Swing2App. Please switch the app screen to see how to create an app. ### **1. How to change app device mode** Go to Maker(V2) 1. Click on **Advanced.** 2. Select **App Production Settings.** 3. Click on **Edit** in front of **Device Mode**. 4. Select desired Value (the app’s default setting is set to horizontal-vertical composite) 5. Click on the **Update** button. 6. Select the **Save** button. ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/dev_mode.png) **7. Press the \[App Production Request] button to check the newly created app version.** > **\*Horizontal-Vertical Composite: The screen can be rotated vertically and horizontally.** > > **\*Vertical: The screen is not switched horizontally, the app operates only in the vertical screen.** > > **\*Horizontal: The screen is not switched vertically and the app runs only in landscape.** > > **\*Apps created in Swing2App are basically set and created as landscape-portrait composites.** > > **If you need to edit the device mode for a horizontal or vertical only, please set the mode according to the method above.** ### **2. Check the app on your phone** ▶**Portrait Mode** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EC%84%B8%EB%A1%9C%EB%B2%84%EC%A0%84%EC%95%B1.png) In portrait mode or landscape-vertical composite app, the app is shown in a portrait screen when launched. ▶**Landscape Mode** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/%EC%98%81%EB%AC%B8_%EA%B0%80%EB%A1%9C%EB%B2%84%EC%A0%84%EC%95%B1.png) Apps created in landscape mode appear to have a horizontal screen when the app is launched. Apps created with \[Horizontal-Vertical Composite] can also be rotated horizontally to switch the app screen to landscape. **▶ Mobile Phone Settings – Auto Rotation (Auto Display)** ![](https://support.swing2app.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/9cd7b0df-7913-41d6-86d9-33503c9a4292.jpg) In the landscape-vertical composite, you should be able to view the screen horizontally and vertically when the automatic screen rotation is selected on the phone. Please check the screen switch in the phone settings. **★ Device mode** The app is built on the default device: Landscape-Portrait. If you want to change the screen to landscape or portrait mode, \*Swing2App production page → Advanced settings menu → App production settings → Device mode ‘EDIT’ → Select ‘Horizontal only’ or ‘Vertical only’. When you recreate the app, the app screen switches to the mode set when you launch the app on your phone. --- [Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)